RISO MZ Servicemanual Engl

E
MZ MV
OP
SERIES
TECHNICAL MANUAL
URRISO MZ 770 A
RISO MZ 770 E
RISO MZ 790 U
RISO MV 7690 C
OE
REVISION 0.3
APRIL 2005
Copyright : 2005 Riso Kagaku Corporation

All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared and
written for the exclusive use of RISO International Group Certified
RIS
Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of this material in any form

or by any means, including photocopying or recording of the
information is strictly prohibited without the consent of a member of
RISO International Group.
RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP

RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION (JAPAN) RISO DEUTSCHLAND GMBH (GERMANY)
RISO, INC. (U.S.A.) RISO FRANCE (FRANCE)
RISO EUROPE LIMITED (U.K.) RISO IBERICA (SPAIN)
RISO HONG KONG (HONG KONG) RISO CANADA (CANADA)
RISO UK (U.K.) ZHUHAI RISO TECHNOLOGY (CHINA)
RISO THAILAND LIMITED (THAILAND) RISO AFRICA (SOUTH AFRICA)
RISO KOREA LIMITED (KOREA) RISOGRAPH ITALIA (ITALY)
E
IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS
OP
• Always disconnect the power plug before performing maintenance work.
• Be careful to avoid getting neckties, clothing, long hair, or similar articles

caught in moving or rotating parts.
UR
• Exercise extreme caution if you must work on the machine while power
is on.
• Never work on the machine while it is operating.
• Be careful to avoid injuries caused by springs or sharp edges of sheet

metal.
OE
RIS
INDEX
E
Important Precautions
OP
Chapter 1 : Maintenance
Chapter 2 : Machine Summary
Chapter 3 : Main Drive Section
Chapter 4 : Initial Paper Feed Section
UR
Chapter 5 : Second Paper Feed Section
Chapter 6 : Pressure Section
Chapter 7 : Center Transport Section
Chapter 8 : Paper Ejection Section
OE
Chapter 9 : Print Drum Section
Chapter 10 : Clamp Units
Chapter 11 : Master Removal Section
Chapter 12 : FB Scanning Section
RIS
Chapter 13 : AF Scanning Section

Chapter 14 : Master Making Section
Chapter 15 : Test Mode
Chapter 16 : Panel Message
Chapter 17 : Other Precautions
Chapter 18 : PCBs
Blank Page
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
Chapter 1 Maintenance
E
Contents
OP
Preface ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1. Work Precautions .................................................................................................................... 1-3
Caution ............................................................................................................................... 1-4
Warning .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
2. Description of Jigs .................................................................................................................. 1-8
3.
4.
UR
Notice ....................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Options Installation Procedures .......................................................................................... 1-11

1) Inkless Print Cylinder (Drum) ....................................................................................... 1-11
2) Stand D Type (II) ......................................................................................................... 1-12
3) Stand N Type (II) ......................................................................................................... 1-13
4) Document Storage Card DM-128CF:Z ........................................................................ 1-14
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-IV:N .................................................................................. 1-15
6) Job Separator IV:N ...................................................................................................... 1-24
7) Key/Card Counter IV ................................................................................................... 1-28
OE
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed / Ejection ................................................................................. 1-33
5. Removing Exterior Covers ................................................................................................... 1-38
6. Opening the SH PCB Bracket and Power Supply/Sytem PCB Bracket ............................. 1-41
RIS
[1-1]
CHAPTER 1: MAINTENANCE
Preface
E
This manual provides Technical Service Information for the RISO printer models MZ and MV series.
This manual provides procedures for removing and installing major components. Following these procedures
awareness and experience regarding repairs necessary to insure end-user satisfaction.
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[1-2]
1. Work Precautions
When conducting maintenance work, be careful to avoid injury caused by springs or the sharp
E
edges of sheet metal.
Inspection
If you discover any defects or problems during an inspection, fix the problems or if necessary take steps
OP
such as replacing a part.
Removal
Check the problem area. At the same time, examine the cause of the problem and determine whether
the part needs to be removed or disassembled. Next proceed according to the procedures presented in
the Technical Manual. In cases where, for example, it is necessary to disassemble areas with large
numbers of parts, parts which are similar to each other, or parts which are the same on the left and right,
sort the parts so that you do not mix them up during reassembly.
(1) Carefully sort the removed parts.
(2) Distinguish between parts which are being replaced and those which will be reused.
Assembly and Installation

UR
(3) When replacing screws, etc., be sure to use the specified sizes.
Unless specified otherwise, perform the removal procedures in

reverse during assembly and installation. In cases where
protrusions or holes are provided to assist in positioning parts,
use them for accurate positioning and securing.
Half-pierced section
(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts Half pierced

OE
section)
Tools 0101
Using tools other than those specified can lead to injury or
damage screws and parts. Have all the tools necessary for the
work available.
[Standard Tool list]
Type Tip size Shaft length, etc. Type Rem arks

No. 2 (250 mm) Steel scale 150 mm
RIS
No. 2 (100 mm–150 mm) Feeler gauge

Phillips screw driver
No. 2 (stubby type)
Radial cutting pliers
No. 1 (75 mm–100 mm)
Pliers
6 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
Standard Nipper
3 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
screw driver Small flashlight
1.8 mm (precision type)
Multimeter
Nut driver 8 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
Soldering iron 20 W–30 W
(box driver) 7 mm (100 mm–150 mm)
File Flat, round
High frequency
2.5 mm 0103
driver
5 mm 5.5 mm 7 mm
Spanners 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm
Monkey
5.0 mm 4.0 mm 3.0 mm

Hex w renches 2.5 mm 2.0 mm 1.5 mm
(For 3.0mm, 2 pieces required ) 0102
[1-3]
E
CAUTION
OP
[Handling of Lithium Battery]
- Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used
lithium battery.
1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery will
be short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or one upon
another, the above-mentioned case will occur.
- DANGER -
UR
If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases explode into
fire.
2. Never heat up the battery.
- DANGER -
If you heat the battery up to more than 100 degrees Celsius or put it into the fire,
it may burn dangerously or explode.
3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.
- DANGER -
OE
If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt your
throat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire.
If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of the
sealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.
4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.
If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.
Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.
[Replacement of the Lithium Battery]
1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service

RIS
technician.
2. The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
[1-4]
E
!! WARNING !!
Important Safety Precautions
OP
1. Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the
machine.
I. To avoid injuries:
Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling, or when
making adjustments on the machine.
II. Protection of the machine:

Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging the
electrical connectors, or when connecting a Meter.
2. WARNING:
UR
The back light tube of LCD of the Control Panel on this Model contains mercury
which must be recycled or disposed of as hazardous waste.
3. Always connect electrical connectors firmly.
I. To avoid electrical failure:

OE
The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.
Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm fit.
II. Protection of the electrical components:

The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a loose
connector.
Wire harness connector

FIRST
RIS
Press the ends.
THEN
Press the center, firmly.

0116
[1-5]
Electrical system work

• After removing wire bundles, fasten them with wire
bundle bands (bar lock ties) so they will not sag.
E
Wire bundle bands
• When installing parts, be careful to avoid pinching (bar lock ties)
or damaging the wire bundles.
• If a fuse blows, always replace with a fuse of the
specified capacity. Light-emitting section
OP
• As well as damaging parts, using a larger capacity
fuse may result in fire.
• Be careful to avoid dropping image scanners,
thermal print heads, or other sensors. These
components are easily damaged.
Sensor types
UR
• Photoelectric sensors can be roughly classified
into the following five categories: interrupt type (U-
shaped), actuator type, reflective type, transmis-
sive type, and reflective (prism) type.
• Always switch off power before plugging or un-
plugging sensor connectors.
Interrupt type
Light-emitting
section
Light
receiving
Actuator type
Light-emitting section
0104
Light receiving section section

OE
Reflective (prism) type Reflective type
Transmissive type
Light-emitting
Light-emitting
section
section
Light receiving Light receiving Light-emitting

0105 Prism Light receiving section
section section section 0106
Switch types
• Microswitches may be divided into either normally
open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) types.
RIS
• In an N.O. type microswitch, pressing the switch

actuator connects the internal contact. N.C. N.C.
• In an N.C. type microswitch, pressing the switch N.O. N.O.
actuator disconnects the internal contact.
COM (common COM (common
terminal) terminal) 0107
Note
The RZ series contains may gears. When inspecting or replacing parts, be sure to apply lubrication to the
gears.
If gears are not properly lubricated, abnormal sounds, malfunctions, or mechanical problems may result.
[1-6]
Installation location
E
Do not install the machine in any of the following locations.
(1) Those subject to direct sunlight or any bright location such as by a window (If you must install in such
a location, put a curtain or the like over the window.).
OP
(2) Those where the temperature changes drastically.
(3) Those that are too hot, cold, humid, or dry.
RECOMMENDED:
Temperature range: 15 degrees Celsius - 30 degrees Celsius
Humidity range: 40% - 70% No condensation allowed
(4) Those with radiant heat sources and any locations in the direct path of air from air conditioners or
heaters.
(6) Dusty atmosphere.
(7) Any tilted location.

UR
(5) Any poorly ventilated location.
(Installation height difference: 10 mm max. front - rear, 10 mm max. left - right).

OE
Electrical connection
- Plug the plug securely into the socket so that there is no problem with the contact in the power
supply plug section.
- Do not use any triplets or extension cords.
- Do not allow any other machine to stand on or crush the power cord.
Ground connection
RIS
- Always ground this machine to prevent electrical shock in case of an electrical leakage.
• Never connect the ground wire to any of the following:

Gas pipe
Ground wire for telephone
Lightning rod
Water supply pipe or faucet with plastic pipe used at one or more sections
[1-7]
2. Description of Jigs
E
OP
0108
Screen jig
UR
Form a hook on the ring end of the screen spring assembly
13 (021-16007-005) and attach a wire tie band to the other side.
OE
0109 0110
Jig: 8 mm (Dia.) x 160 mm (Length) Jig: 4 mm (Dia.) x 120 mm (Length)

(2 pieces required) 024-75064-006
RIS
016-16141-003
* These part numbers are accurate as of December 2004.

Note that part numbers are subject to change without notice.
[1-8]
1 024-36008-107 3. NOTICE
ミラーマット
Notice
E
The following procedures are required when installing the printer.
製版ユニットを元に戻す。 6. Scanner Cover; R 1. Remove the Scanner Cover; R.
OP
く。製版ユニット
製版ユニットを開け、ミラーマット（2 枚）を取り除 5.
UR
Securing plate 2. Remove the protectors from both sides of the
Master making unit.
重要：板金は手順7で再度固定します。
板金を取り外す（ネジ2 本）。 4.
3. Remove the screws which lock the Master making
unit and pull out the Master making unit.
スペーサー
Important: Retain the removed screws as they will
OE
be reused at procedure7.
Protectors
重要：ネジは手順 7で再利用します。
し、製版ユニットを引き出す。
4. Remove the securing plate. (two screws)
製版ユニットを固定しているネジ（2 本）を取り外 3.
Important: Retain the securing plate as it will be
fixed again at procedure7.
板金
スペーサー（2 本）を取り除く。 2.
RIS
5. Open the Master making unit and remove the
Master making unit
Shock absorbing sheets.
スキャナカバー;右を取り外す。 1. スキャナカバー;右 6. Replace the Master making unit as before.

必ず下記の手順で設置準備を行ってください
お願い Shock absorbing sheets
1
[1-9]
2
3. NOTICE
E
7. Replace the securing plate and secure it with the
screws.
Important: Slightly slide the securing plate upwards
OP
and fix it at the upper position.
8. Replace the Scanner Cover; R.
UR
User's guide case
9. Attach the User's guide case to the printer. Remove
the adhesive cover sheet on the backside and affix
the case on the printer. Be sure to consult your
customer for attachment position.
OE
取り付けてください。
上で、ケース裏面のテープで架台側面などに
重要：どこに取り付けるか、お客様の意向を確認した
取説ケース
取説ケースを取り付ける。 9.
RIS
スキャナカバー；右を元通りに取り付ける。 8.
重要：板金は上に寄せて取り付けてください。
板金をネジ（2本）で取り付ける。 7.
2 [1-10]
4. OPTIONS 1) Inkless Print Cylinder (Drum)
Installation Procedure
for The Ztype series Inkless Print Cylinder (Drum)
Types of Applicable Printers Packing List
E
The following printer models are the intended basic This package contains the following items.
units for installing the Ztype inkless print cylinder 1. Print cylinder (drum) ................................... 1 unit
(drum). 2. Ink color indication label ...................... 1 sheet
OP
3. Print cylinder (drum) indication label ...... 2 sheets
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 4. *Caution label ....................................... 1 sheet
(*for UI print cylinder (drum) only )
RISO MZ7 series 5. Installation guide (This manual) .......... 1 copy
6. *Declaration of conformity .................. 1 copy
Nobody but Riso-authorized service
(*for EU only)
representatives is allowed to install this unit.
Important !
Be sure to follow the given instructions, or the warranty on this Print cylinder (drum) may be invalidated.
1. Print Cylinder (Drum) Preparation
UR
1) Remove two Shock absorbing blocks from the Print cylinder (drum).
2) Insert an ink cartridge into the Print cylinder (drum).
Lead ink to the nozzle of the cartridge in advance.
Important !
Be sure that the Print cylinder (drum) temperature is above 59 °F (10 °C).
3) Plug the power cord of the printer and start up the test mode.
Important !
Be sure that there is no Print cylinder (drum) installed in the printer at this point.
OE
4) Install the Print cylinder (drum) in the printer.
Press the Reset key when an error code appears.
5) Input the test item code “No. 117” and press the Start key.
Print Cylinder (Drum) Selection screen will appear. Select the Print Cylinder (Drum)
which is installing at the present time and press the Start key.
7) Once turn the power switch off and start up the test mode again.
Print Cylinder (Drum) Selection screen will appear. Select the Print Cylinder (Drum)
which is installing at the present time and press the Start key.
When the ink supply action is completed, a buzzer sounds.
RIS
NOTE : If the action is interrupted, restart the test mode “No.887”.

9) Restart the printer to quit the test mode.
Ztype
2. Operation Check
A3
1) Make a master with Riso test chart No.8 and print 200 copies at speed 3.
2) Check density balance and if necessary, re-adjust the gap between Squeegee
roller and Print cylinder (drum) body.
3. Labeling
1) Affix the following labels on the Print cylinder (drum) as illustrated.
- Print cylinder (drum) indication label Ztype
- Model name indication label A3

- Ink color indication label
- Caution label (for UI print cylinder (drum) only )
2) Affix the following labels on the Print cylinder (drum) case as illustrated.
- Print cylinder (drum) indication label
- Model name indication label
This document is printed on recycled paper.
024-36061-300
[1-11]
2) Stand D Type (II)
RISO Stand D Type (II) Installation Procedure
E
Packing List
1. Stand ................................ 1 pc.
2. Door R ................................ 1 pc.
Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives
OP
3. Door L ................................. 1 pc.
is allowed to install this unit.
4. Guide pin ............................. 2 pcs.
5. Screws ................................ 1 set
Guide pin
1. Secure two Guide Pins on the top of the stand.
UR
OE
2. Secure the Doors to each Side panel with binding
screws.
Important: Hook the square hole of a hinge on the
Boss of the panel and secure it at the
position where it becomes equal space
between a Boss and a hole.
RIS
3. Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet

in the dents on the Stand top board.
Boss
Equal space
024-36001-005
[1-12]
3) Stand N Type (II)
RISO Stand N Type (II) Installation Procedure
E
OP
Packing List
1. Stand ................................. 1 pc. Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives
2. Guide pin ........................... 2 pcs. is allowed to install this unit.
Guide pin
UR Stand
1. Insert the guide pins into the holes in the front
side dents of the Stand top board.
2. Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet

in the dents on the Stand top board.
OE
RIS
024-36002-001
[1-13]
4) Document Storage Card DM-128CF:Z
Document Storage Card DM-128CF;Z

E
OP
units for installation. 1. Document Storage Card DM-128CF;Z .... 1 pc.
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 2. Installation guide (This manual) ............... 1 copy
RISO MZ Series Nobody but Riso-authorized service
Important !
Unplug the power cord of the printer before
installation.
UR 1. Remove the cover plate on the Interface port

terminal, which is located on the paper feed side.
OE
Cover plate
2. Insert the Document storage card into the slot until

it stops.
Document
storage card
RIS
3. Replace the cover plate.
[1-14]
024-36301-106 この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
参考：プラテンカバーは再使用しません。
ンカバーを取り外す。 5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N

プラテ
プラテンカバー背面のアース線を取り外し、 4.
E
Auto Document Feeder AF-VI : N
（２ケ所）
図のように取り付ける。
左
プラテンカバーのヒンジ部にあるネジを取り外し、 3.
OP
電源を切り、電源コードを印刷機から抜き取る。 2.
けて実行する。
プラテンカバー
「154」および「155」を続
テストモードで起動し、 1.
RP215/250/255, RX215/250/255への設置手順
units for installing the Auto Document Feeder AF-VI:N.
1. ADF unit .................................................... 1 unit
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 2. ADF control wire harness .......................... 1 pc.
UR
× × 開閉パッド ○ ×
RISO RN25 series 3. ADF connector mount ............................... 1 pc.
○ × AF 本体側束線 × ×
RISO RP series 4. ADF original stopper ................................. 1 pc.
○ × AF I/F ASSY × ×
RISO MZ7 series 5. Stage pad .................................................... 1 pc.
▼サービスパーツ（設置対象機種に応じて、別途用意してください）
RISO S37 series 6. Wire clamper .............................................. 2 pcs.
○ ○ 取付ネジ ○ ○
RISO V8000 series 7. Screws ........................................................ 1 set
○ ○ 束線バンド ○ ○
RISO S8000 8. Instruction labels ........................................ 1 set
○ ○ OAパット ○ ○
Nobody but Riso-authorized service 9. Installation guide (This manual) ................ 1 copy
○ ○ 原稿突当板（AF） ○ ○
representatives is allowed to install this unit. 10. Declaration of Conformity (for EU only) ..... 1 copy
○ ○ コネクタ取付板金 ○ ○
○ ○ AF 内部束線 ○ ○
Required parts
OE
○ ○ AFユニット ○ ○
同梱部品 SPEDIO RX215/250/255 RX3 Check the parts required to install in the corresponding printer.
リソグラフ RP215/250/255 RP3
Printer model
V8000 MZ7 機種名 RISO RP3 RN25 RP/ S37 MZ7 V8000/ S8000
Required parts
V8000PS RISOMEISTER
ADF unit ○ ○ ○ ○
（○：必要 ×：不要）
必要な部品が揃っていることを確認してください。
設置対象機種に応じて、 ADF control wire harness ○ ○ ○ ○
設置に必要な部品 ADF connector mount ○ ○ ○ ○
ADF original stopper ○ ○ ○ ○
（CE 宣言書；EU 向け）........................ 1 枚ください。 Stage pad ○ ○ ○ ○
Declaration of Conformity 10. Wire clamper ○ ○ ○ ○
RIS
本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って
設置手順書（本書）............................. 1冊 9. Control panel key label ○ ○ ○ ○
シール ................................................... 1式 8. RX3シリーズ Wire clamper ○ ○ ○ ○
取付ネジ ............................................... 1 式 7. SPEDIO RX215/250/255 Screws ○ ○ ○ ○
束線バンド ............................................ 2本 6. RP3シリーズ Following parts are additionally required.
OAパット............................................... 1枚 5. リソグラフ RP215/250/255 ADF control wire harness;V8 N/A N/A N/A ○
原稿突当板（AF）................................ 1枚 4. RISOMEISTER V8000PS ADF scanner control wire harness N/A N/A N/A ○
コネクタ取付板金 .................................. 1個 3. V8000 Scanner table base cushion ○ N/A N/A N/A
AF 内部束線 ........................................ 1 本 2. MZ7シリーズ
AFユニット............................................ 1個 1. RISO RP3シリーズ
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。
内容物リスト適合機種
AF-VI : N 設置手順書 1
[1-15] 024-36301-106
8
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
良の原因になることがあります。）
（ゴミやほこりがついていると、画像不
ださい。
Installation Procedure = For RISO MZ7 series models シェーディングシート（白い部分）を清掃してく
E
重要：取り付ける前に、原稿突当板（AF）裏面の
Stage cover
1. Plug the power cord of the printer, start up the test 取り付ける。
mode on the printer and activate the test mode
原稿突当板（AF）を、手順8で取り外したネジで 9.
No.289.
OP
2. Turn off the main power switch of the printer and 参考：原稿突当板（標準）は再使用しません。
原稿突当板
unplug the power cord.
Reuse 原稿突当板（標準）を取り外す。 8.
at 19 3. Open the Stage cover and remove the securing
screws on the hinges.
Important: Retain the removed screws as they will
be reused at procedure 19.
4. Dismount the Stage cover.
Gauge cover
UR 5.
NOTE: The Stage cover is not reused.
Remove the Gauge cover after putting a marking

at the right-hand position adjusting point, when
the Gauge cover is attached to the printer.
上左カバーを取り外す（ネジ5本）。
上後カバーを取り外す（ネジ4本）。
7.
6.
上左カバー
上後カバー
Mark here
OE
マーカーで目印を付ける
6. Remove the Scanner rear cover.(four screws)

Scanner rear cover
Scanner left
cover
7. Remove the Scanner left cover.(five screws)
シートを取り外す。
ゲージ
などで右側の調整部に目印を付けてから、
ゲージシートが装着されている場合は、マーカー 5. ゲージシート
参考：プラテンカバーは再使用しません。
RIS
プラテンカバーを取り外す。 4.
重要：取り外したネジは手順19で再利用します。
8. Remove the securing screws on the Original （２ケ所）

stopper. プラテンカバーのヒンジ部にあるネジを取り外す。 3.
NOTE: The Original stopper is not reused.
Original stopper 9. Secure the ADF original stopper with the screws 電源を切り、電源コードを印刷機から抜き取る。 2.
which were removed in the step 8.
テストモードで起動し、を入力して実行する。
「289」 1.
Important: Before securing the ADF original
stopper, be sure to clean the shading MZ7シリーズへの設置手順
sheet (a white sheet) on the back side. If
it is stained or dusty, unwanted images
may appear on prints.
2
[1-16]
9

上後カバー
E
10. Lead the ADF control wire harness through the
ADF connector mount opening of the ADF connector mount and secure
the ADF connector at the end of the wire harness
OP
（再利用）
to the ADF connector mount with screws (Binding
ください。取付穴カバー
screw M3x8, 2pcs).
重要：取付穴カバーは再利用するので破棄しないで
破棄
に元通りに取り付ける。
印刷機
15. 上後カバーから左図の部分を切り取り後、 ADF control wire harness
Hinge housing 11. Insert the tab of the ADF connector mount into
the slit in the rear corner of the Scanner table and
UR
ワイヤーサドル
secure the ADF connector mount to the Scanner
table with screws (Double-washered screw M4x8,
2pcs).
12. Secure the terminal of the Ground wire coming

る。 Ground wire out of the wire harness as illustrated. (Collar screw
M3x6, 1pce)
で固定す
14. AF中継束線をワイヤーサドル（4ケ所） AF 内部束線 Wire saddle ADF connector mount
AF 中継束線
13. AF内部束線を、AF 中継束線に接続する。
OE
ADF Conversion wire harness 13. Connect the ADF Conversion wire harness with
ADF Control wire harness the ADF Control wire harness.
コネクタ取付板ワイヤーサドル
アース線 14. Secure the ADF Control wire harnesses with the
existing four wire saddles.
で固定する。
（ITネジM3×6）
12. アース線をヒンジ取付板に取付ネジ
M4×8）2 本で固定する。
取付板金の凸部を差し込み、取付ネジ（Wセムス
RIS
11. 印刷機リア側にあるスリットに左図のようにコネクタヒンジ取付板
15. Cut off the illustrated parts from the Scanner rear
cover and replace it on the printer.
Un necessary
Important: Retain the Blind plate as it will be
Blind plate reused.
AF 内部束線 (necessary)
（バインドM3×8）２本で固定する。コネクタ取付板金
取付ネジ
10. AF内部束線をコネクタ取付板金に通し、
Scanner rear cover
3
[1-17]
10
E
16. Cut off the illustrated part from the Scanner left
cover and replace the cover on the printer. 本書 14ページ「AFユニットの位置調整」に進む。
Scanner left cover
OP
20. AFユニットのコネクタを印刷機本体に接続する。
Cut off
取付穴カバー
取り付けてください。
17. Secure the stepped screws (provided in the 重要：取付穴カバーをAF-VI:Nのヒンジに突き当てて
package) on the Hinge housings.
Stepped screw
UR Hinge housing
ADF unit
18. Mount the ADF unit on the printer while sliding
the stepped screws (added in the previous step)
into the slits of the ADF hinge bases, and secure it
で取り付ける。
順 3で取り外した取付ネジ（バインドM4×8）2 本
19. 手順 15で切り取った取付穴カバー（２個）を、手
た目印に、調整ネジの位置をあわせます。）
（外す前につけておい
の位置に取り付けます。
HJ ベース
with two additional screws (Binding screw M4x10, 元

取り外したゲージシートの専用ピンとネジで、
OE
2pcs). 始めに
参考：ゲージシートが装着されていた場合は、
NOTE: When working on the printer with Gauge cover （バインドM４×１０）２本で取り付ける。 AF ユニット
models, replace the Gauge cover with the 取付ネジ
ジと本体のすき間に入るようにセットして、
dedicated pins and screws previously removed
18. AFユニットを、HJベースのスリットが専用段付きネ
ADF hinge base instead of Binding screws. Be sure to align the
Gauge cover with the marking put when
removing it.
専用段付きネジ
19. Secure two Blind plates(these were cut off at ヒンジ取付板
（２ケ所）
ける。
procedure 15) with the screws(Binding screws
RIS
17. ヒンジ取付板に、同梱の専用段付きネジを取り付
M4x10, 2pcs which were removed at procedure
3).
Blind plate Important: The Blind plates are pushed and
切り取る
attached to the Hinge housings.
20. Connect the ADF unit cable to the ADF connector

on the printer. 上左カバー
Proceed to the section "ADF Unit Balance Adjustment" に元通りに取り付ける。

on page 5. 印刷機
16. 上左カバーから左図の部分を切り取り後、
4
[1-18]
消灯する。
5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N ランプを
テストモードを終了して、
上記調整完了後、 6.
フロント側
ADF Unit Balance Adjustment
E
リア側
Important: Be sure to carry out the following adjustment steps to avoid causing original feed troubles
and undesirable print results.
1. Start up the test mode of the printer and input the
test code "151" ("281" for MZ7 series ) using print
OP
quantity keys to return the scanner carriage to the
ADF guide plate original position. 高さ調整ネジを反時計回りに回す。
2. Input the test code "130" ("260" for MZ7 series ● リア側が上がっている場合は、
)using print quantity keys to turn on the CCD light フロント側
of the Scanner Unit.
ADF original stopper リア側
3. Check if the ADF original stopper and the ADF guide
plate do not touch each other by looking into the
opening between the ADF unit and the Scanner table
from the front side. If they touch each other, adjust
Bosses
UR Bosses
4.
the position of the ADF unit by following the
procedures described in the section "Compensation
for slanted printed images" on page 15.
Close the ADF unit and check if all its feet and
bosses evenly touch the Scanner table by looking
into the opening between the ADF unit and the
Scanner table.
高さ調整ネジを時計回りに回す。
● フロント側が上がっている場合は、
高さ調整ネジを以下のように調整する。
AFユニットが水平になっていない場合は、左右の
ンスよく当っているか。
・左側面のツメ2点（左図参照）が原稿台にバラ
5.
高さ調整ネジ
5. When the ADF unit is unevenly seated on the ンスよく当っているか。

printer, make the level even as follows.
OE
・右側面のボス2点（左図参照）が原稿台にバラボスツメ
Adjusting screws 平になっているかを確認する。

on the ADF hinges If the ADF unit is raised on the front side, rotate と原稿台のすき間をのぞき込み、AFユニットが水
the adjusting screws clockwise. AFユニットを閉じた状態で、側面からAFユニット 4.
する。
歪み補正（次ページ）と同じ手順で位置を調整
ないことを確認する。干渉している場合は、画像
き込んで、原稿突当板とAFガイド板が干渉してい
Rear side AFユニットと原稿台のすき間をフロント側からのぞ 3.
トキーを押して実行する。
RIS
Front side
スター
と入力し、
（MZ7シリーズは「260」）
「130」原稿突当板
If the ADF unit is raised on the rear side, rotate ・印刷機をテストモードで起動して、テンキーで
the adjusting screws counterclockwise. CCDランプを点灯させる。
確認作業をしやすくするため、スキャナー部の 2.
AF ガイド板
トキーを押して実行する。
（MZ7シリーズは「281」）
「151」スター
と入力し、
・印刷機をテストモードで起動して、テンキーで
Rear side キャリッジをホームポジションに戻す。 1.
Front side 業を必ず行ってください。

6. After the above adjustment, quit the test mode to 原稿づまりや画像の不具合を防ぐため、下記の調整作
AFユニットの位置調整（共通手順）
turn off the CCD light. 重要：
7. Check that the ADF unit appropriately works and

adjust it with the Riso test chart, following the
procedures on the following page.
[1-19] 5
する。
適切な値になるまで調整
上記手順1) ∼5) を繰り返し、 5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N
5) プリントをして、画像の位置を確認する。
E
を１秒以上押してテストモードを終了する。
リセットキー
4) スタートキーを押して設定値を確定し、 Adjustment of Scanning Parameters
て−（マイナス）に切り替える。 If printed images are of a different size and/or by far offset when originals are scanned in the ADF unit, compared
＊キーを押し
画像を右方向に移動したい場合は、 with when scanned on the Stage glass, adjust the scanning parameters as follows.
OP
入力する。）
と
画像を左方向に＋１mm移動したい場合は「１０」
（例えば、
ること。1ステップが0.1mmを表している。
右 1. Compensation for slanted printed images
1) Loosen the binding screws (M4x10) on the ADF
5ステップごとに調整する。必ず5の倍数を入力す
左した印刷画像 hinge bases.
調整したい値をテンキーで入力する。 3) ● AF ユニットを使用
替わる。
「実行中」画面に切り
再度スタートキーを押すと、 2)
を押す。
天地 2) Loosen the nut on the Hinge base sliding screw
which is located on the rear side of the hinge on
UR
（MZ7シリーズは「3072」）と入力してスタートキーしない印刷画像
印刷機をテストモードで起動し、テンキーで「782」 1) ● AF ユニットを使用 the paper receiving side.
2. 主走査（左右）方向の画像位置調整（AF主走査読み込み左右位置調整） 3) Turn the Hinge base sliding screw and adjust the
position of the ADF Hinge base, referring to the
Nut
整する。 guidelines on it.
上記手順 1) ∼5) を繰り返し、適切な値になるまで調 HJ スライド BKT HJ ベース調整目盛 Turn the screw clockwise ( A ) when
printed images are slanted as illustrated
5) プリントして、画像の状態を確認する。 in the left-hand figure.
も締める。 Bottom Top
Hinge base Turn the screw counterclockwise ( B )
OE
手順2）のナットを締め、手順1）の固定ネジ2ケ所 4)
sliding screw when printed images are slanted as
天地
illustrated in the left-hand figure.
HJスライドネジを B 方向に回す。 Bottom Top
左図のように画像が歪んでいる場合は、 HJ スライドネジ 4) Secure the nut on the Hinge base sliding screw and
then the binding screws on the ADF hinge bases.
天地
5) Check if printed images are squared in the same way
HJスライドネジを A 方向に回す。
as when the original is scanned on the Stage glass.
左図のように画像が歪んでいる場合は、 Guidelines
Hinge base Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until
ナット
を目安にする。） obtaining squared printed images.
RIS
（HJベース調整目盛
BKTの位置を微調整する。
下記のようにHJスライドネジを回して、HJスライド 3)
しているナットをゆるめる。 2. Adjustment of scanning start position (Compensation for printing position in vertical direction)
のHJスライドネジを固定
2) ヒンジ部分背面（排紙側）
The printed image 1) Start up the test mode of the printer and input the
scanned on the test code "783" ("3073" for MZ7 series) using print
４×10）２本をゆるめる。 Stage glass quantity keys.
AFユニットを固定している左図のネジ（バインドM 1)
Bottom Top 2) Press the Start key twice to make the message "In
1. 画像歪み補正
Print position difference Action" appear on the display.
れる場合は、以下の手順で調整します。 The printed image 3) Input a required value with print quantity keys to
AF を使用して印刷した画像と、使用しないで印刷した画像を比べて、画像の歪み、位置ズレ、伸縮が見ら scanned on the compensate the vertical scanning start position. The
ADF unit
position is shifted 0.1mm per one step.
AFユニットの画像調整（共通手順） (ex. To shift the scanning start position by 1mm
Bottom Top
upward, input "10". To shift the position by 1mm
downward, on the other hand, input * before
inputting "10".)
6 [1-20]
E
4) Press the Start key to confirm the input value, and する。
press the Reset key more than one second to quit 適切な値になるまで調整
上記手順1) ∼5) を繰り返し、
the test mode.
OP
5) Check if the vertical print position is the same as 5) プリントをして、画像の伸縮量を確認する。
when the original is scanned on the Stage glass. を１秒以上押してテストモードを終了する。
リセットキー
4) スタートキーを押して設定値を確定し、
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until
obtaining an identical vertical print position. ス）に切り替える。
（マイナ
＊キーを押して−
画像を縮めたい場合は、
る。）
3. Adjustment of scanning position (Compensation for printing position in horizontal direction) 像を3mm（１％）伸ばしたい場合は「10」と入力す
The printed image 1) Start up the test mode of the printer and input the （例えば、300mmの長さで印刷された画
を表す。
scanned on the
Stage glass
Bottom
The printed image

scanned on the
ADF unit
UR Top
Left 3)
Right
2)
test code "782"("3072" for MZ7 series) using print
quantity keys.
Press the Start key twice to make the message "In
Action" appear on the display.
Input a required value with print quantity keys to
compensate the horizontal scanning position.
The horizontal scanning position can be changed by
0.5 mm.
（印刷画像の長さを100％とする）
１ステップが0.1％
調整したい値をテンキーで入力する。
「実行中」画面にな
再度スタートキーを押すと、
る。
を押す。
（MZ7シリーズは「3074」）と入力してスタートキー
印刷機をテストモードで起動し、テンキーで「784」
3)
2)
1)
天
画像伸縮量
しない印刷画像
地
● AF ユニットを使用
(ex. To shift the scanning position to the left by 1mm, 4. 副走査（天地）方向の画像長さ調整（AF 読み込み画像伸縮補正）
OE
input "10". To shift the position to the right by 1mm,
on the other hand, input * before inputting "10".) する。
NOTE: Be sure to input a multiple of "5 (five)". 適切な値になるまで調整
上記手順1) ∼5) を繰り返し、
4) Press the Start key to confirm the input value, and 5) プリントをして、画像の位置を確認する。
press the Reset key more than one second to quit を１秒以上押してテストモードを終了する。
the test mode. リセットキー
4) スタートキーを押して設定値を確定し、
5) Check if the horizontal printing position is the same て−（マイナス）に切り替える。
as when the original is scanned on the Stage glass. ＊キーを押し
画像を地方向に移動したい場合は、
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until る。）
RIS
obtaining an identical horizontal print position. 向に＋１mm 移動したい場合は「10」と入力す

（例えば、画像を天方
１ステップが0.1mmを表す。
4. Adjustment of scanning speed (Compensation for printed image size in vertical direction) 調整したい値をテンキーで入力する。 3)
した印刷画像
● AF ユニットを使用
The printed image 1) Start up the test mode of the printer and input the 替わる。画像位置ズレ
scanned on the test code "784" ("3074" for MZ7 series) using print 「実行中」画面に切り
再度スタートキーを押すと、 2)
Stage glass quantity keys. を押す。
天地
Bottom Top 2) Press the Start key twice to make the message "In （MZ7シリーズは「3073」）と入力してスタートキーしない印刷画像
Image size difference Action" appear on the display. 印刷機をテストモードで起動し、テンキーで「783」 1) ● AF ユニットを使用
The printed image 3) Input a required value with print quantity keys to
scanned on the 3. 副走査（天地）方向の画像位置調整（AF 読み込み開始位置調整）
compensate the scanning speed for vertical image
ADF unit
size. The vertical image size is changed 0.1% per
Bottom Top one step.
(ex. To extend 300mm-long images by 3mm (1%),
input "10". To shorten them by 3mm, on the other
hand, input * before inputting "10".)
[1-21] 7
E
4) Press the Start key to confirm the input value, and
OP
press the Reset key more than one second to quit
the test mode.
5) Check if the vertical image size is the same as when
the original is scanned on the Stage glass.
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 5) until
obtaining an identical vertical image size.
Installation procedures after adjustment
UR
After adjusting scanning parameters, proceed to the
ADF hinges
ADF hinge stopper following steps.
原稿解除レバー
シール 1. Remove the screws which secure the ADF hinge
stopper on the rear side of the ADF hinges.
2. Rotate the ADF hinge stoppers by 180 degrees and
スキャナーガラス
secure them with the screws again.
3. Stick the instruction labels to the places indicated
Original release dial in the figure.
OE
シール
・原稿解除レバーの右側 Instruction label

・スキャナーガラスの上側
・原稿解除ダイヤルの下側原稿解除ダイヤル
左図のように3ケ所にシールを貼る。 3.
ADF scanner glass

HJ ストッパー
RIS
Instruction label
Original release lever
（２ケ所）
ジで固定し直す。
ネ
HJストッパーを左図のように１８０度回転させて、 2. ヒンジ部分
（２ケ所）
固定しているネジを取り外す。
AFユニットのヒンジ部分背面にあるHJストッパーを 1.
後、以下の手順を行います。
本書 14 ∼ 16 ページに記載されている調整を行った
調整後に行う作業（共通手順）
[1-22]
E
OP
Gauge cover 4. Place the Stage pad on the Gauge cover, facing
the sponge side upwards.
5. Align the longer edge of the Stage pad to the
subsiding line of the Gauge cover shifting toward
1mm you by 1mm. Then remove all adhesive cover
sheets from the Stage pad.
Stage pad (sponge side)
Align the left edge to

the Original stopper.
UR
Stage pad
Gauge cover
6.
7.
Close the ADF unit gently and press it down on
the Stage pad.
Open the ADF unit gently and affix the Stage pad
to it firmly by pressing the adhesive parts.
OE
RIS
[1-23]
1 113-36004-200 この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
6) Job Separator IV: N
Job Separator IV : N Installation Procedure
E
はめ込んでからネジを締めなおす
印刷機の電源を切り、電源コードを抜き取る。 4. Types of Applicable Printers Packing List

The following printer model is the intended basic This package contains the following items.
OP
でしっかりとはめ込んで、ネジを締めなおす。
STソーターを取付スライド板；RZのスリットの奥ま 3. unit for installing the Job Separator IV:N. 1. Job separator IV:N unit ............................. 1 unit
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Model 2. JS positioning bracket ; RZ ....................... 1 pc.
絶対にゆるめないでください。
RISO RZ series 3. JS base bracket : RZ .................................. 1 pc.
3ヵ所のネジの内、中央の六角穴付きボルトは重要: 4. JS IV wire harness .................................... 1 pc.
MZ series
STソーター底面のネジ2ケ所をゆるめる。 2. 5. DKN-10 NK clamper (for MZ series only) .... 1 pc.
6. Screws ....................................................... 1 set
7. JS paper size indication label .................... 1 pc.
8. Instruction label(J/E/PICT) ....................... 1 pc.each
UR
取付支持板；RZ 9. Paper tape roll ........................................... 1 roll
10. Installation guide(This Manual) ................ 1 copy
11. User’s guide .............................................. 1 copy
12. Declaration of Conformity(for EU only) .. 1 copy
付きネジ2 個で固定する。
取付スライド板；RZ 1. Place the JS positioning bracket;RZ on the JS base
OE
取付スライド板；RZと取付支持板；RZを重ね、段 1.
JS base bracket;RZ bracket;RZ and secure them with the stepped
screws.
（CE宣言書；EU 向け）........................ 1枚共通手順

12. Declaration of Conformity
11. 取扱説明書 ......................................... 1 部
行ってください。
10. 設置手順書（本書）............................ 1部
本ユニットの設置は、必ず専門の技術者が
9. 紙テープ .............................................. 1 本
JS positioning bracket;RZ
8. 注意シール（日／英／絵文字）......... 各 1枚
RIS
7. 用紙サイズシール ................................ 1 枚
6. 取付ネジ .............................................. 1 式
（MZシリーズのみ使用します）............ 1個 2. Loosen two mounting screws on the bottom of the
5. DKN-10 日幸NKクランプ Job separator IV:N.

4. STソーター束線 .................................. 1 個 Important: Do not loosen the center screw on the
SPEDIO RXシリーズ
3. 取付支持板 ; RZ ................................. 1 個 bottom of the Job separator IV:N.
MZシリーズ
2. 取付スライド板 ; RZ ............................. 1個
RISO RZシリーズ 3. Slide the mounting screws on the bottom of the
1. STソーターIV :N 本体 ........................ 1 個 Job separator IV:N into the slits of the JS
positioning bracket;V8 as far as they will go. Then
tighten the mounting screws.
Slide the mounting screws into the

4. Turn off the main power and unplug the power
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。 slits and tighten them. cord from the printer.
STソーターIV:N設置手順書
1
[1-24]
= RISO MZ series models =
E
5. Remove the Rear cover R from the printer.
6. Cut off the illustrated part from the Rear cover R.
NK クランプ
OP
Cutting
合わせて貼り付けてください。
重要：基板取付カバーの端面とNKクランプの端面を
プを貼り付ける。
貼り付け位置 Rear cover R
基板取付カバーを開き、左図の位置にNKクラン 8.
UR
基板取付カバー
7. Remove the screws of PCB mount plate.
OE
基板取付カバーのネジを取り外す。 7.
PCB mount plate
カバー;後右 8. Open the PCB mount plate and attach a NK

Attachment position
RIS
clamper onto the back side of PCB mount plate.
Important: The right side of a NK clamper is

切り取る attached according to the end on the right
side of PCB mount plate.
左図の部分を切り取る。 6. NK clamper
カバー；後右を取り外す。 5.
MZシリーズへの設置手順
2 [1-25]
束線クランプ
E
18. カバー；後右を元通りに取り付ける。
9. Lead the JS IV wire harness through the square 17. 基板取付カバーを元通りネジ止めする。

hole at the rear side frame to the Mechanical control
16. ワイヤーサドル2ヶ所で固定する。
PCB as instructed in the illustration.
OP
アース線
10. Insert the two tabs of the metal busing on the wire 外し、STソーター束線のアース線を共締めする。 CN17
harness into the square hole and secure the metal 15. MECHA-CONTOROL-PCBのネジをいったん取り
busing there with a screw. (Binding screw, M3×
PCBのCN17に接続する。
6)
14. STソーター束線のコネクタをMECHA-CONTOROL-
重要：たるみが無いように引き回してください。
13. STソータ−束線を左図のように引き回す。
UR
JS IV wire harness
11. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a NK clamper.
Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness is

secured with a NK clamper, avoiding
contact with the parts in action. 束線クランプ
NK clamper
OE
12. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a wire NK クランプ
Wire clamper clamper.
12. STソータ−束線を、束線クランプで固定する。
JS IV wire harness
いように固定してください。
重要：可動部への接触をふせぐため、束線がたるまな
11. STソーター束線をNKクランプで固定する。
13. Lead the JS IV wire harness onto PCB mount plate

as illustrated.
Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness should ST ソータ−束線

RIS
Mechanical control PCB not slacken.
14. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness to

CN17 on the Mechanical control PCB.
15. Remove one of the mounting screws of the
Wire saddle Mechanical control PCB near the CN17 and secure
the ground wire coming from the JS IV wire
CN17 M3×6）
harness to the Mechanical control PCB with
Ground wire removed screw.
（バインド
10. 角穴部に板金をはめ込みネジ止めする。
16. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a wire clamper のように引き回す。

and existing wire saddles at 2 points. 側板フレームの角穴からSTソーター束線を左図 9.
17. Replace the PCB mount plate and secure with the
screws.
Wire clamper
18. Replace the rear cover R.
3
[1-26]
E
19. Secure the JS unit to the side plate of the printer
with two screws. (Binding screw, M4×8)
20. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness to
OP
JS paper size indication label the bottom of the JS unit.
21. Stick a Paper size label and a Caution label on the
Job Separator as illustrated.
22. Plug the power cord to the printer and turn on the
main power.
23. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator IV:N
Instruction label and check the Job separator IV:N functions
correctly.
UR
JS IV wire harness
OE
ST ソーター束線
ことを確認する。
RIS
正常に動作する
23. STソーターに紙テープをセットし、
注意シール
22. 電源コードを印刷機に差し込み、電源を入れる。
り付ける。
21. 用紙サイズシールと注意シールを左図の位置に貼
続する。
20. STソーター束線のコネクタをSTソーター底面に接用紙サイズシール
ンドネジ M4×8 ２本）
（バイ
19. STソーターを印刷機の側板に取り付ける。
[1-27]
この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
架台モール 7) Key/Card Counter IV
E
排紙カバー Key/Card Counter IV Installation Procedure
Type of Connectable Printer Packing List
OP
後カバー units for connection to the Key/card counter IV.
前カバー 1. Key/card counter unit ............................... 1 unit
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models
2. Counter main wire harness III .................. 1 pc.
RISOGRAPH GR3770
3. Counter extension wire harness A (long) .. 1 pc.
RISOGRAPH FR series
4. Counter extension wire harness B (short) . 1 pc.
です。 RISOGRAPH CR 1630-AN/C/EN/UP/AW
CR 1620-C 5. Counter extension ground wire ................. 1 pc.
るには、インターフェイスボード III(S)が必要
CR 1610-AS/UI/AW 6. Counter bracket A ..................................... 1 pc.
・GR および FR シリーズ（N なし機）に設置す
CR 1600-C 7. Counter bracket RZ ................................... 1 pc.
UR
手順書をご覧ください。・リア右カバー追加工
RISOGRAPH RN series 8. Lithium battery (CR-2032) ....................... 1 pc.
手順については、取付キット;2C 付属の設置・製版カバー追加工 RISO RP series 9. Battery expiration date label ..................... 1 pc.
ウンター IV 取付キット;2C が必要です。設置・CC 中継束線；V8000 用 RISO S37 series
1 pc.
10. Ferrite core ................................................
・MZ / MX シリーズに設置するには、カードカ・カードカウンター IV 取付板 RISO RN25 series
RISO RZ/RV series 11. NK clamper ...............................................2 pcs.
ださい。下のサービスパーツが必要です。
RISO MZ/MV series 12. Wire clamper .............................................5 pcs.
本書 P.3 の手順 16 ∼ 22 および P.11 をご覧く・V8000 / V8000PS / S8000に設置するには、以
RISO V8000 series 13. Screwed clamper ....................................... 2 pcs.
書をご覧ください。その後の手順については、付属の設置手順書をご覧ください。
NOTE : 14. Wire harness protection tape ..................... 1 pc.
いては、インターフェイスボード IV 設置手順必要です。設置手順については、取付Aキット
- When installing on GR3770 or FR series models 15. Screws ....................................................... 1 set
スボード IV が必要です。束線の接続手順につるには、カードカウンター IV 取付 A キットが (except for FR-α models), the Interface board III(S)
is required. 16. Installation guide (This manual) ............... 1 copy
OE
・CRシリーズに設置するには、インターフェイ・RP3 / RX3 シリーズおよび RE33P に設置す
- When installing on CR series models, the Interface
17. User's guide ............................................... 1 copy
重要
（CE 宣言書；EU向け）.................................... 1 枚 board IV is required. As for the procedures of leading 18. Control card .............................................. 1 pc.
21. Declaration of Conformity the Key/card counter wire harnesses inside CR series 19. Operator card ............................................ 30 pcs.
ください。
20. CLEANING CARD（クリーニングカード）....... 1 枚 models, refer to the Interface Board IV Installation
本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って Procedure Guide. After that, install the Key/card 20. Cleaning card ............................................ 1 pc.
19. OPERATOR CARD（オペレーターカード）..... 30 枚 counter IV referring to steps 16-21 in the page 3 and 21. Declaration of Conformity
18. CONTROL CARD（コントロールカード）......... 1 枚 page 13 in this guide.
(for EU only) ............................................. 1 copy
17. 取扱説明書 ...................................................... 1 冊 - When installing on RP or S37 series models, the Key/
16. 設置手順書（本書）......................................... 1 冊 card counter IV Attachment Kit A is required. For the
15. 取付ネジ ........................................................... 1 式 installation procedure for these models, refer to the Nobody but Riso-authorized service
guide included in the kit. representatives is allowed to install this unit.
14. 保護テープ ....................................................... 1 枚
- When installing on V8000 series or S8000 models,
13. ナイロンクリップ.................................................. 2 個
following items are additionally required ;
RIS
12. 束線バンド ........................................................ 5 本 • Counter bracket
11. NKクランプ ....................................................... 2 個 • Counter extention wire harness;V8
10. フェライトクランプ ............................................... 1 個 • Master making unit cover;modified
9. 電池交換シール ............................................... 1枚 • Rear cover (right);modified
8. リチウム電池（CR-2032）................................. 1個
- When installing on MZ/MV series models, Key/Card
7. 取付板金（RZ用）........................................... 1個 Counter IV Attachment Kit :2C is required. For the
6. 取付板金 A ....................................................... 1 個 installation procedure for these models, refer to the
guide included in the kit.
5. CCアース中継線 50 ......................................... 1本
4. CC中継束線B（短い束線）............................ 1本
3. CC中継束線A（長い束線）............................ 1本
2. カードカウンター束線III .................................... 1 本
1. カードカウンター ................................................ 1 個
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。 Instructions continue from next page. 1
112-36002-308
[1-28]
7) Key/Card Counter IV
この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
Key/Card Counter IV Attachment Kit:2C

E
units for installing the Key/Card Counter IV:N
OP
1. Counter bracket;S ..................................... 1 unit
Attachment Kit:2C.
SHノイズ遮蔽板 2. Counter socket adapter ............................. 1 pc.
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 3. Screws ....................................................... 1 set
RISO MZ Series 4. Installation guide (This manual) ............... 1 copy
RISO MV Series In addition to the above items, the contents in the

Key/Card Counter IV:N package are to be used.
SHノイズ遮蔽板を取り外す。 5.
UR
カバー；後左 representatives is allowed to install this unit.
1. Turn off the main power switch of the printer and

Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1 Cut off
左図の部分を切り取る。 4. unplug the power cord.
2. Dismount the Stage cover (or the optional ADF
unit). If the Digitizer is installed, dismount it as
排版カバー;1とカバー;後左を取り外す。 3.
well.
OE
が装備されている場合は、取り外す。 3. Remove the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1
and the Rear cover L from the printer.
プラテンカバーまたはAF ユニット、デジタイザなど 2.
4. Cut off the illustrated part from the Master Disposal
ら抜く。排版カバー；1 Box Unit cover; 1.
切り取る
電源コードを印刷機本体か
印刷機の電源を切り、 1.
Rear cover L
ください。
5. Remove the Cover plate; SH.
RIS
梱包されている部品を使用します。
「カードカウンター IV:N」本体に
上記の他に、
設置手順書（本書）............................ 1 冊 4.
取付ネジ............................................... 1 式 3. SPEDIO MXシリーズ
Cover plate; SH
L型アダプタ.......................................... 1個 2. RISOGRAPH MZシリーズ
カードカウンターIV取付板；S .............. 1個 1. 以下の機種に接続できます。
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。本キットを使用すると、カードカウンター IV:Nを
カードカウンター IV 取付キット：2C 設置手順書

2 [1-39]
E
6. Remove the Relay connector from the Counter
main wire harness III. リチウム電池
OP
7. Lead the Counter main wire harness III and connect を取り付ける。（＋極を表にしてください。）
it to CN6 of the SH4F-PCB.
リチウム電池
14. カードカウンターのカバーを取り外し、
Counter main wire harness III Relay connector 8. Connect the Counter extension ground wire and
Counter main wire harness III the Ground wire of the connector. SHノイズ遮蔽板
Wire saddle
9. Remove a screw of the upper left corner of the
SH4F-PCB and secure the ground wire to the
SH4F-PCB with the screw.
CN6 10. Put the Ferrite core on the Counter main wire
harness III.
SH4F-PCB
UR
Ferrite core
Counter extension
ground wire
11. Hold the Counter main wire harness III with an
existing Wire saddle.
固定する。
13. カードカウンター束線IIIをワイヤーサドル3ケ所で
12. SHノイズ遮蔽板を取り付ける。
12. Replace the Cover plate; SH and secure it with the
OE
Wire saddle
screws removed in Step 5.
CC アース中継束線 50
13. Hold the Counter main wire harness III with the SH4F-PCB
existing Wire saddles at three points.

る。
11. カードカウンター束線IIIをワイヤーサドルで固定す
フェライトクランプ
10. フェライトクランプを取り付ける。
ター束線IIIのアース線を共締めする。
CN6
RIS
SH4F-PCB のネジをいったん外し、カードカウン 9.
続する。
CCアース中継束線 50をコネクタのアース線と接 8.
カードカウンター束線 III ワイヤーサドル
Cover plate; SH
SH4F-PCBのCN6に接続する。中継コネクタカードカウンター束線 III
14. Remove the case cover from the Key/Card counter
カードカウンター束線 IIIを左図のように引き回し、 7.
unit and put a Lithium battery into the battery
holder with the + side facing upward.
Lithium battery 外す。
カードカウンター束線 III の中継コネクタを取り 6.
3
[1-30]
ト、デジタイザを元通りに取り付ける。
24. 手順2で取り外したプラテンカバーまたはAFユニッ
E
23. 印刷機のカバー；後左を元通りの取り付ける。
15. Replace the case cover on the Key/card counter
unit and secure it on the front side only with the
示言語の切り替え」を行う。
OP
「パネル表
「動作確認」、
設置手順書を参照して、
16. Secure the Counter socket adapter to the Counter
22. カードカウンターIVの本体梱包に同梱されている
connector with P-tight screws (M3x14, 2pcs) and
排版カバー；1 tighten the screws located on the adapter.
カードカウンターに貼る。
Front side 17. Secure the Key/card counter unit to the Counter
21. 電池交換シールに 2 年後の年・月を記入して、
bracket;S. (Double-washered screw M3x8, 4pcs)
部分に通します。
電池交換シール
参考：カードカウンター束線IIIは手順4で切り取った
UR
20. 排版カバー；1を取り付ける。
Counter bracket;S
Counter socket adapter
18. Secure the Counter bracket;S to the left side panel

of the Scanner table with two screws. (Binding
Counter main wire harness III
screw M4x8, 2pcs)
19. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to the
Key/card counter.
OE
する。
19. カードカウンター束線IIIをカードカウンターに接続
カードカウンター束線 III
（バインドM4×8 2 本）
18. カードカウンターを印刷機本体に取り付ける。
L 型アダプタカードカウンター取付板；S
20. Replace the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1

and secure it with the screws removed in Step 3.
Battery expiration date label
RIS
NOTE: Make sure that the Counter main wire harness
（WセムスM3×8 4 本）
に取り付ける。
III is coming through the square hole that you
17. カードカウンタIV取付板；Sをカードカウンター本体 made in Step 4.
フロント側 Master Disposal Box Unit
cover; 1 21. Write the date of two years later on the Battery
ジ2ケ所を締める。
expiration date label and stick the label on the side
×14 2本で固定し、L型アダプタについているネ
of the Key/card counter unit.
16. L型アダプタをコネクタ部に取り付けて、PタイトM3
22. Referring to the Installation guide included in the
Key/card counter IV package, check the operation
手順 14で取り外したネジのうち2本で固定する。
and select the language shown on the display.
フロント側を
15. カードカウンターのカバーを取り付け、
23. Replace the Rear cover L and secure it with the
24. Mount the Stage cover (or the optional ADF unit).
If the Digitizer is dismounted, replace it as well.
4 [1-31]
Operation check
E
1. Pressing both "0" and "C" keys on the Key/ 5. Check that the following data are printed out on
card counter control panel together, turn on the copies.
main power switch on the printer. No. MSTR PRINTS
OP
2. After confirming that the indication 1 1 5
"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF" appears in the display ALL 1 5
on the Key/card counter control panel, press the
6. To clear the above data, follow the procedures
"1", "9", "5" and "3" keys orderly.
below.
NOTE : If no indication appears when the
1) Press the "1" key more than a second leaving
printer is turned on, return to the step 1.
the "CONTROL CARD" in the Key/card
3. After the display message changes to "INSERT counter.
CARD", insert the "OPERATOR CARD No. 1"
2) After the indication "TTL- 1- 5" appears on the
UR
into the Key/card counter and print 5 copies with
display, press the "C" and "SET" keys orderly.
a newly made master.
The panel indication is changed to "TTL- 0 -0"
4. Insert the "CONTROL CARD" into the Key/ and the data are all cleared.
card counter and press the "1" key more than a
second. Then press the "PRINT" and "SET"
keys orderly to print out the data of master count
and print count.
OE
Battery replacement
The used battery (normally after two years' operation)
can be replaced by the following procedures.
1. Turn on the main power of the printer and remove
the case cover of the Key/card counter unit by
removing the securing screws on the bottom of the
unit.
Important!
RIS
Always replace the used battery with the
power of the printer turned ON.
Otherwise, all memories in the Key/card
counter will be cleared out.
2. Pick off the used battery from the battery holder
Battery expiration date label and put a new one (CR-2032) there.
3. Replace the case cover on the Key/card counter
Lithium battery unit.
(CR-2032)
4. Write the date of two years later on the Battery
expiration date label on the side of the Key/card
counter unit.
5
[1-32]
8) Cover Kit; Paper Feed/ Ejection
1 024-36101-000 この書類は再生紙を使用しています。
Cover Kit;Paper Feed / Ejection
SH 取付板 Installation Procedure
E
Applying Models
カバー；後左を元通りに取り付ける。 7. This optional unit applies to the following model:
SH取付板を閉じてネジ止めする。 6. Riso MZ series
OP
吸音材が当たらない用に貼り付けてください。 10. Noise Reduction Cover; Paper Feed ....... 1pc.
The installation of this unit must be done by 11. Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Upper .......... 1pc.
バネやギア等の駆動部に
重要：取付板を閉じた時に、
a technical expert. 12. Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Lower .......... 1pc.
SH取付板に吸音材；SH 基板裏を貼り付ける。 5.
13. Magnet Catcher; Paper Feeder Cover ..... 1pc.
吸音材；SH 基板裏
Packing list: 14. Mounting Screws .................................... 1set
SH取付板の固定ネジ（4 本）を外して開く。 4. 1. Noise Absorber; SH PCB ........................ 1pc. 15. Installation Procedure Guide (This manual) .. 1copy
2. Noise Absorber; Suction Cover. ............. 1pc.
3. Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side ... 2pcs.
UR
カバー；後左
4. Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Center ... 1pc.
5. Noise Absorber; Suction ............................ 2pcs.
6. Noise Absorber; Stand Front ................... 1pc.
7. Noise Absorber; Stand R ......................... 1pc.
8. Noise Absorber; Stand L ......................... 1pc.
9. Noise Absorber; Stand Rear .................... 1pc.
排版カバー；1を取り外す。 3.
カバー；後左を取り外す。 2. Master Disposal 1. Turn off the power and plug off the code.
Box Unit cover; 1
OE
排版カバー；1
電源をオフにして電源コードを抜く。 1. 2. Detach the Rear Cover L from the printer.
3. Detach the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1.

6. 吸音材；架台 -フロント ............................ 1個
5. 吸音材；排紙口 ...................................... 2個
4. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-センター ................ 1個
3. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド.................... 2個
2. 吸音材；排紙カバー裏 ........................... 1個
1. 吸音材；SH 基板裏 ................................. 1個 Rear Cover L

RIS
15. 設置手順書（本書）............................... 1冊
このパッケージには、以下のものが入っています。
14. 取付ネジ .................................................. 1 式 4. Unscrew four securing screws of the SH PCB
13. マグネット受け .......................................... 1個
内容物リスト Securing Plate to open it.
Noise Absorber; SH PCB
12. 下部固定組立 ......................................... 1個 5. Attach the Noise Absorber of SH PCB to the SH
PCB Securing Plate on its reverse side.
11. 上部固定組立 ......................................... 1個ください。
10. 給紙防音カバー ...................................... 1個 Important: Arrange the location of the absorber so
9. 吸音材；架台- 給紙 ................................ 1個 as not to interfere driving parts like springs
8. 吸音材；架台-リア .................................. 1個 or gears when the plate is closed.
7. 吸音材；架台- 排紙 ................................ 1個 MZシリーズ RISO

6. Close the SH PCB Securing Plate and fix it with
本オプションは、以下の機種に適合しています。 four securing screws taken off in 4.
適合機種
7. Put the Rear Cover L back as before.
給排紙カバー設置手順書（2COLOR） SH PCB Securing Plate
1
[1-33]
2
E
8. Detach the Paper Receiving Tray.
9. Detach the Paper Receiving Cover.
OP
重要：吸音材は左図の位置に貼り付けてください。
吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド
13. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド（2個）を貼り付ける。
Paper Receiving Cover
UR 10. Attach the Noise Absorber; Suction Cover to the

exposed part.
Important: Please beware of injuring yourself with
jaggy fringes.
Important: Refer to the left illustration for the

direction of the Noise Absorber.
12. 排紙口塞ぎを取り外す。
吸音材；排紙カバー裏
排紙口塞ぎ
11. Put the Paper Receiving Cover back as before.

OE
Noise Absorber; Suction Cover
11. 排紙カバーを元通りに取り付ける。
12. Detach the Paper Ejection Cover.

重要：吸音材は左図の向きに貼り付けてください。
Paper Ejection Cover
重要：バリで怪我をしないように注意してください。
10. 吸音材；排紙カバー裏を貼り付ける。
RIS
排紙カバー
Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side 13. Attach the two pieces of Noise Absorber; Paper
Ejection Cover-Side to the exposed part.
排紙カバーを取り外す。 9.
position of the Noise Absorber.
排紙台を取り外す。 8.
2 [1-34]
3
E
14. Push the Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-
Center into the center of the Paper Ejection Cover.
Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Center
OP
吸音材；架台-排紙吸音材；架台-フロント 15. Put the Paper Ejection Cover back as before.
ながら押し込んでください。 Paper Ejection Cover Center

重要：上下の隙間が出来ない向きで、吸音材をつぶし
UR
18. 吸音材；架台- 排紙を押し込む。 16. Attach the Noise Absorber; Suction as well.
Important: Please beware of injuring yourself with
ながら押し込んでください。
jaggy fringes.
17. 吸音材；架台-フロントを押し込む。
direction of the Noise Absorber.
吸音材；排紙口
OE
Noise Absorber; Suction
17. Push the Noise Absorber into the gap between the
stand and the printer.
重要：吸音材は左図の向きに貼り付けてください。
Important: Push the Noise Absorber into the gap
重要：バリで怪我をしないように注意してください。
in the direction suitable to the shape of
16. 吸音材；排紙口（2個）を貼り付ける。 space, as squashing the reqired number
of pieces.
RIS
The two pieces of Noise Absorber which is used at
this point:
Noise Absorber; Stand Front----1pc.
Noise Absorber; Stand Front Noise Absorber; Stand R----1pc.

15. 排紙口塞ぎを元の位置に取り付ける。 Noise Absorber; Stand R
吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-センター
し込む。
14. 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎセンターを、排紙口塞ぎに押
[1-35] 3
4
E
18. Push the Noise Absorber into the front gap between
the stand and the printer. マグネットキャッチ
OP
Important: Push the Noise Absorber into the gap
in the direction suitable to the shape of
space, as squashing the reqired number 給紙防音カバー
of pieces.
位置を調整してください。
The two pieces of Noise Absorber which is used at 間にすきまがある場合は、マグネットキャッチの
this point: 外装カバーとの
重要：給紙防音カバーを閉じた状態で、
Noise Absorber; Stand L----1pc. 25. 給紙防音カバーを取り付ける。

Noise Absorber; Stand Rear
Hinge; Paper Feeder

Cover Upper
UR
Noise Absorber; Stand L
(paper feeding side)
Magnet Catcher; Paper

Feeding Cover
Noise Absorber; Stand Rear----1pc.
19. Secure the Hinge of Paper Feeder Cover Upper to

the paper feeding area with the screws. (Self-
binding screw Ni M4 x 8 2 pieces)
20. Secure the Hinge of Paper Feeder Cover Lower
24. 排版カバー；1を元通りに取り付ける。
（バインドNi M4×8 1本）
23. マグネット受けを取付ネジで固定する。
下部固定組立
with the mounting screws as well.

OE
(Self-binding screw Ni M4 x 8 2 pieces) （バインドNi M4×8 2本）
Note: A short screw driver is suitable for this operation. 22. 下部固定組立を取付ネジで固定する。
マグネット受け
21. Secure the Magnet Catcher of Paper Feeding Cover
with the screw. （バインドNi M4×8 2本）
上部固定組立
(Self-binding screw Ni M4 x 8 1 piece) 21. 上部固定組立を取付ネジで固定する。

Hinge; Paper Feeder 22. Put the Master Disposal Box Unit cover; 1 back as
Cover Lower before.
吸音材；架台 - 給紙
23. Attach the Noise Reduction Cover of Paper Feed.

RIS
Important: Adjust the location of the Magnet Clasp

if there is any gap between the outer cover ながら押し込んでください。
and the closed Noise Reduction Cover. 重要：上下の隙間が出来ない向きで、吸音材をつぶし
20. 吸音材；架台- 給紙を押し込む。

吸音材；架台 -リア
ながら押し込んでください。
Magnet Clasp
19. 吸音材；架台-リアを押し込む。
Noise Reduction Cover;
Paper Feed
4 [1-36]
5
<Dimensions>
E
Numbers are corresponding to the packing list’s.
No. Part number Part name Dimensions (mm) Dimension (inch)
1 024-75019 Noise Absorber; SH PCB 340 ｘ 60 ｘ 40 13.4 x 2.4 x 1.6
OP
2 024-75014 Noise Absorber; Suction Cover 400 ｘ 155 ｘ 55 15.7 x 6.1 x 2.2
3 024-75017 Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Side 115 ｘ 62 ｘ 18 4.5 x 2.4 x 0.7
4 024-75018 Noise Absorber; Paper Ejection Cover-Center 157 ｘ 63 ｘ 30 6.2 x 2.5 x 1.2
5 024-75015 Noise Absorber; Suction 115 ｘ 75.5 ｘ 40 4.5 x 3.0 x 1.6
6 024-75010 Noise Absorber; Stand Front 576 ｘ 65 ｘ 50 22.7 x 2.6 x 2.0
7 024-75012 Noise Absorber; Stand R 640 ｘ 65 ｘ 50 25.2 x 2.6 x 2.0
8 024-75013 Noise Absorber; Stand L 576 ｘ 100 ｘ 50 22.7 x 3.9 x 2.0
9 024-75011 Noise Absorber; Stand Rear 640 ｘ 50 ｘ 40 25.2 x 2.0 x 1.6
10 024-75001 Noise Reduction Cover; Paper Feed 488 ｘ 312 ｘ 105 19.2 x 12.3 x 4.1
UR
11 024-75005 Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Upper 70 ｘ 69.4 ｘ 24 2.8 x 2.7 x 0.9
12 024-75004 Hinge; Paper Feeder Cover Lower 75 ｘ 65 ｘ 54.6 3.0 x 2.6 x 2.1
13 023-75003 Magnet Catcher; Paper Feeder Cover 36 ｘ 29 ｘ 25 1.4 x 1.1 x 1.0
OE
36 ｘ 29 ｘ 25 マグネット受け 023-75003 13
75 ｘ 65 ｘ 54.6 下部固定組立 024-75004 12
70 ｘ 69.4 ｘ 24 上部固定組立 024-75005 11
488 ｘ 312 ｘ 105 給排紙防音カバー 024-75001 10
RIS
640 ｘ 50 ｘ 40 吸音材；架台- 給紙 024-75011 9
576 ｘ 100 ｘ 50 吸音材；架台-リア 024-75013 8
640 ｘ 65 ｘ 50 吸音材；架台- 排紙 024-75012 7
576 ｘ 65 ｘ 50 吸音材；架台-フロント 024-75010 6
115 ｘ 75.5 ｘ 40 吸音材；排紙口 024-75015 5
157 ｘ 63 ｘ 30 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-センタ 024-75018 4
115 ｘ 62 ｘ 18 吸音材；排紙口塞ぎ-サイド 024-75017 3
400 ｘ 155 ｘ 55 吸音材；排紙カバー裏 024-75014 2
340 ｘ 60 ｘ 40 吸音材；SH基板裏 024-75019 1
サイズ品名品番番号
番号は、内容物リストに対応しています。
《サイズリスト》
[1-37] 5
5. Removing Exterior Covers
E
Front cover
(1) Open the front cover, loosen the mounting screw on the upper hinge assembly, then lower and
remove the front cover.
Cover (front lower)
OP
(1) Remove the front cover.
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), then remove the cover (front lower).
Cover (front left)
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) , then remove the cover (front left).
Cover (front right)
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the cover (front right).
Panel case
case.
Panel lower cover
UR
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), disconnect the connector, then remove the panel
(1) Remove the front cover, cover (front left), cover (front right), and panel case.
(2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), then remove the panel lower
cover.
Cover (front upper)
(1) Remove the front cover, cover (front left), cover (front right), panel case, and panel lower cover.
(2) Remove the mounting screw (bind, M4 x 8, 1 pc), then remove the cover (front upper).
OE
Hinge assembly
Panel case and panel lower cover
* The panel lower cover becomes visible
after the panel case is removed.
0112
Cover (front upper)

RIS
0111
Front cover
Cover (front left) Cover (front lower) Cover (front right)

[1-38]
Stage cover
(1) Open the stage cover. Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 10, 1 pc each) from the hinge
sections (one each on the right and left sides), and temporarily install them in the holes in the back
E
side. Then remove the stage cover.
Cover (upper right)

(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs), then remove the cover (upper right).
OP
* To remove one of the six mounting screws, you must first open the cover of the bottle cap holder.
Master removal cover (2)

(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), then remove the master removal cover (2).
Stage cover
Cover for bottle cap holder
UR Cover (upper right)

OE
RIS
0113
[1-39]
Cover (rear left)

(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the cover (rear left).
E
Cover (rear right)
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs), then remove the cover (rear right).

(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the master removal cover (1).
OP
Cover (upper left)
(1) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), then remove the cover (upper left).
Cover (upper rear)

(1) Remove the stage cover, the cover (upper right), and the cover (upper left).
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 4 pcs), then remove the cover (upper rear).
Cover (upper rear) UR Cover (upper left)

OE
RIS
Cover (rear right)
0114
Cover (rear left)
[1-40]
6. Opening the SH PCB Bracket and Power Supply/System PCB

Bracket
E
Opening the SH PCB bracket
(1) Turn off power and remove the cover (rear left).
(2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and open the SH PCB bracket.
OP
Opening the power supply/system PCB bracket
(1) Turn off power.
(2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs) and open the power supply/
system PCB bracket.
UR
Power supply/system PCB bracket SH PCB bracket
OE
RIS
0115
[1-41]
MEMO
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[1-42]
Chapter 2 Machine Summary
E
Contents
OP
1. Optional Accessories .............................................................................................................. 2-3
2. Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 2-4

RISO MZ 790 U ................................................................................................................... 2-4
RISO MZ 770 A ................................................................................................................... 2-6
RISO MZ 770 E ................................................................................................................... 2-8
3.
4.
5.
UR
Optional Accessories (China model) ................................................................................... 2-10
Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 2-10

RISO MV 7690 C .............................................................................................................. 2-11
Paper Sizes ............................................................................................................................ 2-12

OE
RIS
[2-1]
Blank Page
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[2-2]
E
Optional Accessories
OP
A variety of optional accessories are available to enhance the capabilities of the machine.
For details about the optional accessories, see your dealer (or authorized service representative).
! Auto Document Feeder

Feed up to 50 sheets of originals automatically.
! Color Cylinder (Drum)
! Key Card Counter
UR
Simply change the Cylinder (Drum) to print in multiple colors. (Case included)
With a single button press, shows the numbers of printed copies and consumed masters within a given period of
time. This can help you manage costs.
! Job Separator
With the Programed Printing function, allows the machine to print and sort into groups separated by tape.
! Stand
! RISO PRINTER Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET

OE
Use to directly connect the machine to the network.
This comes with the RISO-MONITOR software that allows you to check the status of the machine from computers.
! Special Paper Feed Kit
This unit allows you to feed thicker paper such as cards and envelopes.
! Ink/Master Holder
A rack kit for storing supply such as ink and masters.
! Document Storage Card DM-128CF
! Wide Stacking Tray

Paper Receiving Tray for sizes A6 - A3/Ledger 13.4" × 18.5" (340mm × 470mm).
RIS
! RISO Color Separation Software CS-2000

Easy to use application software for printing multi-colored, computer-generated images on your RISO printer.
[2-3]
Specifications
E
OP
RISO MZ790 U
Master-making/printing methods High-speed digital master-making/full automatic stencil printing

Original Type Book (22 lb (10 kg) or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.) When using the Stage Glass :
115/16" × 39/16" (50mm × 90mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
When using the ADF unit (option) :
39/16" × 51/2" (90mm × 140mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
Original Paper Weight When using the Stage Glass : 22 lb (10 kg) or less
UR
When using the ADF unit (option) : 15-lb bond (50g/m2) - 34-lb bond (128g/m2)
Print Paper Size (max./min.) When simultaneously 2-Color printing:
73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
When 1-Color printing (using Cylinder (Drum) 1):
315/16" × 513/16" (100mm × 148mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
Paper Supply Capacity 1000 sheets (17-lb bond (64 g/m2))
Print Paper Weight 13-lb bond (46g/m2) - 110-lb index (210g/m2)
Image Processing mode Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo, Pencil
OE
Resolution D600dpi
Master-making Time Approx. 57 seconds (for dual-color print)
(for A4/portrait/100% reproduction ratio) Approx. 24 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 1))
Approx. 34 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 2))
Printing Area (max.) 117/16" × 163/4" (291mm × 425mm)
Print Reproduction Ratio Zoom : 50 - 200%
Standard reproduction ratio (enlargement) : 200%, 154%, 129%, 121%
Standard reproduction ratio (reduction) : 78%, 65%, 61%, 50%
Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Speed Approx. 60 - 150 sheets per minute (Control panel: five steps variable,
touch panel: 150ppm)
RIS
Print Position Adjustment Vertical : ±19/32" (±15mm) Horizontal : ±3/8" (±10mm)

Ink Supply Full automatic (1000 ml per cartridge)
Master Supply/Disposal Full automatic (approx. 220 sheets per roll)
Master Disposal Capacity 80 sheets
User Interface LCD Touch Panel with Progress Arrow indicators, front-side operation
Optional Accessories Auto Document Feeder, Job Separator, Key Card Counter, Color Cylinder
(Drum), Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET, Special Paper Feed Kit,
Stand, Document Storage Card DM-128CF, Wide Stacking Tray, RISO
Color Separation Software CS-2000
Power Source MZ790U : 100V-120V / 220V-240V AC, 50/60Hz <7.3/3.0A>
[2-4]
Dimensions When in use :
E
633/16"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1605mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H))
When in storage :
393/4"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1010mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H))
Weight Approx. 370 1/16 lb (168 kg)
OP
Note:
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to the machine, some images and explanations in this manual
may not correspond to your machine.
• The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
UR
OE
RIS
[2-5]
E
Specifications
OP
RISO MZ770 A

Original Type Book (22 lb (10 kg) or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.) When using the Stage Glass :
115/16" × 39/16" (50mm × 90mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
When using the ADF unit (option) :
39/16" × 51/2" (90mm × 140mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
Original Paper Weight When using the Stage Glass : 22 lb (10 kg) or less
UR
When using the ADF unit (option) : 15-lb bond (50g/m2) - 34-lb bond (128g/m2)
Print Paper Size (max./min.) When simultaneously 2-Color printing:
73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297 mm × 432 mm)
315/16" × 513/16" (100mm × 148mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297mm × 432mm)
73/16" × 101/8" (182 mm × 257 mm) - 1111/16" × 17" (297 mm × 432 mm)
Paper Supply Capacity 1000 sheets (17-lb bond (64 g/m2))
Print Paper Weight 13-lb bond (46g/m2) - 110-lb index (210g/m2)
Image Processing mode Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo, Pencil
OE
Resolution D600dpi
Master-making Time Approx. 57 seconds (for dual-color print)
(for A4/portrait/100% reproduction ratio) Approx. 24 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 1))
Approx. 34 seconds (for single-color print (Cylinder (Drum) 2))
Printing Area (max.) 117/16" × 161/4" (291mm × 413mm)
Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
RIS
Print Position Adjustment Vertical : ±19/32" (±15mm) Horizontal : ±3/8" (±10mm)

Optional Accessories Auto Document Feeder, Job Separator, Key Card Counter, Color Cylinder
(Drum), Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET, Special Paper Feed Kit,
Stand, Document Storage Card DM-128CF, Wide Stacking Tray, RISO
Color Separation Software CS-2000
Power Source MZ770A : 100V-120V/220V-240V AC, 50/60Hz <7.3/3.0A>
[2-6]
Dimensions When in use :
E
633/16"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1605mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H))
When in storage :
393/4"(W) × 289/16"(D) × 283/4"(H) (1010mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H))
Weight Approx. 370 1/16 lb (168 kg)
OP
Note:
UR
OE
RIS
[2-7]
E
Specifications
RISO MZ770 E
OP
Original Type Book (10 kg or less), sheet
Original Size (max./min.) When using the Platen Glass : 50mm × 90mm - 297mm × 432mm
When using the ADF unit (option) : 90mm × 140mm - 297mm × 432mm
Original Paper Weight When using the Platen Glass : 10 kg or less
When using the ADF unit (option) : 50g/m2 - 128g/m2
Print Paper Size (max./min.) When simultaneously 2-Colour printing:
Paper Supply Capacity

Print Paper Weight
Image Processing mode
UR 182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
When 1-Colour printing (using Drum 1):
100mm × 148mm - 297mm × 432mm
When 1-Colour printing (using Drum 2):
182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
1000 sheets (64 g/m2)
46g/m2 - 210g/m2
Line, Photo (Standard/Portrait/Group), Duo, Pencil
Resolution D600dpi
OE
Master-making Time Approx. 57 seconds (for dual-colour print)
(for A4/portrait/100% reproduction ratio) Approx. 24 seconds (for single-colour print (Drum 1))
Approx. 34 seconds (for single-colour print (Drum 2))
Printing Area (max.) 291mm × 413mm
Margin+ : 90 - 99 %
Print Position Adjustment Vertical : ±15mm Horizontal : ±10mm
RIS

Optional Accessories Auto Document Feeder, Job Separator, Key Card Counter, Colour Drum,
Network Interface Card RISORINC-NET, Special Paper Feed Kit, Stand,
Document Storage Card DM-32CF/128CF, Wide Stacking Tray, RISO
Colour Separation Software CS-2000
Power Source MZ770E : 220V-240V AC, 50/60Hz <3.0A>
Dimensions When in use : 1605mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H)
When in storage : 1010mm(W) × 725mm(D) × 730mm(H)
Weight Approx. 168 kg
[2-8]
Note:
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[2-9]
E
附录
OP
选购附件
有各种各样的选购附件可用于增强本机功能。
如需了解有关选购附件的详情，请联系您的经销商（或授权维修中心）。
自动进稿机
可自动供给多达 50 张原稿。
彩色滚筒
UR
只需更换滚筒便可用多种颜色印刷。（包含外壳）
磁卡计数器
只要按一个键，即可显示指定时间段内的印刷量与版纸消耗量。这有助于成本管理。
分页机
使用编程印刷功能，可供本机进行印刷并以胶带分页成组。
撑脚
理想速印机网卡 RISORINC-NET
OE
用于直接将本机接入网络。
此附件附带 RISO-MONITOR 软件，可用于从计算机检查本机状态。
特殊纸张进纸组件
通过本机组可以送入较厚的纸张，如卡片与信封。
油墨 / 版纸支架
用于储存备件（如油墨与版纸）的支架组件。
宽型堆垛盒
对应 A6-A3 尺寸的出纸盒 /Ledger （340 mm × 479 mm）。
RIS
[2-10]
技术规格
E
RISO MV7690 C
OP
制版 / 印刷方法高速数字制版 / 全自动模版印刷
原稿类型书本（10 kg 或以下）、稿纸
原稿尺寸（最大 / 最小）使用扫描台玻璃时：50 mm × 90 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
使用自动进稿机组（选购件）时：90 mm × 140 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
原稿纸张重量使用扫描台玻璃时：10 kg 或以下
使用自动进稿机组（选购件）时：50 g/m2 - 128 g/m2
印刷纸张尺寸（最大 / 最小）双色印刷时：
182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
单色印刷时（用滚筒 1）：
100 mm × 148 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
进纸容量
印刷纸张重量
图像处理模式
分辨率
制版时间
（对于 A4/ 肖像 /100% 缩放比率）
UR
单色印刷时（用滚筒 2）：
182 mm × 257 mm - 297 mm × 432 mm
1000 张（64 g/m2）
46 g/m2 -210 g/m2
文字、照片（标准 / 肖像 / 群组）、图文、铅笔
D600dpi
约 57 秒（双色印刷）
约 24 秒（单色印刷（滚筒 1））
约 34 秒（单色印刷（滚筒 2））
OE
印刷区域（最大） 291 mm × 413 mm
印刷缩放比率任意指定：50 - 200%
标准缩放比率（放大）：163%, 141%, 122%, 116%
标准缩放比率（缩小）：87%, 82%, 71%, 61%
页边放大：90 - 99 %
印刷速度每分约 60 - 150 张（控制面板：5 级速度调节，触摸面板：150 ppm）
印刷位置调整垂直：±15 mm，水平：±10 mm
油墨供给全自动（每筒 1000 毫升）
版纸供给 / 回收全自动（约每卷 220 张）
RIS
废版盒容量 80 张
用户界面带进度箭头指示灯的 LCD 触摸面板，正面操作
选购附件自动进稿机、分页机、磁卡计数器、彩色滚筒、网卡 RISORINC-NET、特
殊纸张进纸组件、撑脚、油墨 / 版纸支架、宽型堆垛盒
电源 MV7690C：220V AC, 50 Hz <3.0A>
尺寸使用时：1605 mm (W) × 725 mm (D) × 730 mm (H)
存储时：1010 mm (W) × 725 mm (D) × 730 mm (H)
重量约 168 kg
注：
• 请注意，由于本机的改进与修改，本手册中的某些图像与说明可能与您的速印机不同。
• 以上规格如果变更恕不另行通知。
[2-11]
4. Paper Sizes
Center transport
E
中間搬送部
section
OP
Second paper
2次給紙部 Transport flap
搬送フラッパ
feed section
69㎜ 244㎜
UR 313㎜
Paper is transported from the pickup roller to the second paper feed roller and discharged by a pair of
pressure rollers. Paper is held in place by a roller at any given time during printing.
If paper is not held in place by a roller, it may move in any of the four directions during printing.
The amount of positional shift grows especially large for small copy paper sheets, resulting in noticeable
print registration problems.
OE
A print registration problem can cause serious problems, particularly with dual-color printing.
Since paper shorter than 244 mm cannot be held in place by the center transport section, the minimum
standard paper size that can be printed is B5 (loaded vertically).
The single-color printing operation using the first print drum is identical to that of an ordinary single-color
printer. Thus, the paper size restrictions are also the same.
For single-color printing using the second print drum, the distance between the second paper feed
section and the second print drum is 313 mm and longer than when using the first print drum. However,
this has minimal consequences for single-color printing. The minimum paper size that can be printed
appropriately is B5.
Paper will shift significantly with smaller paper sizes, and the machine will not provide maximum printing
quality.
RIS
[2-12]
Chapter 3 Main Drive Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 3-2
1. Main Drive Rotation Mechanism ............................................................................................... 3-2
2. Print Drum Rotation Angle Detection Mechanism ..................................................................... 3-3
3. Print Drum FG Sensors ............................................................................................................. 3-4
4 Vertical Position Adjustment Mechanism .................................................................................. 3-6
5. Drive Brake Mechanism ............................................................................................................ 3-8
6. Main Motor Safety Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 9
7.
3.
4.
UR
Print Drum Set Safety Mechanism .......................................................................................... 3-11
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................... 3-12

1.
2.
Removing Pressure Springs ................................................................................................... 3-13
Removing the Position-B Sensor and Print Drum FG Sensor
(Same Procedure as for First and Second Print Drum Sides) ................................................. 3-14
Removing the Drive Encoder (Same Procedure as for First and
Second Print Drum Sides) ....................................................................................................... 3-15
Removing the Vertical Print Position Main Unit ....................................................................... 3-17
5. Removing the Solenoid Brake ................................................................................................. 3-21
6. Removing the Print-positioning Pulse Motor ........................................................................... 3-22
OE
7. Removing the Main Motor ....................................................................................................... 3-24
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 3-26

1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-26
2. Print Drum Position-B Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-26
RIS
[3-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Main Drive Rotation Mechanism
When the main motor turns ON, the main motor gear rotates. This rotation is transmitted to the first print
drum drive gear by means of main drive gear A and main drive gear B.
OP
The first print drum drive gear then turns the vertical print position input gear. This rotation is transmitted
to the second print drum drive gear by the planetary gear and vertical print position output gear.
The main motor FG sensor detects the rotation speed and angle of the print drums.
Second print drum drive gear

UR Vertical print position input gear
(gear on the rear side)
Vertical print position output gear

(gear on the front side)
First print drum drive gear
OE
Main drive gear B
Main drive gear A
Main motor
RIS
Main motor FG sensor
0301
0302
0303
<< Main motor >>
[3-2]
2. Print Drum Rotation Angle Detection Mechanism
E
For print drum rotation angle detection, the position-B sensors on the first print drum side and second
print drum side and the position-B actuator plates on the pressure cams check the machine position-B.
Then, using machine position-B as the reference, the main motor FG sensors check the print drum
rotation angles.
When the machine position-B is at the center of the position-B actuator plate, the print drum angle is
OP
indicated as 0° machine position-B.
Machine position-A is at a 65° turn from the machine position-B, and the FG count is 2,880 pulses for one
full print drum rotation.
Position-B sensor Position-B actuator plate

Position-B sensor
Print drum FG sensor
UR
OE
0304
<< Second print drum side >> << First print drum side >>
Position-B actuator plate

RIS
0305
[3-3]
3. Print Drum FG Sensors
E
For detailed information on the second paper feed mechanism, refer to Chapter 5.
(1) Second paper feed operation, with the first print drum set in the main unit
The paper feed timing of the second paper feed section is used for vertical print position adjustment of
OP
the first print drum. (Refer to the section on second paper feed section.)
When the first print drum rotates to a specified position, the second paper feed motor rotates and begins
transporting paper toward the print drum. The registration sensor detects the leading edge of the paper to
confirm the start of paper feed action. (Condition (a) the diagram below)
The second paper feed motor continues the rotation to transport the paper until its leading edge reaches
the print drum. (Condition (b) the diagram below)
While first print drum FG sensor monitors the rotation speed of the first print drum, the rotation of the
second feed motor is controlled under conditions between (a) and (b) so that the paper feed speed is
equivalent to the print drum circumferential speed in condition (b) and the timing of the arrival of paper
leading edge at the print drum remains constant.
UR
(2) Second paper feed operation, without the first print drum in the main unit
The operation is basically the same as described in (1), but the rotation of the second paper feed motor is
controlled based on feedback from the second print drum FG sensor.
Registration sensor
OE
Second paper feed roller
(a)
(b)
RIS
0306
With first print drum installed Without first print drum
[3-4]
E
Guide roller
OP
Timing roller
Registration sensor
UR Second paper feed motor

0307
First drum FG sensor

OE
Second drum FG sensor
RIS
0308
<< View from the panel side >>
[3-5]
4 Vertical Position Adjustment Mechanism
E
The paper feed timing of the second paper feed section is used for vertical print position adjustment of
the first print drum in single-color printing (with the first print drum) or in dual-color printing, and for adjust-
ment of the vertical print position of the second print drum for single-color printing using just the second
print drum, when no first print drum is installed in the main unit. (Refer to the section on the second paper
feed section.)
OP
Vary the phase difference between the first and second print drums to adjust the vertical print position of
the second print drum in dual-color printing or in single-color printing with the first print drum installed in
the main unit.
The phase difference is varied by the vertical print position main unit installed between the first print drum
drive gear and the second print drum drive gear.
The vertical print position main unit incorporates a planetary gear mechanism and uses the print-position-
ing pulse motor of the vertical print position adjusting unit to control the phase difference.
At the initial vertical print position, the phase difference of the second print drum relative to the first print
drum is 162.6° (equivalent to the distance from the first print drum to the second print drum).
In addition, to prevent load fluctuations on the second print drum from causing a backlash in the vertical
UR
print position adjusting input gear, resulting in print registration problems with the second print drum, the
vertical print-position-control spring, spring attachment gear, and speed reduction gear press the vertical
print position adjusting input gear in the counterclockwise direction.
If you press the vertical print-positioning key while the machine is in standby, the print-positioning pulse
motor will not start. Only the panel display will reflect this operation.
The vertical print position is varied when printing starts.
Spring attachment gear << View from the panel side >>
Vertical print-position-control spring

Speed reduction gear
OE
Print-positioning pulse motor

RIS
Vertical print position adjusting input gear

0309
First print drum Second print drum
162.6°
0310
[3-6]
When < > key (upward) of the second print drum is pressed in dual-color printing
Pressing the < > key (upward) causes the print-positioning pulse motor to rotate the vertical print
E
position adjusting input gear counterclockwise. Since the vertical print position output gear rotates clock-
wise (it rotates clockwise during normal printing operations) and the second print drum drive gear turns
counterclockwise, the phase of the second print drum advances, raising the print position.
OP
UR

0311
OE
When < > key (downward) of the second print drum is pressed in dual-color printing
Pressing the < > key (downward) causes the print-positioning pulse motor to rotate the vertical print
position adjusting input gear clockwise. Since the vertical print position output gear rotates counterclock-
wise and the second print drum drive gear turns clockwise, the phase of the second print drum is re-
tarded, lowering the print position.

RIS
0312

[3-7]
5. Drive Brake Mechanism
E
During printing operations, when the pressure lever on the second print drum side begins to move down
relative to the pressure cam lobe, the pressure spring force turns the second print drum upward as much
as the backlash (backlash from the first print drum drive gear to the second print drum drive gear) of the
second print drum gear allows. The degree of this deviation varies with each rotation, potentially resulting
in transfer ghosting (i.e., ink transferred by the first print drum pressing against the second master,
OP
resulting in the superimposition of the image printed by the first print drum during the next printing opera-
tion). To prevent this, the drive brake is switched ON when the second print drum angle is between
215.4° and 267.4°, applying a load on the second print drum drive gear. This keeps the pressure spring
from preventing the second print drum from turning due to backlash.
Drive brake
UR Second print drum drive gear
0313
OE
Pressure cam
0314
Pressure lever
RIS
Pressure spring
[3-8]
6. Main Motor Safety Mechanism
E
Five safety switches (rear cover safety SW1, rear cover safety SW2, master making unit drawer cover
safety SW, first master disposal box safety SW, and second master disposal box safety SW) will make it
impossible to turn ON the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor, first master disposal motor,
second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second master compression motor, first
horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport
OP
pulse motor of any of these sections is not set.
* Note that the cutter motor turns ON in the test mode even if the master disposal box is not set in place.
UR Second master disposal box safety SW

OE
RIS
0315
Master making unit drawer cover safety SW
[3-9]
E
Rear cover safety SW 1
Rear cover safety SW 2
OP
First master disposal box safety SW
UR
OE
0316
RIS
[3-10]
7. Print Drum Set Safety Mechanism
E
If the front cover safety switch is OFF and either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum
safety switch is OFF, the safety mechanism prevents the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp
motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second
master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal pulse motor, cutter motor, and
master making unit transport pulse motor from turning ON.
OP
While the front cover safety switch is ON, the machine will operate if either the first print drum safety
switch or second print drum safety switch is ON, even when the other is OFF. This permits printing with a
single print drum.
UR
OE
0317
Print drum safety SW

RIS
[3-11]
Disassembly
E
OP
PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN
DRIVE SECTION AND PRESSURE SECTION
Following removal of the main cover, the pressure springs must

be removed before disassembly of the main drive or pressure
sections. Failure to remove the pressure springs may result in
UR
sudden rotation of gears or cams from the force of the springs and
cause injury.
To prevent accidents, always remove the pressure springs (on
both the first and second print drum sides) before disassembly.
Reattach the pressure springs (the first and second print drum
sides) only at the end of reassembly.
OE
RIS
[3-12]
1. Removing Pressure Springs
E
(1) Run Confidential Mode for both the first and second print drums.
(2) Run Test Mode No. 908 (Pressure Control Maintenance Positioning) for both the first and second
print drum sides.
(3) Run Test Mode No. 892 (Machine Position-B stop (The position in which the print drum can be
removed from the machine.)) for the second print drum side, then switch off power.
OP
(4) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB
bracket.
(5) On both the first and second print drum sides, turn the pressure lever assemblies slightly clockwise.
With the solenoid levers positioned away from the pressure lever assemblies, return the pressure
lever assemblies to their original positions.
(6) On both the first and second print drum sides, dismount the pressure springs from the pressure
spring hook plate, then remove the pressure lever assemblies.
UR
Pressure spring Pressure lever assembly
OE
RIS
0318
Pressure spring hook plate Solenoid lever
[3-13]
2. Removing the Position-B Sensor and Print Drum FG Sensor (Same

Procedure as for First and Second Print Drum Sides)
E
(1) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB
bracket.
Removing the position-B sensor
OP
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), and dismount the
position-B sensor together with the bracket.
Removing the print drum FG sensor

(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screw (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 1 pc), and dis-
mount the print drum FG sensor together with the bracket.
Position-B sensor
Print drum FG sensor UR

OE
0319
RIS
0320
[3-14]
3. Removing the Drive Encoder (Same Procedure as for First and Sec-
ond Print Drum Sides)
E
(1) Remove the pressure springs. (Refer to <1. Removing Pressure Springs>.)
(2) Close the power supply/system PCB bracket and attach the cover (rear right).
(3) Move the first print drum to position-B, then switch off power.
OP
(4) Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket and SH PCB bracket.
(5) Remove the print drum FG sensors from the first and second print drum sides.
(6) Remove the connectors for the position-B sensors from the first and second print drum sides, then
remove the reusable band (at four locations).
(7) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs each) and dismount the pres-
sure shaft bearing assemblies from the first and second print drum sides.
(8) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 6 pcs), then remove the main cover.
* In this step, remove the main cover while pressing against the shafts of the print drum drive gear
assemblies, to keep the print drum drive gear assemblies on the first and second print drum sides
in their installed positions.

UR
Position-B sensor
Main cover
Position-B sensor
OE
RIS
0321
Pressure shaft bearing assembly Shaft of print drum drive gear assembly Pressure shaft bearing assembly
<< Precautions for reinstallation >>

• When mounting the main cover, fasten screws A and B before tightening the remaining four screws,
then install the pressure shaft bearing assemblies.
[3-15]
(9) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 6 pcs) and dismount the drive encoder.
E
OP
UR
<< With the main cover removed >>
0322
OE
RIS
0323
Drive encoder
[3-16]
4. Removing the Vertical Print Position Main Unit
E
(3) Pull out both the first and second print drums, set the first print drum side to position-B, and switch off
power.
(4) Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket and SH PCB bracket.
OP
(5) Remove the main cover. (Refer to Steps (5) through (8) in <3. Removing the Drive Encoder>.)
(6) Remove the separation springs from the first and second print drum sides.
(7) Remove the vertical print-position-control spring.
(8) Remove the first and second print drum drive gear assemblies.
(9) Remove the vertical print position main unit.
Second print drum drive gear assembly First print drum drive gear assembly
UR Vertical print position main unit

OE
0324
RIS
Separation spring Separation spring
[3-17]
<< Procedure for installing drive system gears >>

(1) Align the phase alignment holes of the vertical print position adjusting input gear assembly, vertical
print position input gear, and vertical print position output gear of the vertical print position main unit.
E
Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the holes.
* Phase alignment holes of the vertical print position input gear and vertical print position output gear
will align only once every four turns of the vertical print position output gear.
(2) With the 4-mm-diameter jig inserted into the phase alignment holes of the print-positioning control
OP
plate and the print positioning plate, install the vertical print position main unit, confirming that the 8-
mm-diameter jig inserted into the vertical print position main unit aligns with the phase alignment hole
of the vertical print position drive shaft bearing plate.
8-mm-diameter jig Vertical print position output gear
0325
UR Vertical print position input gear
Vertical print position adjusting

input gear assembly
<< Vertical print position main unit >>

OE
Print-positioning control plate
Print positioning plate 4-mm-diameter jig

RIS
0326
Vertical print position drive shaft bearing plate
0327
8-mm-diameter jig Vertical print position main unit
<< Precautions for installation >>

• When inserting the 4-mm-diameter jig, confirm that the master making unit is in the pulled-out position.
[3-18]
(3) Since the gear alignment marks are not visible, remove the pressure cams of the first and second
print drum drive gear assemblies. (with double-washer, M4 x 10, 3 pcs each)
E
Pressure cam
OP
0328
UR
<< Print drum drive gear assembly >>
(4) With the 8-mm-diameter jig inserted into the vertical print position main unit, insert the 4-mm-diam-
eter jig into the phase alignment hole of the separation pump gear assembly on the first print drum
side, then align the marks on the vertical print position input gear and first print drum drive gear and
attach the first print drum drive gear assembly.
OE
Separation pump gear assembly on first print drum side
4-mm-diameter jig
Vertical print position input gear First print drum drive gear
RIS
0329 0330
Alignment marks First print drum drive gear assembly
[3-19]
(5) With the 8-mm-diameter jig inserted into the vertical print position main unit, insert the 4-mm-diam-
eter jig into the phase alignment hole of the separation pump gear assembly on the second print
drum side, then align the marks on the vertical print position output gear and second print drum drive
E
gear and attach the second print drum drive gear assembly.
4-mm-diameter jig Separation pump gear assembly on second print drum side
OP
Vertical print position
Second print drum drive gear output gear
UR
0331 0332
OE
Second print drum drive gear assembly Alignment marks
(6) Install the pressure cams in the first and second print drum drive gear assemblies.
* In this step, insert the 4-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes of the pressure cams and
print drum drive gears to secure them in position.
(7) Attach the main cover.
RIS
4-mm-diameter jig
Pressure cam
0333
[3-20]
5. Removing the Solenoid Brake
E
(1) Stop the first print drum at position-B, then switch off power.
(2) Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket.
(3) To keep the gears from turning, insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes of the
main cover, pressure cam, and rear plate on the second print drum side.
(4) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M4 x 10, 4 pcs). Unplug the connector and dismount the
OP
solenoid brake.
Solenoid brake
Connector
UR
OE
0334
RIS
Phase alignment hole
0335
Main cover
[3-21]
6. Removing the Print-positioning Pulse Motor
E
(3) Set the first print drum at position-B, then switch off power.
(4) Remove the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/system PCB bracket.
(5) Insert the 8-mm-diameter jigs into the phase alignment holes of the main cover (indicated by the
OP
arrow in the photo), pressure cams, and rear plate on both the first and second print drum sides.
(6) Remove the vertical print-position-control spring.
(7) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs) and unplug the connector for
the print-positioning pulse motor. Remove the reusable band and dismount the vertical print position
adjusting unit.
Vertical print-position-control spring
UR
Connector for print-positioning
pulse motor
0336
OE
Reusable band
RIS
0337
[3-22]
(8) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the print-positioning
pulse motor.
E
Print-positioning pulse motor
OP
0338

UR
<< Vertical print position adjusting unit >>
• With the 8-mm-diameter jigs (A, B) inserted into phase alignment holes of the main cover, pressure
cams, and rear plate of both the first and second print drum sides, insert the 4-mm-diameter jig (C) into
the phase alignment holes of the print-positioning control plate and print positioning plate. Install after
aligning the phases of the drive system gear and vertical print position adjusting unit.
OE
Print positioning plate Print-positioning control plate
RIS
0339
[3-23]
7. Removing the Main Motor
E
(1) Switch off power.
(2) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the SH PCB bracket.
(3) Remove the sheet metal at three locations (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs on center sheet
metal, 1 pc each on left and right sheet metal).
(4) Remove the reusable band at one location.
OP
(5) Remove the pressure springs and dismount and move the pressure control unit to the left to provide
space. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs)
(6) Remove the two bearing sheet metal plates (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs each), then
remove the main drive transmission cover. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 5 pcs)
Pressure spring Main drive transmission cover
UR
Bearing sheet metal
OE
0340
Pressure control unit Sheet metal at three locations

Reusable band
RIS
(7) Remove the C-ring and dismount main drive gear A.
Main drive gear A
C-ring
0341
[3-24]
(8) Unplug the two connectors, remove the mounting screws, and dismount the main motor (RS tight
with round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs).
E
Mounting screws
OP
UR Main motor
0342
OE
<< Note >>
If the main motor has been replaced, you must perform <acquisition of main motor parameters> and
<acquisition of second paper feed motor parameters>.
(Procedure)
(1) Set the first and second print drums in the main unit.
(2) Run Test Mode No. 1105 (Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode).
(3) Run Test Mode No. 1106 (Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode).
RIS
For detailed information, refer to <Chapter 17 Other Precautions>.
[3-25]
Adjustment
E
1. Print Drum Position-A Adjustment
Adjustment and adjustment procedures

(1) Open the front cover.
OP
(2) Launch test mode and run Test Mode No. 881 (Position-A action of the print drum).
(3) Confirm that the stamped mark on the print drum cover is within 1° of the left edge of the projection
on the clamp plate base.
(4) If the measurement fails to meet this standard, run Test Mode No. 941 (Print-drum Position-A adjust-
ment) and adjust print drum position-A.
(5) Repeat the steps from (2).
Confirm that the gap between the left edge of the projection on the clamp
plate base and the steel measure (or similar tool) is approximately 1.5 mm.
UR
OE
0343
RIS
Position a steel measure or similar tool along the groove on the drum cover.
2. Print Drum Position-B Adjustment

(1) Open the front cover and press the print drum removal button.
(2) Move the print drum in and out to confirm that it moves smoothly.
(3) If the print drum does not move smoothly in and out, run Test Mode No. 942 (Print-drum position-B
adjustment) and adjust print drum position-B.
[3-26]
Chapter 4 Initial Paper Feed Section
Chapter 4 First Paper Feed Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 4-2
1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism .................................................................................................... 4-2
2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism .................................................................................... 4-3
3. Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism ......................................................................................... 4-5
4. Remaining Paper Volume Detection Mechanism ...................................................................... 4-6
5. Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Mechanism .......................................................................... 4-7
6. Paper Feed Reverse-Rotation Prevention Mechanism ............................................................. 4-8
7.
8.
9.
2.
UR
Initial Paper Feed Operation ..................................................................................................... 4-9
Custom Paper Feed Adjustment Function .............................................................................. 4-10
Paper Stripper Mechanism ...................................................................................................... 4-11
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................... 4-12

1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit ....................................................................................... 4-12
Removing the Paper Detection Sensor, Paper Size Detection Sensor, and Paper Width
Potentiometer .......................................................................................................................... 4-14
3. Removing the Scraper and Pickup Roller ............................................................................... 4-18
4. Removing the Paper Feed Roller Assembly ........................................................................... 4-20
OE
5. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Button and Paper Feed Tray Upper Safety Switch ............... 4-21
6. Removing the Elevator Upper-limit Sensors and Paper Feed Pressure Sensor ..................... 4-23
7. Removing the Paper Feed Reverse-rotation Prevention Solenoid .......................................... 4-24
8. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch ........................................................................................... 4-25
9. Removing Remaining Paper Volume Sensors A and B ........................................................... 4-27
10. Removing the Elevator Motor .................................................................................................. 4-28
11. Removing the Elevator Lower-limit Sensor and Paper Feed Tray Lower Safety Switch ......... 4-29
12. Removing the Stripper Pad Unit .............................................................................................. 4-30
13. Removing the Stripper Pad Assembly ..................................................................................... 4-31
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 4-32

1. Elevator Upper-limit Sensor Position Adjustment .................................................................... 4-32
RIS
2. Stripper Pad Adjustment .......................................................................................................... 4-33

3. Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle Adjustment ............................................................................... 4-34
4. Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle Adjustment ............................................................................. 4-34
5. Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment .................................................................................. 4-35
[4-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism
The paper feed tray is equipped with a paper width potentiometer and a paper size detection sensor to
determine the size of paper placed in the paper feed tray.
OP
The paper width potentiometer detects the paper width, while the paper size detection sensor identifies
the paper length (whether positioned vertically or horizontally).
Because the horizontal print position is adjusted on the print drum side, the paper feed tray does not
move horizontally.
UR
OE
0401
Paper feed tray Paper size detection sensor Paper width potentiometer
RIS
[4-2]
2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism
E
The paper detection sensor detects the presence of paper in the paper feed tray.
Pressing the Start key while the paper detection sensor senses light (indicating the presence of paper)
indicates that paper is present switches ON the elevator motor and lifts the paper feed tray until the
upper-limit detecting plate (card) blocks the light path of elevator upper-limit sensor A. The upper-limit
detecting plate (normal) blocks the light path of elevator upper-limit sensor B (refer to the << Upper-limit
OP
Position of the Paper Feed Tray >> on the next page regarding upper-limit positions determined by
elevator upper-limit sensors A and B).
During printing, the elevator motor remains ON until the set upper-limit position is attained.
When no more paper is left in the paper feed tray and no light strikes the paper detection sensor, the
elevator motor switches ON and lowers the paper feed tray until the light path of the elevator lower-limit
sensor is blocked.
Press the Feed Tray button (for 0.7 seconds or less) during print standby to turn the elevator motor ON
and lower the paper feed tray until the light path of the elevator lower-limit sensor is blocked or the Feed
Tray button is pressed once again. Depress the Feed Tray button for more than 0.7 seconds to lower the
paper feed tray until the Feed Tray button is released.
Elevator upper-limit sensor A

UR
Pressing the Feed Tray button when the paper feed tray is at the lower-limit position and the paper
detection sensor senses light will switch the elevator motor ON and lift the paper feed tray to the upper-
limit position.
Upper-limit detecting plate (normal)

Elevator upper-limit sensor B
Elevator motor
Upper-limit detecting plate

(card)
OE
Feed Tray button
RIS
0402
Paper detection sensor
Elevator lower-limit sensor
[4-3]
<< Upper-limit Position of the Paper Feed Tray >>

There are two elevator upper-limit sensors, A and B. The elevator upper-limit sensor B is paired with the
E
upper-limit detecting plate (normal), while the elevator upper-limit sensor A is paired with the upper-limit
detecting plate (card). Based on various combinations of these elements, three paper feed tray upper-
limit positions are possible, as shown in the diagram below.
Selecting <Auto> in Test Mode No. 740 (Elevator upper-limit position selection) makes it possible to
OP
adjust the paper feed tray upper-limit position using the paper feed pressure lever. Setting the paper feed
pressure lever to <Normal> sets the upper-limit position of the paper feed tray to the normal position.
Setting the paper feed pressure lever to <Card> sets the upper-limit position of the paper feed tray to the
card position. Selecting a setting other than <Auto> sets the paper feed tray at the upper-limit position of
the selected paper feed tray.
Setting the paper feed tray upper-limit position to <0> using <Manual Adjustment> in the custom paper
feed adjustment sets the upper-limit position of the paper feed tray to the normal position. Setting this to
<+1> sets the upper-limit position to the card position. Setting this to <-1> sets the upper-limit position to
the custom position.
Elevator upper-limit sensor A
Elevator upper-limit sensor B

Blocked
Open
Blocked
UR Feed tray down
Upper-limit
position
Open
OE
Custom paper Normal Card 0403
RIS
[4-4]
3. Paper Feed Tray Safety Mechanism
E
The paper feed tray upper safety switch and the paper feed tray lower safety switch ensure safety while
the paper feed tray is rising or stationary.
Lifting the paper feed cover opens the paper feed tray upper safety switch. Pressing down the lower-limit
frame opens the paper feed lower safety switch. If either of the two safety switches opens, a paper feed
tray error is detected and the elevator motor switches OFF.
OP
Paper feed tray upper safety switch
Paper feed cover
UR
OE
0404
Lower-limit frame
Paper feed tray lower safety switch
RIS
[4-5]
4. Remaining Paper Volume Detection Mechanism
E
Two sensors (remaining paper volume sensor A and remaining paper volume sensor B) detect the
volume of paper remaining in the paper feed tray when the paper feed tray is at the upper-limit position.
If the paper feed tray is not at the upper-limit position, the remaining paper volume is indicated as <Un-
known>.
OP
Remaining paper volume and remaining paper volume sensor operations
Sensor status
Volume of remaining paper
Remaining paper volume sensor A Remaining paper volume sensor B
100% to 50% OFF OFF
50% to 30% ON OFF
30% to 10% ON ON
Less than 10% OFF ON
0405
UR
OE
Remaining paper
volume sensor B
0406
Remaining paper
volume sensor A
RIS
[4-6]
5. Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Mechanism
E
The paper feed pressure lever is located on the left-hand side of the first paper feed stay assembly.
Sliding this lever L R adjusts the paper feed pressure (scraper pressure) between <Normal> (low) and
<Card> (high).
Setting the paper feed pressure lever to the right for <Card> increases paper feed pressure (scraper
pressure).
OP
The paper feed pressure sensor checks the position of the paper feed pressure lever and switches the
paper feed clutch OFF angle, switches the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid ON-OFF, and
adjusts the paper wing position.
Paper feed pressure sensor First paper feed stay assembly
UR
OE
0407
Paper feed pressure lever P.U. frame unit
(scraper located within)
RIS
[4-7]
6. Paper Feed Reverse-Rotation Prevention Mechanism
E
The high resilience of thick paper stock can produce a force that reverses the rotation of the pickup roller
if the paper feed clutch is switched OFF, even when the paper feed operation provides a certain amount
of slack. This may eliminate slack in the paper and cause a paper feed failure. To prevent reverse rotation
of the pickup roller, the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid remains ON during printing when
the paper feed pressure lever is set to <Card>, and the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention hook
OP
assembly is engaged to the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly.
Page 4-9
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly Pickup roller
Paper feed clutch
UR
0408
OE
Paper feed reverse-rotation Paper feed reverse-rotation
prevention solenoid prevention hook assembly
<< Paper feed pressure lever set to <Normal> >>

RIS
0409
<< Paper feed pressure lever set to <Card> >>
[4-8]
7. Initial Paper Feed Operation
E
At the start of a print job, the main motor switches ON and rotates the print drum via main drive gears A
and B.
The paper feed clutch gear rotates continuously when the main motor is ON.
When the print drum rotates from position-B to a certain angle (angle set by adjusting the paper feed
clutch ON angle during test mode or by the custom paper feed ON timing), the paper feed clutch switches
OP
ON, turning the scraper and pickup roller and transporting paper from the paper feed tray into the ma-
chine.
When the print drum rotates through a certain angle (angle set by adjusting the paper feed clutch OFF
angle in test mode or by the amount of slack set during custom paper feed adjustment) after the paper is
fed into the machine and the paper sensor senses light, the paper feed clutch switches OFF, and the first
paper feed operation stops.
In this process, the leading edge of the paper contacts the guide roller and timing roller. When paper
transport stops, some slack is left in the paper.
Additionally, when the print drum rotates to the paper feed jam detection angle/IN angle after the paper
feed clutch switches ON, the machine polls the paper sensor for a paper failure feed error.
Main drive gear A

Main drive gear B
UR
The scraper and pickup roller are equipped with a one-way clutch to enable free rotation and to keep the
first paper feed section from halting or slowing paper feeding after the paper is fed to the second paper
feed section.
Paper feed clutch

Pickup roller
Scraper
OE
0410
RIS
Main motor
Guide roller
Paper sensor
Pickup roller (light receiver)
Scraper
0411
Stripper pad Timing roller
Paper sensor (light emitter)
[4-9]
8. Custom Paper Feed Adjustment Function
E
To use this function, open the Function List tab on the normal master making/print screen of the operation
panel. Press the Custom Paper Feed Adjustment button to open the custom paper feed adjustment
screen.
Pressing the Manual Adjustment button on the custom paper feed adjustment screen changes the display
to the screen shown in Fig. 1. This screen enables adjustment of the paper feed tray upper-limit position
OP
and amount of paper slack.
To adjust paper feed ON timing and paper feed OFF timing (amount of slack), press the Detail button at
the lower right corner of the screen. The display changes to the screen shown in Fig. 2.
To save the adjustment values, press the Register/Recall button. In the screen shown in Fig. 3, press the
Register button, then select one of the six buttons A-1 to A-6 to save the parameters.
Saving adjustment values to any of the buttons from A-1 through A-6 makes it possible to quickly recall a
set of adjustment values. Recall settings by pressing the Recall button on the screen shown in Fig. 3 and
selecting the corresponding button.
Press the Manual Adjustment button on the custom paper feed adjustment screen and the Enter button
on the manual adjustment screen to keep the adjustment values indicated on the custom paper feed
values are altered or recalled.
UR
adjustment screen (shown in Figs. 1 and 2) active until power is switched off even if the adjustment
Setting items on screen shown in Fig. 1

<< Paper feed tray upper-limit position >>
Selects the paper feed tray stop position (paper feed position).
Adjustment range: +1 (Card position)
0 (Normal position)
–1 (Custom position)
OE
<< Amount of slack >>
Adjusts the angle at which the paper feed clutch switches OFF.
Adjustment range: –8 to +8°
<< Fig. 1 >> 0468 Adjustment steps: 2°
Setting items on screen shown in Fig. 2

<< Paper feed ON timing >>
Adjusts the angle at which the paper feed clutch switches ON.
Adjustment steps: 1°
<< Paper feed OFF timing (amount of slack) >>
RIS
Adjusts the angle at which the paper feed clutch switches OFF.
Adjustment steps: 1°
<< Fig. 2 >> 0469
<< Precautions for adjustment values >>

Altering the setting for Test Mode No. 741 (Paper-feed-
clutch ON angle) will change the reference value for paper
feed ON timing of custom paper feed adjustment. Altering
the setting for Test Mode No. 742 (Paper-feed-clutch OFF
angle) will also change the reference values for the amount
of slack and the paper feed OFF timing (amount of slack) of
custom paper feed adjustment.
<< Fig. 3 >> 0470
[4-10]
9. Paper Stripper Mechanism
E
The scraper and pickup roller rotate to transport paper from the paper feed tray to the stripper pad. The
pickup roller and the stripper pad loosen the stacked paper and transport the uppermost sheet into the
machine.
The stripper pad is pressed against the pickup roller by the stripper spring, which applies resistance to
the paper being transported to ensure only a single sheet of paper is fed at a time.
OP
Use the stripper angle adjuster and stripper pressure adjuster to adjust the stripper pad angle and strip-
per spring pressure, if necessary.
Pickup roller
Stripper pad
Stripper spring
UR Stripper angle adjuster
Stripper pressure adjuster

OE
0412
RIS
0413 0414
<< Adjustment of the stripper angle >> << Adjustment of the stripper pressure >>
[4-11]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, then switch off power.
(2) Remove the ribbon cable cover. (bind, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
OP
(3) Disconnect the ribbon cable from the connector and remove the ribbon cable holder from the paper
feed tray frame (rear).
(4) Remove the E-rings (one each) from the front and rear sides and detach the paper feed tray retain-
ing plates (one each). Dismount the paper feed tray unit.
UR
OE
0415
Paper feed tray unit
Ribbon cable cover

RIS
0416
[4-12]
Ribbon cable holder
E
OP
Ribbon cable
UR Connector
0417 0418
OE
Paper feed tray

retaining plate
RIS
Paper feed tray

retaining plate
0419 0420
Paper feed tray frame (rear)
[4-13]
2. Removing the Paper Detection Sensor, Paper Size Detection Sen-

sor, and Paper Width Potentiometer
E
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, switch off power, and dismount the paper feed
tray unit.
(2) Remove the E-rings and paper guide lock levers (on both the front and rear sides).
OP
(3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2 pcs each) and dismount the paper feed
guide (front) and the paper feed guide (rear).
UR 0421
Paper guide lock lever
E-ring
Paper feed tray table S

OE
Paper feed guide (rear) Paper feed guide (front)
RIS
Paper feed tray table L
0422
<< Paper feed tray unit >>
[4-14]
Removing the paper detection sensor

(4) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 8 pcs) and dismount paper feed tray table S.
E
(5) Unplug the connector and remove the paper detection sensor.
OP
Connector Paper detection sensor
UR 0423
OE
RIS
0424
[4-15]
(4) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 7 pcs) and dismount paper feed tray table L.
Removing the paper size detection sensor/paper width potentiometer
E
(5) Unplug the connector and remove the paper size detection sensor.
Removing the paper width potentiometer

(5) Unplug the connector and remove the mounting screws (P tight, 3 x 8, 3 pcs). Dismount the paper
width potentiometer assembly.
OP
UR
OE
0425
RIS
Paper width potentiometer

Connector for paper width assembly
potentiometer
0426
Connector for paper size detection sensor Paper size detection sensor
[4-16]

• Align the mark (projection line) on the paper guide rack with the mark (projection line) on the spur gear
when installing the paper width potentiometer assembly.
E
OP
UR 0427
Paper width potentiometer assembly
Paper guide rack

OE
Paper guide rack
0428
RIS
Spur gear
[4-17]
3. Removing the Scraper and Pickup Roller
E
Removing the scraper
(2) Remove the retaining ring from the scraper shaft and remove the bearing metal from the front side.
(3) Slide the scraper shaft toward the back, remove the bearing metal on the rear side from the P.U.
frame unit, and dismount the scraper together with the scraper shaft from the bottom side.
OP
(4) Remove the scraper from the scraper shaft.
* The only consumable part here is the paper feed roller. Remove it from the core assembly, then
replace. The paper feed roller of the pickup roller is also a consumable part.
P.U. frame unit
UR
OE
0429
Scraper Retaining ring Scraper shaft

RIS
0430
Scraper Bearing metal

Scraper shaft Retaining ring
[4-18]
Removing the pickup roller

E
(2) Remove the retaining ring from the P.U. extension shaft assembly, slide the shaft toward the front,
and remove the bearing metal from the side plate.
(3) Remove the retaining ring from the P.U. shaft.
(4) Remove the pickup roller from the P.U. shaft.
OP
P.U. extension shaft assembly
UR 0431
Retaining ring
0432
Bearing metal
OE
0433
P.U. extension shaft Bearing metal Retaining ring

RIS
P.U. shaft
0434
Pickup roller Retaining ring
[4-19]
4. Removing the Paper Feed Roller Assembly
E
(2) Remove the paper feed cover. (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs)
(3) Remove the P.U. extension shaft assembly.
(4) Remove the mounting screw (double-washer cap screw, M4 x 8, 1 pc) and dismount the paper feed
roller assembly.
OP
Paper feed cover
UR
0435
OE
P.U. extension shaft assembly
Paper feed roller assembly

RIS
0436
[4-20]
5. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Button and Paper Feed Tray Upper
Safety Switch
E
(2) Remove the following parts:
• Paper feed cover
OP
• Paper feed roller assembly
(3) Unplug the connectors (2 locations).
(4) Remove the upper safety switch spring.
(5) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 3 pcs) and dismount the first paper
feed stay assembly.
UR 0437
Upper safety switch spring

OE
0439
0438
Connectors
RIS
0440
<< First paper feed stay assembly >>
[4-21]
Removing the paper feed tray button

(6) Unplug the connector, disengage the two hooks, and dismount the paper feed tray button.
E
Removing the paper feed tray upper safety switch
(6) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 14, 2 pcs), and
dismount the paper feed tray upper safety switch.
OP
UR 0441
OE
Feed tray button
RIS
0442
Paper feed tray upper safety switch
[4-22]
6. Removing the Elevator Upper-limit Sensors and Paper Feed Pres-

sure Sensor
E
(2) Remove the paper feed cover.
(3) Remove the first paper feed stay assembly.
OP
Removing the elevator upper-limit sensors
(4) Unplug the connectors and dismount the elevator upper-limit sensors.
Removing the paper feed pressure sensor

(4) Set the paper feed pressure lever to the <Normal> position.
(5) Unplug the connector and dismount the paper feed pressure sensor.
UR
0443
OE
RIS
0445
Elevator upper-limit Elevator upper-limit

<Normal> 0444 sensor B sensor A
position
Paper feed pressure sensor

Paper feed pressure lever
[4-23]
7. Removing the Paper Feed Reverse-rotation Prevention Solenoid
E
(1) Switch off power and remove the rear cover.
(2) Open the SH PCB bracket.
(3) Remove the E-ring and dismount the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly.
(4) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and
dismount the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention assembly.
OP
(5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the paper feed
reverse-rotation prevention solenoid.
UR Paper feed reverse-rotation

prevention core assembly
OE
0446
RIS
0447
Paper feed reverse-rotation
prevention solenoid
<< Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention assembly >>
[4-24]
8. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch
E
(1) Switch off power and remove the rear cover.
(2) Open the SH PCB bracket.
(3) Remove the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention core assembly and the paper feed reverse-
rotation prevention assembly.
(4) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) and dismount the P.U. clutch
OP
bracket.
(5) Unplug the connector and dismount the paper feed clutch.
UR
OE
0448
P.U. clutch bracket

RIS
0449
<< Paper feed clutch >>
[4-25]
E
Rotation stopper on paper feed clutch
OP
0450
UR
Indentation on P.U. shaft Projection on paper feed clutch
Bent portion on P.U. clutch bracket

0451
OE
0452
RIS
[4-26]
9. Removing Remaining Paper Volume Sensors A and B
E
(1) Switch off power, remove the rear cover, and open the SH PCB bracket.
(2) Unplug the connector and dismount remaining paper volume sensors A and B from the paper feed
relay PCB bracket.
OP
UR
0453
OE
Paper feed relay PCB bracket
Remaining paper volume sensor A

RIS
Remaining paper volume sensor B
0454
[4-27]
10. Removing the Elevator Motor
E
(2) Remove the left front cover. (bind, M4 x 8, 5 pcs)
(3) Remove the elevator spring on the front side.
(4) Remove the mounting screw (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 1 pc) and disconnect the ground wire.
(5) Unplug the connector and remove the reusable band.
OP
(6) Detach the E-ring, remove the mounting screw (RS tight, M4 x 8, 1 pc), and dismount the elevator
motor unit.
* When dismounting the elevator motor unit, grasp the paper feed tray to prevent the paper feed tray
from rising abruptly.
(7) Remove the mounting screw (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc) and dismount the elevator motor
cover.
(8) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 4 pcs) and dismount the motor cover.
(9) Remove the helical/spur gears.
(10) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 2 pcs), and dismount the
elevator motor.
Elevator spring
UR 0455
Ground wire
Reusable band
OE
Elevator motor cover
Elevator motor
RIS
Elevator motor unit Motor cover
Helical/spur gears
0456
[4-28]
11. Removing the Elevator Lower-limit Sensor and Paper Feed Tray
Lower Safety Switch
E
(1) Raise the paper feed tray to the upper-limit position, then switch off power.
(2) Remove the rear cover and open the SH PCB bracket.
Removing the elevator lower-limit sensor
OP
(3) Unplug the connector and dismount the elevator lower-limit sensor.
Removing the paper feed tray lower safety switch

(3) Remove the lower safety switch spring.
mount the paper feed tray lower safety switch together with the bracket.
UR
OE
0457
Lower safety switch spring

RIS
Bracket
0458
Paper feed tray lower safety switch
[4-29]
12. Removing the Stripper Pad Unit
E
(2) Lower the lock knob and release the lock for the stripper pad unit.
(3) Press the stripper pad release lever and dismount the stripper pad unit.
OP
Lock knob
UR
OE
0459
RIS
Stripper pad unit Stripper pad release lever
[4-30]
13. Removing the Stripper Pad Assembly
E
(1) Lower the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position, switch off power, and remove the stripper pad
unit.
(2) Manually lift and remove the stripper pad assembly.
OP
• Press the edge of the stripper pad (indicated by the arrows) against the section of the stripper pad base
(indicated by the arrows) when attaching the stripper pad.
Stripper pad assembly
Stripper pad
UR
Stripper pad base
OE
0460 0461
RIS
Stripper pad cover

Stripper pad unit
Stripper pad
Stripper pad base
0463
[4-31]
Adjustment
E
1. Elevator Upper-limit Sensor Position Adjustment

(1) Remove paper from the paper feed tray and set the paper feed pressure lever to the <Normal>
OP
position.
(2) Run Test Mode No. 681 (Paper feed tray maximum up positioning) to lift the paper feed tray. Bring to
a full stop.
(3) After the paper feed tray comes to a complete stop, confirm that the gap between the pickup roller
and the paper feed tray ranges from 1.5 to 2.5 mm.
(4) If the measured value falls outside this range, adjust by inserting a flat-head screwdriver through the
opening in the paper feed cover and turning the upper-limit adjustment shaft to move the elevator
upper-limit sensor assembly vertically.
* Turning the upper-limit adjustment shaft clockwise lowers the elevator upper-limit sensor assembly and
increases the gap.
Problems
UR
Setting the elevator upper-limit sensor position too high increases paper feed pressure and may result in
multiple paper feeds.
Setting the sensor position too low can reduce paper feed pressure until paper frequently fails to feed at
all.
Upper-limit adjustment shaft Paper feed pressure lever Paper feed cover
OE
0465
RIS
Pickup roller
1.5 to 2.5 mm
0464
Elevator upper-limit sensor assembly
Paper feed tray

0466
[4-32]
2. Stripper Pad Adjustment
E
Adjustment procedure
(1) Switch the paper feed pressure lever position to suit the paper type and begin printing.
(2) If a multiple paper feed or paper feed failure occurs, adjust the stripper pad angle or stripper pad
pressure.
OP
1) When multiple paper feeds occur:
• Turn the stripper pad angle adjuster clockwise to increase the stripper pad angle (toward vertical).
• Turn the stripper pad pressure adjuster clockwise to increase stripper pad pressure.
2) When paper feed failures occur:

• Turn the stripper pad angle adjuster counterclockwise to decrease the stripper pad angle (toward
horizontal).
• Turn the stripper pad pressure adjuster counterclockwise to reduce stripper pad pressure.
UR Raises stripper pad toward vertical position.

Stripper pad angle adjuster
Normal position
OE
Increases stripper pad pressure.
Decreases stripper pad angle.
Normal position Reduces stripper pad pressure.
0467
RIS
Stripper pad pressure adjuster
[4-33]
3. Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle Adjustment
E
Checks and adjustment procedures
(1) Print and confirm that the paper feeds reliably and smoothly.
(2) If the timing is off for the first paper feed, launch test mode for the paper feed clutch ON angle adjust-
ment and adjust, based on the paper type selection setting entered by the user. (For setting proce-
dures and related information, refer to the section on test modes.)
OP
Problem
If first paper feed timing is off, paper jams or print position deviations may occur.
4.
UR
Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle Adjustment

(1) Print and confirm that printing occurs smoothly.
OE
(2) If the paper slack is excessive or inadequate and results in unsatisfactory printing results, launch test
mode for the paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment and make adjustments based on the paper
type selection setting entered by the user. (For setting procedures and related information, refer to
the section on test modes.)
Problem
If the paper slack is excessive or inadequate, paper will not transfer to the second paper feed section,
resulting in paper jams.
RIS
[4-34]
5. Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment
E
(1) Set the paper guide width to 105 mm and run Test Mode No. 1102 (Paper size VR adjustment).
(2) Set the paper guide width to 297 mm and run Test Mode No. 1103 (Paper size VR adjustment).
(3) Set the paper guide width to 105 mm, run Test Mode No. 721 (Paper width potentiometer data), and
confirm that the display indicates a value between 1020 and 1080 (1050±30).
OP
(4) While running Test Mode 721 (Paper width potentiometer data), set the paper guide width to 297 mm
and confirm that the display indicates a value between 2940 and 3000 (2970±30).
* When setting the paper guide width, slide the paper guides from the outer position toward the center.
Problem
The size of the paper in the paper feed tray is not correctly identified, resulting in reduced or increased
print areas. An excessive print area can result in ink contamination of the rollers.
UR
OE
RIS
[4-35]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[4-36]
Chapter 5 Second Paper Feed Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism ............................................................................................... 5-2
2. Guide Roller Vertical Operation Mechanism ............................................................................. 5-3
3. Vertical Print Position Control Mechanism ................................................................................ 5-4
4. Multiple Paper Feed Detection Mechanism .............................................................................. 5-5
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 5-6

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
UR
Removing the Registration Sensor (Light Receiver) ................................................................. 5-6
Removing the Guide Roller ....................................................................................................... 5-7
Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Emitter) ............................................................................. 5-8
Removing the Timing Roller ...................................................................................................... 5-9
Removing the Paper Guide Plate (Upper) .............................................................................. 5-13
Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Receiver) ......................................................................... 5-15
Removing the Paper Guide Plate Assembly ........................................................................... 5-16
Removing the Registration Sensor (Light Emitter) .................................................................. 5-18
9. Removing the Guide Roller Release Home Position Sensor .................................................. 5-19
10. Removing the Guide Roller Release Motor ............................................................................. 5-20
OE
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 5-22
1. Guide Roller Release Plate B Installation Position Adjustment ............................................... 5-22
2. Paper Feed Skew Adjustment ................................................................................................. 5-23
3. Print Start Position Adjustment ................................................................................................ 5-24
4. Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment ............................................................................ 5-24
5. Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment ............................................................................. 5-24
RIS
[5-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism
During printing, at the end of the first paper feed operation, the second paper feed motor switches ON at
the preset timing, rotating the timing roller and feeding the paper to the print drum.
OP
The registration sensor is located between the timing roller and the print drum. The registration sensor
detects the leading edge of the paper sheet and controls the second paper feed motor to ensure constant
timing of the arrival of the paper leading edge at the print drum.
The second paper feed motor rotates at the same speed as the print drum circumferential speed. When
the paper sensor switches OFF, the motor stops after rotating for a distance of 26.5 mm.
The paper sensor also checks the proper transfer of paper.
UR Guide roller
Registration sensor (receive)

OE
Paper sensor
Timing roller
Registration sensor (send)

RIS
0501
Second paper feed motor
[5-2]
2. Guide Roller Vertical Operation Mechanism

At the start of a print job, the guide roller release motor switches ON, rotating the guide roller release cam
E
to the nipping position. When the guide roller release cam rotates, the guide roller release plate assembly
at the release position is turned counterclockwise by the force of the guide roller pressure spring, press-
ing the guide roller integrated with the guide roller release plate assembly against the timing roller.
During printing, the guide roller is constantly pressed against the timing roller by the guide roller pressure
OP
spring. Thus, the guide roller rotates together with the timing roller.
When the printing operation stops, the guide roller release motor switches ON, rotating the guide roller
release cam to the release position. The guide roller release cam causes the guide roller release plate
assembly to rotate clockwise, moving the guide roller away from the timing roller.
0502 Guide roller release motor
Guide roller
UR
Guide roller release cam
Guide roller release home
position sensor
Guide roller release plate assembly

OE
Guide roller pressure spring
Timing roller
<< Guide roller in lowered position >>

RIS
<< Guide roller in raised position >> 0503
[5-3]
3. Vertical Print Position Control Mechanism
E
The second paper feed motor ON timing is used to adjust the vertical position of the first print drum in
single-color printing (with the first print drum) or in dual-color printing. The second paper feed motor ON
timing is also used to adjust the vertical position of the second print drum for single-color printing using
just the second print drum, when no first print drum is installed in the main unit.
Pressing the < > key or < > key for vertical print position adjustment changes the second feed
OP
motor ON timing, altering the timing of paper fed to the print drum and thereby changing the vertical print
position.
Dual-color printing (A) (B)
Single-color printing with

first print drum
Single-color printing with

UR (A)
(A)
second print drum
0504
OE
The vertical print position for print drum (A) is controlled by the second paper feed motor ON timing.
The vertical print position for print drum (B) depends on changes in phase relative to the first print drum.
RIS
0505
Second paper feed motor
[5-4]
4. Multiple Paper Feed Detection Mechanism
E
Multiple paper feeds are detected by the paper sensor, which assesses the intensity of light transmitted
through paper to identify multiple paper feeds.
The light intensity is sampled for a set number of times at set intervals, starting from the print drum angle
position of 2.5° from the paper leading edge, producing an average value. This average value is then
compared against the value measured with the first sheet of paper printed. If the value differs by 20% or
OP
more, a multiple paper feed is identified.
UR Paper sensor
OE
0506
RIS
[5-5]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Registration Sensor (Receive)
(1) Remove the first print drum, then switch off power.
(2) Remove the mounting screw (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc), then remove the registration sensor retaining
OP
plate.
(3) Unplug the connector and dismount the registration sensor (receive).
Registration sensor retaining plate
UR
OE
0507
Connector
RIS
0508
[5-6]
2. Removing the Guide Roller
E
(1) Remove the first print drum and switch off power.
(2) Remove the registration sensor retaining plate and move the registration sensor (receive) out of the
way.
(3) Remove the stopper plate and bearing metal on the front side, then remove the guide roller.
OP
Guide roller Registration sensor retaining plate
UR
OE
0509
Stopper plate
RIS
Bearing metal
0510
[5-7]
3. Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Emitter)
E
(1) Lower the paper feed tray and switch off power.
(2) Remove the stripper pad unit.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), then remove the stripper pad rear cover.
(4) Loosen the screws, unplug the connector, and dismount the paper sensor (light emitter) together with
the multiple paper feed sensor bracket.
OP
Stripper pad rear cover
UR 0512
0511
OE
Multiple paper feed sensor bracket

RIS
Multiple paper feed

Paper sensor (light emitter) sensor bracket
0513
Connector
0514
[5-8]
4. Removing the Timing Roller
E
(2) Remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the SH PCB bracket.
(3) Dismount the paper sensor (light emitter).
(4) Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes of the main cover, pressure cam, and
rear plate on the first print drum side.
OP
<< Important note for safe removal >>
When removing main drive gears A and B, you must perform step (4); to prevent sudden
rotation of the gears and resulting injury.
Jig Alignment hole
UR
OE
RIS
0515
[5-9]
(5) Remove the main motor bearing. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs)
(6) Remove the T-roller bearing plate. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs)
(7) Remove the power supply bracket. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 1 pc)
E
(8) Remove the main drive transmission cover. (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 5 pcs)
(9) Remove the C-ring and dismount main drive gear A.
(10) Remove the main drive transmission gear bracket with main drive gear B attached. (RS tight with
round tip, M4 x 8, 4 pcs)
OP
T-roller bearing plate
Main motor bearing

UR
OE
0516
Main drive transmission cover Power supply bracket
Main drive gear B

RIS
0517 0518
Main drive gear A C-ring Main drive transmission gear bracket
[5-10]
(11) Remove the second idler spring, loosen the two mounting screws, slide the second idler assembly,
then loosen the tension of the second paper feed drive belt and remove the second paper feed drive
belt.
E
(12) Remove the E-ring and bearing on the front side.
OP
Second paper feed
drive belt UR Second idler spring
Second idler assembly

OE
0519
RIS
0520
E-ring Bearing
[5-11]
(13) Remove the T-roller bracket mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), and pull the
timing roller toward the front through the larger end of the keyhole-shaped opening in the rear plate.
E
OP
Keyhole-shaped opening
T-roller bracket
UR 0521
OE
0522
Timing roller
RIS
0523
<< Timing roller >>
[5-12]
5. Removing the Paper Guide Plate (Upper)
E
• Guide roller
• P.U. extension shaft assembly
OP
• First paper feed stay assembly
(3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), then remove the G-roller cover.
(4) Unplug the connector.
UR
OE
0524
G-roller cover
Connector
RIS
0525
[5-13]
(5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 8, 1 each)
on the front and rear sides, and plate guide plate (upper) toward the paper feed tray side and re-
move.
E
OP
0526
UR
Mounting screw
Mounting screw
0527
OE
RIS
0528
<< Paper guide plate (upper) >>
[5-14]
6. Removing the Paper Sensor (Light Receiver)
E
(1) Remove the paper guide plate (upper).
(2) Remove the multiple feed sensor shield. (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
(3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and
dismount the paper sensor (light receiver).
OP
UR << Paper guide plate assembly >>
0529
OE
0530
Multiple feed sensor shield

RIS
0531
Paper sensor (light receiver)
[5-15]
7. Removing the Paper Guide Plate Assembly
E
• Guide roller
• P.U. extension shaft assembly
OP
• First paper feed stay assembly
• Paper feed tray unit
• Timing roller
UR
0532
OE
E-reinforcement plate
RIS
0533
Retaining screw
Retaining screw
0535
0534
[5-16]
(3) Remove the E-reinforcement plate. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs).

(4) Loosen the retaining screws (with double-washer, cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 10, 2 pcs) on
the print drum side until they extend out to about half their length.
E
(6) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs) in the paper feed tray side and dismount the
paper guide plate assembly.
OP
Connectors
UR 0536
OE
RIS
0537
Paper guide plate assembly
[5-17]
8. Removing the Registration Sensor (Send)
E
(1) Remove the paper guide plate assembly.
(2) Remove the mounting screw (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc), then remove the registration sensor retaining
plate.
(3) Unplug the connector and dismount the registration sensor (send).
OP
UR 0538
Registration sensor retaining plate

OE
0539
RIS
Registration sensor (send)
0540
Connector
[5-18]
9. Removing the Guide Roller Release Home Position Sensor
E
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left), and open the SH PCB bracket.
(2) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and
dismount the guide roller release home position sensor together with the bracket.
OP
Connector Guide roller release home position sensor
UR
0541
OE
Bracket
RIS
0542
[5-19]
10. Removing the Guide Roller Release Motor
E
(2) Remove the guide roller pressure spring.
(3) Unplug the connector at the upper right corner.
(4) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs), then remove the guide roller
release cover.
OP
Connector
UR
0544
OE
Guide roller release cover
0543
RIS
0545
Guide roller pressure spring
[5-20]
(5) Remove the guide roller release cam.

(6) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and dismount the guide roller release unit.
(7) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and dismount the
E
guide roller release motor.
OP
UR 0546
OE
Guide roller release cam
Connector
Guide roller release motor

RIS
0547
<< Guide roller release unit >>
[5-21]
Adjustment
E
1. Guide Roller Release Plate B Installation Position Adjustment

OP
(2) Run Test Mode No. 702 (Guide Roller Release Motor) and shift the phase of the guide roller release
cam. Switch off power.
(3) Remove the guide roller release cover and dismount the guide roller release cam.
(4) Install the guide roller release cam by positioning the alignment mark (3-mm-diameter boss on the
rib) on the guide roller release cam toward the cut-out section (this mark is located at 9 o’clock) on
the leading edge of the guide roller release base plate.
(5) Confirm that the gap between the guide roller release plate B and the guide roller release cam is 2±1
mm.
(6) If the gap fails to meet this standard, loosen the two mounting screws on the guide roller release
plate B and make the appropriate adjustments.
Guide roller release base plate

UR
OE
Alignment mark (3-mm-
diameter boss) located at
9 o’clock
2 mm ± 1 mm
0548
RIS
Guide roller release cam Guide roller release plate B
Problems
• If the gap is excessive, you may not be able to remove the jammed paper in the event of a paper jam.
• If the gap is too narrow, paper feed failure or print registration problem may occur.
[5-22]
2. Paper Feed Skew Adjustment
E
(1) Load A3-size paper in the paper feed tray, run Test Mode No. 81 (Test Print B (Crossed Lines)), and
print.
(2) Measure the distance from the left edge of the paper to the intersection of the leftmost vertical and
topmost horizontal lines. (A in the diagram below)
OP
(3) Measure the distance from the left edge of the paper to the intersection of the leftmost vertical and
bottommost horizontal lines. (B in the diagram below)
(4) Measure the distance between the intersections described in the above steps (2) and (3) (C in the
diagram below).
(5) Confirm that (A - B)/C x 100 is less than 0.5%.
(6) If the skew exceeds this standard value, move the timing roller adjusting plate and guide roller
adjusting plate on the front side in the same direction and by the same amount.
* Moving the adjusting plates one increment mark on the scale will change the paper skew by 0.25%.
Moving the plates toward the stamped F mark will shift the bottom of the printed image on the sheet to
the front side while moving the plates toward the R mark will shift the bottom of the printed image to the
rear.
A
UR
Top of the printed image
OE
C
RIS
0549
B Bottom of the printed image
[5-23]
3. Print Start Position Adjustment
E
(1) Run Test Mode No. 80 (Test Print A (Checkered)).
(2) Measure the distance from the leading edge of the paper to the top of the printed image and confirm
that the measured value is 4±1 mm.
(3) If the measurement falls outside the standard range, run Test Mode No. 971 (Vertical HP Paper Feed
OP
Timing Adj) and make necessary adjustments.
* When checking the second print drum side, be sure to remove the first print drum.
* Increasing the setting will move the printed image toward the top. Setting increments: 1 (0.1 mm)
Checks and adjustment procedures for second print drum relative to first print drum
position
(1) Run Test Mode No. 80 (Test Print A (Checkered), then perform printing by both the print drums
(Speed 3).
(2) On the fifth sheet printed by the second print drum, confirm that the position of the first line at the
paper leading edge does not deviate more than 2 mm from the line on the printed image made with
4.
the first print drum.
UR
(3) If the measurement falls outside the standard range, run Test Mode No. 969 (Vertical Print HP
Position Adj) and make necessary adjustments.
* Increasing the setting moves the printed image toward the top. Setting increments: 1 (0.1 mm)
Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment
(1) Pull out the first print drum.

(2) Manually feed thin RISO paper into the multiple paper feed sensor light path.
OE
(3) Run Test Mode No. 705 (Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment).
(4) Start Test Mode No. 722 (Multiple Paper Feed Sensor) and confirm that the panel displays a value
between 484 and 508 (496±12).
5. Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment
(1) Pull out the first print drum.

(2) Manually feed thin RISO paper into the registration sensor light path.
(3) Run Test Mode No. 709 (Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment).
RIS
[5-24]
Chapter 6 Pressure Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 6-2
1. Pressure Mechanism ................................................................................................................ 6-2
2. Pressure Control Mechanism .................................................................................................... 6-4
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 6-5

1. Removing the Pressure Roller .................................................................................................. 6-6
2.
3.
4.
5.
UR
Removing the Print Pressure Control Sensor ........................................................................... 6-7
Removing the Pressure Control Pulse Motor ............................................................................ 6-8
Removing the Pressure Solenoid ............................................................................................ 6-10
Removing the Pressure Lever ................................................................................................ 6-11
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 6-12

1. Pressure Lever Assembly Installation Position Adjustment ..................................................... 6-12
OE
RIS
[6-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Pressure Mechanism
The main motor switches ON at the start of a print job, and the pressure solenoid switches ON when the
print drum rotates to a specified angle.
OP
When the clamp plate base of the print drum approaches the pressure roller, the lobe of the pressure
cam pushes the pressure cam follower assembly and turns it clockwise. This rotation causes the pres-
sure cam follower assembly to push against the pressure lever assembly, causing the solenoid lever to
disengage from the pressure lever assembly and descend.
When the lobe of the pressure cam passes, the pressure cam follower assembly rotates counterclock-
wise. Because the pressure lever assembly is pulled by the pressure spring and rotates together with the
pressure cam follower assembly, the pressure shaft installed in the pressure lever assembly also rotates
counterclockwise. As a result, the pressure roller rises and presses against the print drum.
During printing, the pressure cam pushes the pressure cam follower assembly to lower the pressure
roller, keeping the pressure roller from contacting the print drum clamp plate base. The pressure solenoid
remains ON.
UR
After printing ends, the pressure solenoid turns OFF when the print drum reaches a specified angle.
Pressure cam
Clamp plate base Print drum
OE
Pressure lever assembly
Pressure cam follower

assembly
Pressure roller
Pressure spring
RIS
Pressure shaft
Solenoid lever
Pressure solenoid 0601
[6-2]
Pressure roller in raised position
E
Print drum
Pressure cam
OP
UR
Pressure shaft Pressure cam follower
assembly
Pressure roller
0602
OE
Pressure roller in lowered position
Print drum
RIS
Clamp plate base
0603
[6-3]
2. Pressure Control Mechanism
E
Pressing the < > or < > key for print density switches ON the pressure control pulse motor and
moves the pressure control plate. The movement of the pressure control plate varies the tension of the
pressure spring. Since this changes the force applied to the pressure lever assembly, the force of the
pressure roller applied to the print drum also changes, altering print density. However, during actual
operations, the pressure control pulse motor switches ON only after the Start key is pressed.
OP
Pressure also varies with printing speed and print density settings, ink color, time since the print drums
last operated, and the print drum internal temperature.
The print pressure control sensor checks the standard pressure control position.
Pressure spring Pressure lever assembly
UR
OE
RIS
0604
Pressure control plate Print pressure control sensor Pressure control pulse motor
[6-4]
Disassembly
E
OP
PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN
DRIVE SECTION AND PRESSURE SECTION
Following removal of the main cover, the pressure springs must

be removed before disassembly of the main drive or pressure
sections. Failure to remove the pressure springs may result in
UR
sudden rotation of gears or cams from the force of the springs,
resulting in injury.
To prevent accidents, always remove the pressure springs (on
both first print drum side and second print drum side) at the start
of disassembly. Reattach the pressure springs (first print drum
side and second print drum side) only at the end of reassembly.
OE
RIS
[6-5]
1. Removing the Pressure Roller
E
(1) Pull out the print drums and switch off power.
(2) Insert a screwdriver into the hole in the horizontal sliding unit and side plate on the front side and
remove the shoulder screw.
(3) Pull the pressure roller forward until the pressure roller bearing disengages from the roller adjust-
ment plate, then lift and remove the roller.
OP
Shoulder screw Pressure roller Bearing Roller adjustment plate
UR
OE
0605
RIS
Hole in the horizontal sliding unit and side plate
[6-6]
2. Removing the Print Pressure Control Sensor
E
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right), and open the power supply/
system PCB bracket.
mount the print pressure control sensor together with the bracket.
OP
UR
OE
0606
Print pressure control sensor

RIS
0607
[6-7]
3. Removing the Pressure Control Pulse Motor
E
(1) Remove the pressure springs.
* Refer to <1. Removing Pressure Springs> in <Chapter 3 Main Drive Section>.
(2) Launch test mode.
<< For first print drum side >>
OP
(3) Run Test Mode No. 904 (Print-pressure home positioning) for the first print drum side and switch off
power.
<< For second print drum side >>

(3) Run Test Mode No. 904 (Print-pressure home positioning) for the second print drum side and switch
off power.
<< Common procedure >>

(4) Unplug the connector for the print pressure control sensor and the connector for the pressure control
pulse motor.
(5) Unplug the connectors from both sides of the relay connector mounted on the panel and remove the
reusable band.
control unit.
UR
(6) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and dismount the pressure
(7) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the pressure
control pulse motor.
Pressure spring
OE
RIS
0608
[6-8]
Pressure control unit Reusable band Relay connector
E
OP
UR 0609
Connector for pressure control pulse motor
Connector for Print pressure control sensor

OE
Pressure control pulse motor
RIS
0610
<< Pressure control unit >>
[6-9]
4. Removing the Pressure Solenoid
E
(1) Remove the pressure springs.
* Refer to <1. Removing Pressure Springs> in <Chapter 3 Main Drive Section>.
(2) Remove the separation spring.
(3) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and
dismount the pressure solenoid assembly.
OP
(4) Remove the solenoid spring.
(5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the pressure
solenoid.
Separation spring
UR
OE
0612
Connector
0611
<< Pressure solenoid assembly >>

RIS
0613
Pressure solenoid Solenoid spring
[6-10]
5. Removing the Pressure Lever
E
(1) Remove the pressure springs. (Refer to the section on the main drive section.)
(2) Move the print drum on the side where the pressure lever is to be removed to position-B.
(3) Remove the main cover. (Refer to the section on the main drive section.)
(4) Loosen the mounting screws (cap screw, M6 x 10, 2 pcs) and dismount the pressure lever assembly.
(5) Remove the pressure lever spring and dismount the pressure cam follower assembly.
OP
• Be sure to adjust the pressure lever installation position.
UR
OE
RIS
0614
Pressure lever spring Pressure cam follower assembly
[6-11]
Adjustment
E
1. Pressure Lever Assembly Installation Position Adjustment

(1) Remove the main cover assembly. (Refer to the section on the main drive section.)
OP
(2) Hook the pressure spring onto the pressure lever assembly.
(3) Release the solenoid lever lock and allow the pressure roller to contact the print drum under the
force applied by the pressure spring.
(4) With the bearing of the pressure lever assembly resting on the low section on the pressure cam,
confirm that the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is located between the two stamped
lines on the pressure cam follower assembly.
Pressure cam
Pressure lever assembly Pressure cam follower assembly Bearing
UR
OE
RIS
0615
Pressure spring Solenoid lever

Pressure cam follower
assembly
0616
[6-12]
(5) If the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is not at the position specified in step (4), disen-
gage the pressure spring and loosen the two cap screws on the pressure lever assembly.
(6) Align the positioning hole on the pressure lever assembly with the positioning hole on the sub-frame
E
and insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the holes.
(7) Insert the 4-mm-diameter jig or 4-mm hex wrench into the hole in the pressure shaft and turn in the
direction indicated by the arrow. With the pressure roller lightly contacting the print drum, tighten the
two cap screws on the pressure lever assembly.
OP
(8) Perform the checks described in steps (2) through (4). If the criteria are not met, repeat steps (5)
through (7).
8-mm-diameter jig Pressure lever assembly
UR
OE
0617
RIS
4-mm-jig or 4-mm hex wrench Pressure shaft
Problems
• If the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is shifted to the left, pressure will weaken, potentially
resulting in low print density. Since this shift also causes the timing of the pressure roller vertical move-
ment to deviate, ink leaks may occur.
• If the stamped line on the pressure lever assembly is shifted to the right, the amount of movement of
the pressure roller from the clamp plate base will drop. This may cause the pressure roller to contact
and damage the clamp plate base. Since this shift also causes the timing of the pressure roller vertical
movement to deviate, ink leaks may occur.
[6-13]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[6-14]
Chapter 7 Center Transport Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
1. Copy Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side) ...................... 7-2
2. Separator Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side) ........................................... 7-3
3. Center Transport Mechanism .................................................................................................... 7-4
4. Central Flap Mechanism ........................................................................................................... 7-5
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 7-6

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
UR
Removing the Central Transport Unit ........................................................................................ 7-6
Removing the Central Suction Fan ........................................................................................... 7-8
Removing the Central Flap Motor Assembly ............................................................................. 7-9
Removing the Central Transport Sensor ................................................................................. 7-10
Removing the Central Transfer Belts ...................................................................................... 7-11
Removing the First Separation Fans ....................................................................................... 7-13
Removing the Separator (Same for First and Second Print Drum Sides) ............................... 7-14
Removing the First Separator Lever ....................................................................................... 7-15
9. Removing the First Separation Pump Assembly ..................................................................... 7-16
10. Removing the Separation Pump Solenoid .............................................................................. 7-18
OE
11. Removing the Separator Pump O-ring, Piston, and Cylinder .................................................. 7-19
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 7-22

1. Separator Position Adjustment ................................................................................................ 7-22
RIS
[7-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Copy Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print
Drum Side)
OP
When the first print drum is used for printing, the first separation pump solenoid switches ON at the start
of a print job and closes the pressure control valve to allow air to escape from the separator. The first
separation fan also switches ON. The first separation pump solenoid and the first separation fan remain
ON during printing, switching OFF when the print job is completed.
The printed paper is separated from the print drum by the separator. Air is ejected from the separator
directed from the separation fan through the duct and out from the nozzle.
Duct
UR
0701
OE
Separator
First separation pump

solenoid
RIS
Pressure control valve
First separation fan
[7-2]
2. Separator Mechanism (Same as on the Second Print Drum Side)
E
When paper is separated from the print drum, the separator is positioned close to the print drum. How-
ever, as the print drum rotates and the clamp plate base of the print drum approaches the separator, the
cam on the back side of the drive gear pushes the separator lever assembly, turning the separation shaft
and moving the separator away from the print drum.
Pulling out the print drum causes the release arm attached to the slide rail to push the release lever,
OP
turning the separation shaft and moving the separator away from the print drum.
Drive gear
Separator rises.
UR
Separator lever
assembly
Separator lowers.
Separator
OE
0702 0703
Print drum
Slide rail
Release arm
RIS
Release lever
Separation shaft
Separator
0704
[7-3]
3. Center Transport Mechanism
E
Copy paper separated from the first print drum by the separator and the separation fan is sent to the
second print drum by the rotating central transfer belts when printing is to be performed by the second
print drum (in which case the central flap is raised). If no printing is performed by the second print drum,
the paper is sent to the paper ejection section.
While the main motor operates, the central transfer belts rotate continuously.
OP
The central suction fan is located under the central transfer belts and helps the paper adhere to the
central transfer belts.
The central transport sensor confirms proper paper transport.
Central transport sensor
Separator
Copy paper transport direction
UR
OE
Central flap
Central transfer belt
Central suction fan 0705

RIS
Separation fan
[7-4]
4. Central Flap Mechanism
E
The central flap rises when the second print drum prints. If the second print drum is not used, the central
flap descends.
<< Central flap rising operation >>

The central flap motor switches ON and rotates the main cam gear.
OP
The cam on the main cam gear rotates the flap lever toward the front side.
The flap lever slides the flap rack toward the front side.
The two flap cam gears engaging with the flap rack rotate and lift the central flap.
The central flap motor stops when the central flap home position sensor changes from ON to OFF.
<< Central flap lowering operation >>

The central flap motor switches ON and rotates the main cam gear.
At the low section of the main cam gear, the flap lever is turned toward the rear side by the force of the
flap spring.
The flap lever slides the flap rack toward the rear side.
UR
The two flap cam gears engaging with the flap rack rotate and lower the central flap.
The central flap motor stops when the central flap home position sensor switches from OFF to ON.
OE
RIS
[7-5]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Central Transport Unit
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums and switch off power.
(2) Remove the pressure roller from the second print drum side.
OP
(3) Remove the two mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and detach the suction plate (center).
(4) Push the coupling of the main unit side toward the back until it clicks and locks into position and the
connection disengages.
Suction plate (center)
UR
OE
0706
RIS
Coupling
0707
0708
[7-6]
(5) Unplug the connector and remove the reusable band.

(6) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 8, 2 pcs)
and dismount the central transport unit from the second drum side next to the side plate by lifting it at
E
an angle toward the paper ejection side.
OP
Central transport unit
Reusable band Connector
UR 0709
OE
0710

• Push the central transport unit toward the rear side to install.
• Pull the connection release lever toward the front to unlock the coupling of the main unit side, then
connect the coupling of the main unit side to the coupling of the central transport unit.
• Press the suction plate (center) against the central transport plate to attach.
RIS
Coupling of main unit side
Coupling of central transport unit
Connection release lever
0711
[7-7]
2. Removing the Central Suction Fan
E
(1) Pull out both the first and second print drums, switch off power, and remove the central transport unit.
dismount the central suction fan.
OP
Central suction fan
UR
OE
0712
RIS
0713
<< Central transport unit >>
[7-8]
3. Removing the Central Flap Motor Assembly
E
(2) Dismount the central suction fan.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), unplug the connector for the
central flap motor and the connector for the central flap home position sensor, remove the reusable
band, and dismount the central flap motor assembly.
OP
• After installing the central flap motor assembly, confirm that the central flap is not in a raised position.
Connector for central flap motor Connector for central flap home position sensor
Reusable band Reusable band
UR
OE
0714
Central flap home position sensor
Central flap motor

RIS
0715
<< Central flap motor assembly >>
[7-9]
4. Removing the Central Transport Sensor
E
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 8, 2 pcs) and slide the central transport plate toward the
rear side to remove.
(3) Remove the mounting screw (bind, M3 x 8, 1 pc), unplug the connector, and dismount the central
transport sensor.
OP
UR 0716
OE
Central transport plate << Central transport unit >>
RIS
Connector Central transport sensor
0717
0718
[7-10]
5. Removing the Central Transfer Belts
E
(2) Remove the central transport plate.
(3) Remove the shoulder screws (one each) from the front and rear sides and dismount the central flap.
OP
UR Central flap
OE
0719
RIS
0720
Shoulder screw
[7-11]
(4) Disengage the driven shaft assembly from the hook section of the transport base and remove.
(5) Remove the stopper plate and bearing from the front side of the drive shaft assembly, slide the drive
shaft assembly toward the rear side, and remove the central transfer belts.
E
OP
UR
Driven shaft assembly Transport base
0721
OE
Bearing
Stopper plate
Central transfer belt Drive shaft assembly

0722
RIS
0723
[7-12]
6. Removing the First Separation Fans
E
(2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 40, 3 pcs each), unplug the connector, and
dismount the two first separation fans.
* Remove the rear-side separation fan together with the fan cover.
OP
UR
OE
0724

RIS

• When installing the separation fans, insert the air outlet for each separation fan into the opening of the
duct assembly before securing the fan into position.
[7-13]
7. Removing the Separator (Same for First and Second Print Drum
Sides)
E
(1) Pull out the print drum on the side from which the separator is to be removed. Switch off power.
(2) Move the power band out of the way and disconnect the air hose from the separator.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer cross-recessed hexagon head, M3 x 8, 2 pcs)
OP
and dismount the separator.
Separator Air hose
UR
OE
0725
RIS
Power band

• Install the power band so that the grips are positioned on the front side and angled upward, as shown
in the photo.
[7-14]
8. Removing the First Separator Lever
E
(1) Remove the vertical print position main unit. (See the section on the main drive unit.)
(2) Remove the mounting screw (double-washer cap screw, M3 x 10, 1 pc), and dismount the separator
lever.
OP
Separator lever
UR
OE
0726
RIS
[7-15]
9. Removing the First Separation Pump Assembly
E
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right), and open the power supply/
system PCB bracket and the SH PCB bracket.
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), and move
the power band out of the way. Disconnect the air hose from the cylinder and dismount the first
separation pump assembly.
OP
UR 0727
OE
Connector
Air hose
RIS
0728
Cylinder Power band
[7-16]

Be sure to align phases between the first print drum drive gear and the separation pump gear.
(1) Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes in the main cover, first pressure cam,
E
and side plate.
(2) Make sure that the hole in the timing plate with the <1> mark is positioned at the location shown in
the photo and that the 4-mm-diameter jig can be inserted through the hole in the main cover into the
phase alignment holes of the timing plate and pump base when engaging the gear teeth during
OP
installation.
First print drum drive gear Side plate Pump base Timing plate Separation pump gear
UR
OE
0729
RIS
Main cover 8-mm-diameter jig Phase alignment hole 4-mm-diameter jig Phase alignment hole
[7-17]
10. Removing the Separation Pump Solenoid
E
(1) Remove the separation pump assembly.
(2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) and dismount the separation
pump solenoid.
OP
Separation pump solenoid
UR
OE
0730
<< Separation pump assembly >>

RIS
[7-18]
11. Removing the Separator Pump O-ring, Piston, and Cylinder
E
(1) Remove the separation pump assembly.
(2) Remove the E-ring and pull out the arm from the shaft in the timing plate assembly.
(3) Turn the piston assembly 90°, pull out to a location near the cylinder opening, and move the arm out
of the way.
(4) Remove the E-ring and dismount the separation pump gear assembly.
OP
(5) Pull the piston assembly from the cylinder.
Shaft in timing plate assembly
UR
OE
0731
E-ring Arm Cylinder

RIS
0732
Concave side of rib on arm << Piston assembly >>

• When installing the piston assembly into the cylinder, make sure that the concave side of the rib on the
arm is positioned toward the front side.
[7-19]
Removing the O-ring

(6) Remove the O-ring from the piston assembly. Piston assembly
E
OP
O-ring
0733
Removing the piston
UR
(6) Detach the E-ring, pull out the arm shaft and remove the piston.
Piston
OE
Arm
Arm shaft 0734

• Apply grease during installation.
• Make sure that the concave side (side on which bearing metal and bearing are installed) of the rib on
the arm faces the suction hole side of the piston.
RIS
Concave side of rib on arm
Suction hole in piston
0735
Piston Arm
[7-20]
Removing the cylinder

(6) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 4 pcs) and dismount the cylinder.
* Since the control valve and spring come loose at the same time, be careful to avoid losing them.
E
OP
UR
0736
OE
Cylinder
RIS
0737
Control valve Spring
[7-21]
Adjustment
E
1. Separator Position Adjustment
* To adjust the separator on the first print drum side, first pull out the second print drum first.
* Set the separator to position B for checks and adjustments.
OP
(1) Pull the print drum from the side to be checked and adjusted, remove the front frame cover, and
reinstall the print drum in the main unit. Switch off power.
(2) Look through the hole in the print drum front frame and confirm that the gap between the print drum
and the separator tip is 1 mm ± 0.5 mm.
(3) If the gap deviates from the standard value, remove the mounting screw (bind, M4 x 8, 1 pc), detach
the cover (separator adjustment) from the side to be adjusted, and loosen the stopper retaining
screw.
(4) While looking through the hole in the print drum front frame, adjust the gap between the print drum
and the separator tip to the standard value, then tighten the stopper retaining screw.
UR Print drum
Separator
OE
0738
Cover (separation adjustment)

RIS
0739
[7-22]
E
OP
UR 0740
Stopper
OE
RIS
0741
Problems
• Contact between the tip of the separator and the print drum surface will scratch the surface of the
master, resulting in a black streak at the center of printed pages.
• If the tip of the separator is too far from the print drum surface, the separator will fail to separate the
paper from the print drum, resulting in paper jams on the print drum.
[7-23]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[7-24]
Chapter 8 Paper Ejection Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 8-2
1. Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side) .................................... 8-2
2. Separator Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side) ................................................ 8-3
3. Paper Transport Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 8-4
4. Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism .............................................................................................. 8-5
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 8-7

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
UR
Removing the Paper Receiving Tray ......................................................................................... 8-7
Removing the Suction Unit ........................................................................................................ 8-8
Removing the Second Separation Fans ................................................................................... 8-9
Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Paper Ejection Motor FG Sensor ............................ 8-10
Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Home Position Sensor .................................................... 8-12
Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor .................................................................... 8-13
Removing the Paper Ejection Sensor and Transfer Belts ....................................................... 8-14
Removing the Second Separation Pump Assembly ................................................................ 8-17
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 8-19

OE
1. Adjusting the Suction Plate (Paper Ejection)........................................................................... 8-19
RIS
[8-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Paper Separation Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum
Side)
OP
When the second print drum is used for printing, the second separation pump solenoid switches ON at
the start of a print job and closes the pressure control valve to allow air to escape from the separator. The
second separation fan also switches ON. The second separation pump solenoid and the second separa-
tion fan remain ON during printing, turning OFF when the print job is completed.
The printed paper is separated from the print drum by the separator. Air is ejected from the separator
directed from the separation fan through the duct and out from the nozzle.
UR
Pressure control valve
Separator
OE
Second separation pump solenoid

0801
RIS
Second separation fan

Duct
[8-2]
2. Separator Mechanism (Same as on the First Print Drum Side)
E
When paper is separated from the print drum, the separator is positioned close to the print drum. How-
ever, as the print drum rotates and the clamp plate base of the print drum approaches the separator, the
cam on the back side of the drive gear pushes the separator lever assembly, turning the separation shaft
and moving the separator away from the print drum.
Pulling out the print drum causes the release arm attached to the slide rail to push the release lever,
OP
turning the separation shaft and moving the separator away from the print drum.
Drive gear
Separator rises.
UR
Separator lever
assembly
Separator lowers.
Separator
OE
0802 0803
Print drum
Slide rail
Release arm
RIS
Release lever
Separation shaft
Separator
0804
[8-3]
3. Paper Transport Mechanism
E
Paper separated from the print drum by the separator and the separation fan is transported to the paper
receiving tray by the rotation of the transfer belts.
The transfer belts rotate when the paper ejection motor switches ON.
The suction fan located under the transfer belts helps the paper adhere to the transfer belts. The paper
ejection sensor confirms proper paper transport.
OP
The paper ejection motor FG sensor and the encoder sensor disc check the paper ejection motor speed
to ensure that the transfer belt speed exceeds the peripheral speed of the print drum at each drum
rotation speed. This ensures smooth ejection of paper from the print drum.
Paper ejection sensor

Copy paper transport direction
Separator
UR
OE
Paper ejection
motor
Encoder
sensor disc
Transfer belt 0805

RIS
Suction fan Separation fan Paper ejection motor FG sensor
[8-4]
4. Paper Ejection Wing Mechanism
E
The paper ejection wings on the left and right sides of the paper ejection unit are set to the positions
appropriate for the type of copy paper used.
The paper ejection wing position settings are set by the rotation of the MW cam and SW cam driven by
the paper ejection wind pulse motor.
The MW cam moves the connection plate (M) along the vertical axis, lifting or lowering the M wings on
OP
the left and right sides.
The SW cam moves the connection plate (S) along the vertical axis, lifting or lowering the S wings on the
left and right sides.
The paper ejection wing home position sensor checks the home positions of the paper ejection wings.
There are four paper ejection wing positions ((1) to (4)). The correct position is set according to paper
size (paper width only) and the paper feed pressure lever (normal/card) setting. The position setting is not
affected by the custom paper setting or other settings.
M wing
UR
S wing S wing M wing
OE
MW cam SW cam
RIS
0806
Paper ejection wing pulse-motor
Connection plate (M) Connection plate (S) Paper ejection wing home position sensor
[8-5]
Paper ejection wing position setting

(1) The M wings and the belt roller are in their raised positions, while the S wings are in their lowered
positions. This position setting is for normal paper with paper widths of B4 or larger.
E
The paper feed pressure lever is at the <Normal> position, and the paper width potentiometer
detects a width of B4 or larger (equivalent to 1434 pulses).
OP
0807
M wing Belt roller
UR
(2) The M wings and the belt roller are in their lowered positions, while the S wings are in their raised
positions. This position setting is for normal paper with paper widths of B4 or smaller.
The paper feed pressure lever is at the <Normal> position, and the paper width potentiometer
detects paper widths of B4 or smaller (equivalent to 717 pulses).
OE
0808
S wing
(3) The M wings, the belt roller, and the S wings are in their lowered positions. This position setting is
suitable for card stock of all paper sizes.
The paper feed pressure lever is at the <CARD> position. The paper width potentiometer detection
has no effect (home position: equivalent to 0 pulse).
RIS
0809
(4) Test Mode No. 780 (Paper Ejection Wing Target Position) is used by a service engineer to set the
position for custom paper.
If the setting is changed from the default value, the operation panel displays <Custom paper ejection
wing position>. This position can be selected by users.
[8-6]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray
(1) Open the paper receiving tray to an angle of 45°, then lift from that position to remove.
OP
Paper receiving tray
UR
OE
0810
RIS
[8-7]
2. Removing the Suction Unit
E
(1) Switch off power and remove the paper receiving tray.
(2) Remove the paper ejection cover. (bind, M4 x 8, 4 pcs)
(3) Unplug the connectors (2 locations), remove the mounting screws (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8, 2
pcs), and lift the suction unit and pull forward to remove it.
OP
UR
0811
OE
Paper ejection cover
Suction unit Connector Connector

RIS
0812
[8-8]
3. Removing the Second Separation Fans
E
(1) Switch off power and remove the following parts:
• Paper receiving tray
• Paper ejection cover
• Suction unit
(2) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 40, 3 pcs each), unplug the connector, and
OP
remove the two second separation fans.
* Remove the rear-side separation fan together with the fan cover.
Connector
UR
0813
OE
RIS
0814
Second separation fan Second separation fan
Fan cover

• When installing the separation fans, insert the air outlet for each separation fan into the opening of the
duct assembly before fastening the fan.
[8-9]
4. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Paper Ejection Motor FG

Sensor
E
OP
• Suction unit
(3) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), detach the timing belt, and
dismount the paper ejection motor assembly.
Paper ejection motor FG sensor Paper ejection motor Timing belt
UR
OE
0815
Connector Connector
RIS
0816
<< Back side of suction unit >>
[8-10]
(4) Remove the E-ring and detach the spur gear.

(5) Remove the mounting screws (with washer, M3 x 5, 2 pcs)and dismount the paper ejection motor.
(6) Remove the paper ejection motor FG sensor from the sheet metal.
E
Paper ejection motor
OP
Spur gear
E-ring
UR 0817
<< Paper ejection motor assembly >>

OE
Paper ejection motor FG sensor

• When installing the paper ejection motor assembly, install and loosely tighten the mounting screws first,
then move the paper ejection motor assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow until appropriate
tension is applied to the timing belt. Only then should you firmly tighten the mounting screws to secure
the paper ejection motor assembly in position.
RIS
0818
[8-11]
5. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Home Position Sensor
E
• Suction unit
(2) Cut the cable tie, unplug the connector, and remove the paper ejection wing home position sensor.
OP
UR 0819
OE
Cable tie
RIS
0820
Connector Paper ejection wing home position sensor

• Bundle the wires with a cable tie during the installation.
[8-12]
6. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor
E
• Suction unit
OP
(2) Remove the connection plate (M) and connection plate (S). (P tight, 3 x 8, 2 pcs each)
(3) Remove one mounting screw (RS tight with round tip, M4 x 8) from the paper ejection wing pulse
motor side.
(4) Detach the E-ring from the sensor side of the W cam shaft and remove by sliding toward the sensor
side along the shaft.
dismount the paper ejection wing pulse motor.
UR
OE
0821
Connection plate M Connection plate S
W cam shaft
RIS
E-ring
0822
Paper ejection wing pulse motor Connector
[8-13]
7. Removing the Paper Ejection Sensor and Transfer Belts
E
• Suction unit
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and detach the suction plate (paper ejection).
OP
(3) Disengage and remove the driven shaft assembly from the hook section of the transport base.
UR
OE
0823
Suction plate (paper ejection)

RIS
0824
Driven shaft assembly Transport base
[8-14]
(4) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs), then remove the suction plate by pulling it
through the transfer belts.
E
Suction plate Transfer belt
OP
Removing the paper ejection sensor
UR 0825
(5) Remove the mounting screw (bind, M3 x 6, 1 pc), unplug the connector, and dismount the paper
OE
ejection sensor.
Connector Paper ejection sensor

RIS
0826
0827
[8-15]
Removing the transfer belts

(5) Remove the E-ring and bearing from the front side.
(6) Slightly move the drive shaft assembly, detach the rear-side bearing from the transport base, and
E
remove the transfer belts from the front side of the drive shaft assembly.
E-ring Bearing
OP
Drive shaft assembly Transfer belts Transport base Bearing

UR 0828 0829
• When installing the drive shaft assembly, confirm that the timing belt is installed correctly.
• When installing the suction plate, confirm that the transfer belts are positioned correctly and that they
OE
are not caught by other parts.
• Align the edge surface of the suction plate (paper ejection) with the longest stamped line on the trans-
port plate on both front and rear sides.
Transport plate
RIS
Suction plate
(paper ejection)
0830
[8-16]
8. Removing the Second Separation Pump Assembly
E
(1) Switch off power, remove the cover (rear left) and the cover (rear right) and open the power supply/
system PCB bracket and the SH PCB bracket.
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), and move
the power band out of the way. Disconnect the air hose from the cylinder and dismount the second
separation pump assembly.
OP
UR 0831
OE
Power band Cylinder Connector
Air hose
RIS
0832
[8-17]

Be sure to align phases between the second print drum drive gear and the separation pump gear.
(1) Insert the 8-mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment holes in the main cover, second pressure
E
cam, and side plate.
(2) During installation, make sure that the hole in the timing plate with the <2> mark is positioned at the
location shown in the photo. Also confirm that the 4-mm-diameter jig can be inserted through the
hole in the main cover into the phase alignment holes in the timing plate and pump base when
OP
engaging the gear teeth.
Separation pump gear Phase alignment hole
Timing plate 4-mm-diameter jig Pump base
Second print drum

drive gear
Side plate
UR
Main cover
OE
Phase
alignment hole
8-mm-diameter jig
RIS
0833
* The second separation pump assembly and the first separation pump assembly are similar. For subse-
quent disassembly procedures, refer to the section on the center transport section.
[8-18]
Adjustment
E
1. Adjusting the Suction Plate (Paper Ejection)

<< When the roller adjusting plate on the front side is adjusted >>
OP
(1) Loosen the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) on the suction plate (paper ejection).
(2) In accordance with the adjustment value of the roller adjusting plate, align the front side of the
suction plate (paper ejection) with the line stamped on the front side of the transport plate toward the
paper feed side. Also confirm that the rear side aligns with the longest stamped line.
(3) Tighten the mounting screws.
* Make sure that the pressure roller is parallel to the suction plate (paper ejection) during adjustment.
* When the roller adjusting plate is moved one increment mark (1 mm) on the scale, also move the
suction plate (paper ejection) one increment mark (1 mm).
<< When the roller adjusting plate on the rear side is adjusted >>
UR
(1) Loosen the mounting screws (bind, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) on the suction plate (paper ejection).
(2) In accordance with the adjustment value of the roller adjusting plate, align the rear side of the suction
plate (paper ejection) with the line stamped on the rear side of the transport plate toward the paper
feed side. Also confirm that the front side aligns with the longest stamped line.
(3) Tighten the mounting screws.
* Make sure that the pressure roller is parallel to the suction plate (paper ejection) during adjustment.
* When the roller adjusting plate is moved one increment mark (1 mm) on the scale, also move the
suction plate (paper ejection) one increment mark (1 mm).
OE
Transport plate
Suction plate (paper ejection)

RIS
0834
0835
[8-19]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[8-20]
Chapter 9 Print Drum Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................... 9-2
1. Mechanism for Detection of Master on Print Drum Before Printing ........................................... 9-2
2. Print Drum Check Mechanism .................................................................................................. 9-3
3. Print Drum Lock Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 9-4
4. Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Mechanism ................................................................................. 9-5
5. Print Drum Drive Lock Release Mechanism ............................................................................. 9-6
6. Print Drum Rotation Mechanism ............................................................................................... 9-7
7.
3.
4.
5.
UR
Inking Mechanism ..................................................................................................................... 9-8
Disassembly ................................................................................................................................. 9-9

1.
2.
Removing the Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Unit ...................................................................... 9-9
Removing the Screen Assembly ............................................................................................. 9-10
Removing the Clamp Plate Base Assembly ............................................................................ 9-12
Removing the Print Drum Body ............................................................................................... 9-13
Removing ink scraper plates F, R ........................................................................................... 9-16
6. Removing the Ink Pump Assembly ......................................................................................... 9-17
7. Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Assembly ......................................................................... 9-18
OE
8. Removing the Ink Cartridge Lock Assembly and Circular Arc ANT ......................................... 9-19
9. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB ............................................................................................... 9-20
10. Removing the Print Drum PCB ............................................................................................... 9-21
11. Removing the Print Drum Joint ............................................................................................... 9-22
12. Removing Flange R ................................................................................................................ 9-23
13. Removing flange F .................................................................................................................. 9-24
14. Removing the Squeegee Roller .............................................................................................. 9-25
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................. 9-29

1. Squeegee Gap Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 9-29
2. Squeegee Pressure Adjustment ............................................................................................. 9-31
3. Master Position Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 9-33
RIS
4. Horizontal Print Position Adjustment ....................................................................................... 9-34
[9-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Mechanism for Detection of Master on Print Drum Before Printing
At the beginning of a print job, the machine checks for the presence of a master on the print drum.
Pressing the Start key begins print drum rotation. When the first print drum rotates to an angle of 140°
OP
and the second print drum rotates to an angle of 120°, the master loading sensors check for the pres-
ence of a master on the print drums.
The information obtained by the master loading sensors is retained in memory until the print drums are
pulled out or power to the machine is switched off. This allows printing to begin immediately for second
and subsequent print jobs.
During the master check at the beginning of a print job, if the master loading sensors do not detect any
light (i.e., because no master is present), the machine determines that there is no master on the print
drums.
Print drum angle 140° Print drum angle 120°
UR
0901 0902
OE
First master loading sensor
Second master
Reflection preventing cloth
loading sensor
<< First print drum >> << Second print drum >>
RIS
Master making unit
First master removal

unit
120°
140°
First master loading sensor Second master 0903

loading sensor
[9-2]
2. Print Drum Check Mechanism
E
The removal and insertion of each print drum is performed at position B. The drawer connectors, print
drum safety switches, and print drum lock sensors determine the print drums are set in the machine.
If the front cover safety switch and either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum safety
switch are OFF, the safety mechanism will prevent the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp
motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second
OP
master making unit transport pulse motor from switching ON.
When the front cover safety switch is ON, if either the first print drum safety switch or second print drum
safety switch is ON although the other is OFF, the machine will operate (to allow printing with a single
print drum).
UR
OE
RIS
0904
Print drum safety SW Print drum lock sensor Drawer connector
[9-3]
3. Print Drum Lock Mechanism
E
When the print drum is set in the main unit, the print drum lock plate presses the lock lever and hooks it
on the movable plate of the horizontal sliding unit. Since the force of the return spring returns the lock
lever to the lock position, the print drum lock plate will not descend, even if the print drum lever is pulled
(print drum in locked condition).
Opening the front cover and pressing the print drum pull-out button will move the machine to position B
OP
and unlock the drive mechanism (of either the first or second print drum).The print drum solenoid will then
switch ON, and the lock lever will move to the lock release position. Pulling the print drum lever lowers
the print drum lock plate to permit removal of the print drum (print drum in unlocked condition).
Print drum lever
UR
Print drum lock plate
Lock lever
Movable plate
OE
Print drum lock solenoid
0905
RIS
0906
[9-4]
4. Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Mechanism
E
The horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum to adjust the horizontal printing position. When the print
drum is set in the main unit, it is fastened to the horizontal sliding assembly by the print drum lock mecha-
nism. When the horizontal pulse motor of the horizontal sliding base assembly rotates, the horizontal
sliding assembly moves, causing the print drum to move as well.
The horizontal home position sensor checks the horizontal reference position.
OP
UR
OE
Gray parts in the diagram
on the right move.
0907
RIS
Horizontal pulse motor

Horizontal home position sensor
Drive lock release sensor
[9-5]
5. Print Drum Drive Lock Release Mechanism
E
Pressing the print drum pull-out button allows the first and second print drums to be pulled out.
The first and second print drums are pulled out and inserted at position B. However, due to the phase
difference between the first and second print drums, they are never positioned at position B at the same
time.
Pressing the print drum pull-out button causes the horizontal pulse motor of either the first or second print
OP
drum, whichever moves to position B first, to move the print drum located at position B all the way toward
the front side (the position is checked by the drive lock release sensor). The drive joint of the main unit is
then disengaged from the print drum drive joint, cutting off the transfer of rotation from the main unit to the
print drum.
The other print drum then moves to position B, allowing removal and insertion of the other print drum.
If a print job is executed after the print drums are inserted, the machine will move the print drum whose
drive lock was released to position B, after which the horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum body to
the horizontal home position sensor position, where the drive joint of the main unit engages with the print
drum drive joint.
During print drum removal, the current position in the horizontal direction set on the main unit panel is
saved to the main unit memory.
UR
At the start of a print job, the print drum returns to the horizontal position saved to the main unit memory.
OE
RIS
Horizontal pulse motor

Drive lock release 0908
sensor
Horizontal home position Print drum joint
sensor
Drive joint
[9-6]
6. Print Drum Rotation Mechanism
E
When the main motor rotates, its drive force is transmitted to flange R via the print drum drive assembly
of the main drive section and the print drum joint.
The rotation is then transferred to the squeegee drive gear via the flange gear attached to flange R and
the squeegee idle gear, turning the squeegee roller.
When the squeegee roller rotates, the squeegee gear attached on the front side of the squeegee roller
OP
turns the ink drive gear, rotating the ink drive shaft.
The squeegee drive gear is equipped with a one-way clutch to keep the squeegee roller from rotating
when the print drum is rotated manually in reverse.
Flange R
Drum joint
UR 0909
Flange R
OE
Flange gear
Drive joint
Doctor roller
Ink drive shaft

RIS
Squeegee idle gear
Squeegee drive gear
Squeegee roller
Ink drive gear

0910
Squeegee gear
[9-7]
7. Inking Mechanism
E
When the swirl of ink moves away from the ink sensor while the main motor is ON and the print drum is
rotating, the ink motor will turn ON, pumping ink from the ink cartridge.
The pumped ink will be applied to the squeegee roller from the holes on the ink distributor.
When ink contacts the ink sensor, the ink motor switches OFF.
The ink applied to the squeegee roller is swirled between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller (the
OP
ink drive shaft rotates to produce a smooth swirl of ink).
A small gap is present between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller, through which ink passes and
reaches the inside of the print drum.
The overflow sensor checks and prevents overflow of the ink applied to the print drum.
UR Ink motor
Ink sensor
OE
Overflow sensor
0911
Doctor roller
Ink distributor
RIS
Squeegee roller
Ink drive shaft
[9-8]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Print Drum Horizontal Sliding Unit
(1) Pull out the print drum, switch off power, and dismount the cover (front lower).
(2) Remove the motor cover plate. (RS tight, M4 x 8, 2 pcs)
OP
(3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8, 4 pcs), unplug the connectors (5 locations), pull out
the coaxial cable, and dismount the print drum horizontal sliding unit. (Turn the unit slightly clockwise
when pulling out.)
Print drum horizontal sliding unit
UR
OE
RIS
0912
Cover plate
[9-9]
2. Removing the Screen Assembly
E
(1) Perform the Confidential operation and pull out the print drum.
(2) Remove the end hanger mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs).
(3) Remove the top hanger mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs) and dismount the screen assembly.
* Be careful to avoid adding folding marks or creases to the screen during the removal or installation.
OP
Screen assembly
UR 0913
OE
End hangers
RIS
0914
0915
Top hangers
[9-10]
<< Installation procedure >>

(1) Fasten the top hangers, wrap the screen assembly around the print drum, and temporary fasten the
end hangers.
E
(2) Engage the hook on the spring side of the screen jig to the hole in the end hanger. Hook the other
end of the jig to the flange projection.
(3) Set the screen jigs on the front and rear sides to apply tension to the screen assembly, then tighten
the end hanger mounting screws firmly.
OP
(4) Remove the screen jigs after securing the mounting screws
0916
<< Screen jig >>
End hanger
UR Screen jig Top hanger

OE
Screen assembly
0917
<< Rear side >>
End hanger Screen jig Top hanger

RIS
Screen assembly
0918
<< Front side >>
[9-11]
3. Removing the Clamp Plate Base Assembly
E
(2) Remove the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs) and dismount the clamp plate base assembly.
OP
Clamp plate base assembly
UR 0919
OE
RIS
0920 0921
<< Clamp plate base assembly >> 0922
[9-12]
4. Removing the Print Drum Body
E
• Screen assembly
• Clamp plate base assembly
(3) Loosen the mounting screws (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs) in the keyhole-shaped holes (indicated by arrows
OP
in the photo) at the rear side on the print drum body. Remove the other mounting screws (bind, M3 x
6, 10 pcs).
(4) While holding the joint to keep the print drum from expanding suddenly, remove the tape (the tape
will be reused in reassembly).
(5) Move the print drum body slightly to dislodge the mounting screws from the keyhole-shaped holes,
then dismount the print drum body.
UR Print drum body
Tape
OE
0923 Joint on print drum body

RIS
0924
<< Front side, enlarged view >>
[9-13]
<< Installation procedure >>

(1) Each end of the print drum body on the rear side is stamped with an arrow ( ) and either an <F> or
an <R>. Set the print drum body so that the side with the <F> is on the front side and the side with
E
the <R> is on the rear. Hook the screws loosened for removal of flange F and flange R to the
keyhole-shaped holes located on the rear end of the print drum body.
(2) Loosely tighten the two screws at the section indicated by the arrow ( ) on both ends of the print
drum body.
OP
UR 0925 0926
(3) On both front and rear side, attach the screen jigs to the inner holes at the front end of the print drum
OE
body and the flange projections.
(4) While pressing flange F and flange R against the print drum body, firmly tighten the two screws
installed at the arrow ( ) in step (2).
(5) Likewise, while pressing flange F and flange R against the print drum body, firmly tighten the two
screws in the keyhole-shaped holes, then tighten the remaining eight screws in the direction of the
front end of the print drum body.
Screen jig Print drum body Screen jig

RIS
0927 0928
Flange R Flange F
[9-14]
(6) Install screws (bind, M3 x 6, use mounting screws of other parts) into the second holes (on both front
and rear sides) from the front end of the print drum body.
E
OP
UR 0929 0930
(7) Remove the screen jigs and attach the tape on the joint section of the print drum body.
OE
* Attach the tape so that the joint section on the print drum body does not rise. If the joint section of
the print drum rises, wrinkling of the master during loading or noise may result.
(8) Remove the two screws installed in step (6).
Tape
RIS
0931
[9-15]
5. Removing ink scraper plates F, R
E
• Screen assembly
• Print drum body
OP
(3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 8, 1 pc each) and dismount ink scraper plates F and R.
UR 0933
0932
OE
Ink scraper plate R <<Ink scraper plate R >>
0934
RIS
0935
<< Ink scraper plate R >> Ink scraper plate F

• The installation positions of different cross beam sizes are marked. For the A3 machine, install the ink
scraper plates at the locations marked <A3>. For the B4 machine, install at the locations marked <B4>.
[9-16]
6. Removing the Ink Pump Assembly
E
• Screen assembly
OP
• Print drum body
(3) Unplug the connector for the ink motor FG sensor and the connector for the ink motor, remove the
mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and dismount the ink pump assembly.
Connector for ink motor
UR
OE
0936
RIS
Connector for ink motor FG sensor Ink pump assembly
[9-17]
7. Removing the Ink Cartridge Guide Assembly
E
• Screen assembly
• Print drum body
OP
• Ink pump assembly
(3) Remove the inspection cap.
(4) Unplug the connector for the Antenna and the connector for the ink cartridge set switch. Remove the
two reusable bands.
(5) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 4 pcs), slide the ink cartridge guide
assembly toward the inside, and lift up to remove.
Connector for Antenna
UR
OE
0937
Inspection cap
0938
Ink cartridge guide assembly

RIS
0940
Reusable bands
Connector for ink cartridge set SW
0939
[9-18]
8. Removing the Ink Cartridge Lock Assembly and Antenna
E
• Screen assembly
• Print drum body
OP
• Ink cartridge guide assembly
Removing the ink cartridge lock assembly

(3) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 8, 2 pcs) and dismount the ink cartridge lock assembly
from the ink cartridge guide assembly.
Ink cartridge guide assembly Ink cartridge lock assembly
UR 0941
OE
Removing the Antenna
(3) Remove the upper ink cartridge guide from the lower ink cartridge guide by disengaging the latch.
(4) Remove the Antenna from the Antenna holder by disengaging the latch.
Ink cartridge guide assembly
Antenna Antenna holder

RIS
Upper ink cartridge guide
0942
Lower ink cartridge

guide
0944
0943
[9-19]
9. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB
E
• Screen assembly
• Print drum body
OP
• Ink cartridge guide assembly
(3) Unplug the connector, remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2 pcs), and dis-
mount the ink sensor PCB.
Connector Ink sensor PCB
UR
OE
0945
RIS
0946
<< Ink sensor PCB >>
[9-20]
10. Removing the Print Drum PCB
E
(1) Pull out the print drum. Remove the front frame cover. (bind, M3 x 6, 4 pcs)
(2) Unplug the connectors (6 locations), remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M3 x 8, 2
pcs), and dismount the print drum PCB.
* Before replacing the print drum PCB, read the precautions described in Chapter 18.
OP
0947
UR
OE
Front frame cover
0948
RIS
Print drum PCB
[9-21]
11. Removing the Print Drum Joint
E
(1) Pull out the print drum.
(2) Remove the print drum side frames from both sides. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs each)
(3) Remove the rear frame assembly.
(4) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and dismount the print drum joint.
OP
Print drum side frame Print drum side frame
UR
Print drum side frame Print drum side frame
Rear frame assembly
0949
OE
0950
0951
<< Rear side >> << Front side >>
RIS
Print drum joint
0952
[9-22]
12. Removing Flange R
E
• Screen assembly
OP
• Print drum body
• Print drum side frames (2 pcs)
• Rear frame assembly
• Print drum joint
(3) Detach the C-ring and remove flange R.
UR
OE
0953
C-ring
Flange R
RIS
0954
[9-23]
13. Removing flange F
E
• Screen assembly
OP
• Print drum body
• Print drum side frames (2 pcs)
(3) Unplug the connectors (2 locations), detach the reusable band, remove the mounting screws (with
double-washer, M4 x 8, 5 pcs), and dismount the front frame assembly.
(4) Remove the snap ring from the flange roller at the lower side and dismount one flange roller.
(5) Remove flange F.
* The remaining flange rollers can be removed after flange F is dismounted.
Front frame assembly

Position-B lock lever
UR
OE
0955
RIS
0956
Snap ring Flange roller

Flange F

• Before installing the front frame assembly, push the position-B lock lever so that the tip of the position-B
lock lever lies at the periphery without entering the hole in flange F.
[9-24]
14. Removing the Squeegee Roller
E
• Screen assembly • Clamp plate base assembly
• Print drum body • Front frame cover
• Print drum side frames (2 pcs) • Rear frame assembly
OP
• Print drum joint • Flange R
• Front frame assembly • Flange F
(3) Remove the drive shaft lock plate. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 1 pc)
(4) Remove the ink drive gear.
(5) Remove the E-ring and dismount the squeegee gear.
Ink drive gear

UR
OE
Squeegee gear 0957
Drive shaft lock plate
(6) Remove the E-ring and dismount the squeegee idle gear.
(7) Remove the E-ring and dismount the squeegee drive gear.
RIS
0958
Squeegee idle gear Squeegee drive gear
[9-25]
(8) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 3 pcs) and the shoulder screw from the
front side.
E
OP
UR Shoulder screw 0959
OE
(9) Remove the mounting screws (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 2 pcs) and the shoulder screw from the
rear side.
RIS
0960
Shoulder screw
[9-26]
(10) Disengage the squeegee side frames from the S gap cams on the front and rear sides and dismount
the squeegee unit.
E
S gap cam
OP
Squeegee side frame F
<< Front side >>
S gap cam
UR 0961
OE
Squeegee side frame R
<< Rear side >>
0962
Squeegee side frame R
RIS
Squeegee side frame F
0963
<< Squeegee unit >>
[9-27]
(11) Pull out the ink drive shaft.

* Be careful to avoid misplacing the bearing metal and O-ring, which are removed at the same time.
(12) Remove squeegee side frame F and squeegee side frame R and dismount the squeegee roller.
E
* Note that the doctor roller, ink block F, and ink block R are also removed while assembled as a
unit.
Squeegee size frame R
OP
Ink block R
0964
Doctor roller
UR
OE
Squeegee roller
0965
RIS
Ink block F
Ink drive shaft
0966
Squeegee size frame F
[9-28]
Adjustment
E
1. Squeegee Gap Adjustment

(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the following parts:
OP
• Screen assembly
• Print drum body
• Front frame cover
• Print drum handle cover
• Print drum lever
(2) Clean out the ink from the squeegee unit.
(3) Using a feeler gauge, check to confirm that the gap between the squeegee roller and the doctor
roller conforms to the following specified value.
* Specified value (same on front and rear sides): 0.08 mm ± 0.02 mm
(4) If the measured gap deviates from the specified value, loosen the retaining screw on the doctor gap
adjustment plate.
to adjust the gap.

UR
(5) Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the groove on the doctor gap adjustment plate and move the plate
(6) Tighten the retaining screw on the doctor gap adjustment plate.
Gap narrows.
Doctor gap adjustment plate
OE
0967
RIS
Gap widens. 0968
<< Front side >> 0969
Doctor gap adjustment plate retaining screw
0970
[9-29]
E
OP
0971
UR
<< Rear side >> Flange R
OE
Doctor gap adjustment plate retaining screw
0972
Problems
• If the gap between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller is too wide, too much ink will be applied to
RIS
the print drum, potentially resulting in ink leakage. It may also cause the master to slip from the clamp
plate or tear.
• If the gap between the squeegee roller and the doctor roller is too narrow, the required amount of ink
will not be applied to the print drum, causing irregularities in printed images, light sections on printed
images, or partially missing printed images. An excessively narrow gap may also require numerous trial
prints to obtain correctly printed images.
[9-30]
2. Squeegee Pressure Adjustment
E
(1) Create a master using Test Chart No. 14 and print. Check the left and right sides of the prints to
confirm that the print density is equal on both sides. Also, push against the area on the print drum
body immediately below the squeegee roller with a finger to confirm that the gap between the print
drum body and the squeegee roller conforms to the following specified value on both the front and
OP
rear sides.
(2) If the print density differs between the left and right sides of the prints or if the gap between the print
drum body and the squeegee roller deviates from the specified value, make the adjustment de-
scribed below.
* Specified value (same on front and rear sides): 0.2 mm ± 0.05 mm for A3 size, 0.3 mm ± 0.05 mm for
B4 and A4 sizes
<< Adjusting the front side >>

(3) Pull out the print drum and remove the ink cartridge. Remove the following parts:
• Front frame cover
• Print drum handle cover
• Print drum lever
UR
(4) Loosen the three retaining screws (indicated by the arrows in the photo) on the squeegee-side frame
F assembly through the holes marked <SP> on the print drum front frame.
(5) Insert a flat-head screwdriver through the hole in the print drum front frame and turn the S gap cam
to adjust the gap between the print drum body and the squeegee roller to the specified value.
(6) Tighten the three retaining screws on the squeegee-side frame F assembly.
S gap cam
0973
OE
Gap narrows.
0974
0975
RIS
Gap widens.
S gap cam
0976
[9-31]
<< Adjusting the rear side >>

(4) Position the holes in print drum rear frame, flange R and squeegee idle gear so that the two retaining
E
screws (indicated by the arrows in the photo) on the squeegee-side frame R assembly can be seen
through the holes, then loosen the screws.
* Rotate the print drum if the holes in the squeegee idle gear are not aligned.
(5) Insert a flat-head screwdriver through the holes in the print drum rear frame and flange R, then turn
OP
the S gap cam to adjust the gap between the print drum body and the squeegee roller to the speci-
fied value.
(6) Tighten the two retaining screws on the squeegee-side frame R assembly.
UR 0977
S gap cam
<< Rear side >>

OE
RIS
0978
Precautions for adjustment

• If the S gap cam is turned without loosening all the retaining screws, the S gap cam may be damaged.
Be sure to loosen all retaining screws before making the adjustment.
Problems
• If the squeegee pressure differs between the left and right sides, the print density will become uneven
between the left and right sides of the prints.
• If the squeegee pressure is excessive, too much ink will be applied to the print drum, causing potential
ink leakage. It may also cause the master to slip from the clamp plate or tear.
• If the squeegee pressure is too weak, the required amount of ink will not be applied to the print drum,
causing potential irregularities in printed images, light sections on printed images, or partially missing
printed images. Excessively low squeegee pressure may also require numerous trial prints to obtain
correctly printed images.
[9-32]
3. Master Position Adjustment
E
Before making adjustments, clean the pressure roller.

<< To move the master toward the front side >>
(1) Pull out the print drum and remove the print drum horizontal sliding unit.
OP
(2) To move the master toward the front side, loosen the retaining screw on the roller adjusting plate on
the front side.
(3) Adjust by aligning the increment mark on the left side of the roller adjusting plate to the left-side edge
of the pressure roller bracket.
* Moving the roller adjusting plate one increment mark to the left to move the master 1 mm toward the
front side. The roller adjusting plate can be moved up to two increment marks, which is equal to 2 mm.
<< To move the master toward the rear side >>

(2) To move the master toward the rear side, loosen the retaining screw on the roller adjusting plate on
the rear side.
UR
(3) Adjust by aligning the increment mark on the left side of the roller adjusting plate to the left-side edge
of the pressure roller bracket.
* Moving the roller adjusting plate one increment mark to the left moves the master 1 mm toward the rear
side. The roller adjusting plate can be moved up to two increment marks, which is equal to 2 mm.
* After the above adjustment, adjust the suction plate (paper ejection). (See the section on adjustment of
the paper ejection section in Chapter 8.)
To adjust the rear side, loosen this screw and

remove the pressure roller.
OE
Loosen this screw and move the roller
adjusting plate toward the left.
Roller adjusting plate

RIS
0979
Align this stepped section with the left-side

edge of the pressure roller bracket. The roller adjusting plate is pressed against
The adjustment can be made in three steps. this reset plate in the default position.
Moving the roller adjusting plate one step to
the left moves the master 1 mm.
[9-33]
4. Horizontal Print Position Adjustment
E
(1) Run Test Mode No. 386 (Activates or deactivates center black dot setting), and make dual-color
prints.
(2) Confirm that the deviation between the vertical line printed by the first print drum and the vertical line
printed by the second print drum is less than ±2 mm.
OP
(3) If the deviation exceeds the standard value, start Test Mode No. 973 (Horizontal HP Adjustment
(Print Drum)), and adjust the horizontal image position of the second print drum in relation to the first
print drum.
* If the setting value is increased, the image moves to the rear side.
* After entering a setting value, press the center lamp to register the value.
UR
OE
RIS
[9-34]
Chapter 10 Clamp Units
Chapter 10 Clamp Unit
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 10-2
1. Clamp Initializing Operation .................................................................................................... 10-3
2. Clamp Plate Opening Operation (First Clamp Unit) ................................................................ 10-5
3. Master Ejection Plate Opening Operation (Second Clamp Unit) ............................................. 10-6
4. Clamp Plate Closing Operation (First Clamp Unit) .................................................................. 10-7
UR
OE
RIS
[10-1]
Mechanism
E
The machine has two clamp units. The first clamp unit is mounted on the master making unit, while the
second clamp unit is installed to the second master removal unit.
The first clamp unit operates when either the first print drum or the second print drum operates for re-
moval or loading of a master. The second clamp unit, however, operates only when the second print drum
OP
operates for removal of a master.
When the clamp unit operates, the relevant print drum must be at the horizontal home position.
UR
OE
1001
Second master removal unit
Master making unit
1002
RIS
Second clamp unit

1003
First clamp unit
[10-2]
1. Clamp Initializing Operation
E
<< First clamp unit >>
When the power switch is turned on or when the all-reset operation is initiated, the first clamp unit per-
forms the initializing operation.
Whether the clamp transport cam (1) has returned to the home position (light path of first clamp sensor A
blocked, and light received by first clamp sensor B) is checked.
OP
If it is not at the home position, the first clamp motor will turn ON and rotate in the forward or reverse
direction depending on the statuses of the first clamp sensors A, B until the light path of the first clamp
sensor A is blocked and the light is received by the first clamp sensor B. This motor operation rotates the
clamp cam (1) and returns the clamp transport cam (1) to the home position.
First clamp motor
UR First clamp sensor A

OE
Clamp cam (1)
First clamp sensor B

Clamp transport cam (1)
RIS
1004
[10-3]
<< Second clamp unit >>

When the power switch is turned on or when the all-reset operation is initiated, the second clamp unit
performs the initializing operation.
E
When the light path of the second clamp sensor is blocked, the second clamp motor will turn ON and
rotates in reverse. When light is received by the second clamp sensor, the second clamp motor starts
rotating in the forward direction until the light path is blocked, in order to return the clamp transport cam
(2) to the home position.
OP
If light is received by the second clamp sensor, the second clamp motor will turn ON and rotate in the
forward direction until the light path is blocked in order to return the clamp transport cam (2) to the home
position.
UR
Second clamp sensor

OE
Second clamp motor
RIS
1005
[10-4]
2. Clamp Plate Opening Operation (First Clamp Unit)
E
When the Start key is pressed for Confidential or master-making operation, the print drum starts to rotate
from position B. After the presence of a master on the print drum is checked and as the print drum returns
to position B, the print drum stops and the clamp plate opening operation starts.
The first clamp motor will turn ON and rotate the clamp cam (1) and lowers the clamp transport cam (1)
until the light path of the first clamp sensor B is blocked.
OP
Then, the print drum starts rotating for master making operation. The clamp transport cam (1) at its
lowered position opens the clamp plate first, then lifts the master ejection plate to remove the master from
the clamp plate.
First clamp motor
First clamp sensor A

UR Clamp cam (1)

OE
1006
Print drum (at position B)

RIS
[10-5]
3. Master Ejection Plate Opening Operation (Second Clamp Unit)
E
When the second print drum ejects the master, the second print drum rotates to an angle of 129° during
the clamp plate opening operation. This action disengages the leading edge of the master from the clamp
plate. After the first clamp unit returns to the home position, the second print drum rotates in reverse to an
angle of 344°.
At that position, the second clamp unit performs the master ejection plate opening operation.
OP
The second clamp motor will turn ON and rotate the clamp cam (2) and move the clamp transport cam
(2) to the print drum side until light is received by the second clamp sensor.
Then, the print drum starts rotating for master making operation. The clamp transport cam (2) at a posi-
tion close to the print drum lifts the master ejection plate to further raise the leading edge of the master
that has been disengaged from the clamp plate.
URClamp transport cam (2)

Second clamp sensor
1007
OE
Second clamp motor
RIS
[10-6]
4. Clamp Plate Closing Operation (First Clamp Unit)
E
When the print drum rotates one full turn and returns to position A while conducting the removed master
vertical transport operation, the clamp plate opens because the clamp transport cam (1) is at its lowered
position, and the print drum stops.
In the master loading operation, when the load pulse motor feeds the master onto the print drum for a set
length, the first clamp motor will turn ON and rotate the clamp cam (1) until the light path of the first clamp
OP
sensor A is blocked and light is received by the first clamp sensor B. This action closes the clamp and the
master becomes clamped.
In this process, the clamp transport cam (1) returns to the home position.
First clamp motor

UR Clamp cam (1)

OE
1008
RIS
[10-7]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[10-8]
Chapter 11 Master Removal Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 11-2
1. Outline of the Master Removal Operation ............................................................................... 11-2
2. Operation for Checking Master on Print Drum Before Master Removal ................................. 11-4
3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation ....................................................................... 11-5
4. Disposed Master Compression Operation .............................................................................. 11-7
5. Remaining Master Volume Detection Mechanism .................................................................. 11-8
6. Master Disposal Box Safety Switch ........................................................................................ 11-9
1.
2.
3.
UR
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................. 11-10
Removing the Master Removal Unit ..................................................................................... 11-10
Removing the First Master Removal Unit .............................................................................. 11-11
Removing the Second Master Removal Unit ........................................................................ 11-14
OE
RIS
[11-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Outline of the Master Removal Operation
The master on the print drum is removed from the print drum and ejected in the following sequence.
OP
<< First print drum side >>
(1) At the start of the master removal operation, the first master loading sensor checks whether there is
a master on the first print drum to be removed.
(2) After the clamp plate opening operation is completed, the first print drum rotates and opens the
clamp plate to release the leading edge of the master, then lifts the master ejection plate to raise the
leading edge of the master.
(3) The removed master vertical transport operation is conducted to remove the master from the first
print drum, and the master is sent to the first master disposal box.
(4) The master compression operation is conducted to compress the master in the first master disposal
box.
operation. UR
* The above step (1) is conducted only when the presence of a master on the first print drum is unknown.
* Even if there is no master on the first print drum, steps (2) through (4) are conducted. However, the first
master disposal jam sensor does not perform detection during the removed master vertical transport
* The first master removal unit is mounted with master guiding plates. Since the master compression
operation and the master loading operation start at the same time, the master guiding plates stay at
their lowered position while the master is wrapped around the first print drum, thus preventing the tail
end of the master from contacting the master removal roller and being contaminated with ink.
OE
Compression plate Master guiding plate
First master disposal box
RIS
1101
[11-2]
<< Second print drum side >>

(1) At the start of the master removal operation, the second master loading sensor checks whether there
is a master on the second print drum to be removed.
E
(2) After the clamp plate opening operation is completed, the second print drum rotates to a print drum
angle of 129° and opens the clamp plate, then lifts the master ejection plate to raise the leading edge
of the master.
(3) The first clamp unit returns to the home position, and the second print drum rotates in reverse to a
OP
print drum angle of 344°.
(4) After the master ejection plate opening operation is conducted, the second print drum rotates to lift
the master ejection plate and raise the leading edge of the master.
(5) The removed master vertical transport operation is conducted to remove the master from the second
print drum, and the master is sent to the second master disposal box.
(6) The master compression operation is conducted to compress the master in the second master
disposal box.
* The above step (1) is conducted only when the presence of a master on the second print drum is
unknown.
* Even if there is no master on the second print drum, steps (2) through (6) are conducted. However, the
Second master loading sensor

UR
second master disposal jam sensor does not perform detection during the removed master vertical
transport operation.
Compression plate
Second master disposal box
OE
1102
RIS
[11-3]
2. Operation for Checking Master on Print Drum Before Master

Removal
E
At the beginning of making a master or executing Confidential operation, only if the presence of a master
on the print drum is unknown, the print drum rotates one full turn from position B, and the master loading
sensor checks whether there is a master on the print drum when the first print drum rotates to a print
OP
drum angle of 140° or when the second print drum rotates to a print drum angle of 120°.
If it is known that there is a master on the print drum, the above checking operation is not conducted.
When there is a master on the print drum, the master disposal jam sensor checks if the master is sent to
the master disposal box during the following removed master vertical transport operation.
Print drum angle of 140°
UR
OE
Reflection preventing cloth

1103
Print drum angle of 120°
<< First print drum >>
RIS
Second master loading sensor
1104
<< Second print drum >>
[11-4]
3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Operation
E
As soon as the clamp opening operation starts, the master disposal motor starts rotating.
The clamp unit operation and the print drum rotation send the master whose leading edge is lifted by the
master ejection plate to the master disposal box through the vertical transport rollers.
When the print drum rotates one full turn and reaches position A, the main motor stops rotating, and the
master disposal motor also stops rotating according to the set timing.
OP
In this step, the master disposal jam sensor checks proper transport of the master into the master
disposal box when the print drum is at print drum angles of 120 and 180°, while the master disposal
motor FG sensor checks the rotating speed of the master disposal motor. Test Mode No. 578 can be
used to adjust the speed of the master disposal motor in relation to the print drum rotation speed in
master removal operation.
The master guiding plates of the first master removal unit are raised by the compression plate so that
they do not affect the removed master vertical transport operation.
<< First master removal unit >>
First master
disposal motor
FG sensor UR
First master disposal motor
Master removal roller (top)
Compression plate
Pulley shaft
OE
1105
Master guiding plate
First master disposal jam sensor

RIS
Master removal roller (bottom)
[11-5]
<< Second master removal unit >>
E
OP
UR
Second master disposal jam sensor
1106
Second master disposal motor FG sensor
OE
Second master disposal motor
RIS
[11-6]
4. Disposed Master Compression Operation
E
1) Initialization
• If the master compression sensor senses light, switching ON the power switch or initiating an all-
reset causes the master compression motor to rotate in reverse until the light path of the master
compression sensor is blocked. If the light path of the master compression sensor is blocked when
the power switch is turned on or when the all-reset is initiated, no initialization is performed.
OP
• At the start of master compression, if the master compression sensor senses light, the master
compression motor rotates in reverse until the light path of the master compression sensor is
blocked. If the light path of the master compression sensor is blocked at the beginning of master
removal, no initialization is performed.
2) Master compressing operation

• If the number of removed masters in the master disposal box is small, no load is applied to the
compression plate. The master compression motor rotates in the compressing direction, and
counting of the pulses of the master compression motor FG sensor starts when the master
compression sensor switches from ON to OFF. After reaching the number of pulses (default: 163
UR
pulses) set in Test Mode No. 573 (Master compression-limit position (maximum end position)), the
master compression motor halts. After the motor remains OFF for around three seconds, the
master compression motor begins to rotate in reverse. When the master compression sensor
switches ON, the master compression motor halts and ends compression.
• If the number of removed masters increases, a load is applied to the compression plate to
compress the masters. This means that the rotating speed of the master compression motor slows
before reaching the compression end pulse count, extending the pulse width of the master
compression FG sensor. When the pulse width exceeds the pulse width (default: 40 ms for the first
print drum and 37 ms for the second print drum for an A3 machine) set in Test Mode No. 575
(Master compression duration adjustment), the master compression motor halts. After the motor
remains OFF for around three seconds, the master compression motor begins to rotate in reverse.
OE
When the master compression sensor switches ON, the master compression motor halts and ends
compression.
• If the number of removed masters in the master disposal box continues to increase and the pulse
width set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment) is reached before the
number of pulses of the master compression motor FG sensor (after the master compression
sensor switches from ON to OFF) reaches the number of pulses (default: 162) set in Test Mode
No. 576 (Master disposal box full detection position adjustment), the machine determines that the
master disposal box is full. In this case, when compression is complete, the Master Disposal Box
Full indication is displayed on the panel.
* If Test Mode No. 579 (Compacting Completion Position Default Adjustment Selection) is enabled
(default), the pulse width at the compression completion position is calculated at the start of each
master compression, based on the average pulse width (approximate pulse width when actual
RIS
master compression motor is operating under no load) of the third to eighth pulses of the master
compression motor FG pulse, the designed pulse width under no-load operation, and the pulse
width set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment), and automatic
adjustment is performed. The compression force remains stable even with variations in motor and
mechanism operations.
[11-7]
5. Remaining Master Volume Detection Mechanism
E
The following pulse widths are detected during the master compression operation.
A: Pulse width set in Test Mode No. 573 (Master compression-limit position (maximum end position))
B: Pulse width set in Test Mode No. 575 (Master compression duration adjustment) (or automatically
adjusted value in case the compression completion position default adjustment selection is enabled)
C: Average pulse width of third to eighth pulses of master compression FG pulse (approximate pulse
OP
width when actual master compression motor is operating under no load)
The value of X is given by the following equation:
X = (A – C)/(B – C) x 100
The remaining master volume is indicated as shown in the table below in accordance with the value of X.
Value of X
Remaining master volume
1st print drum in A3 2nd print drum in A3 1st print drum in B4 2nd print drum in B4 indication
machine machine machine machine
12 or less 24 or less 22 or less 20 or less 100% to 50%
13 to 35 25 to 52 23 to 43 21 to 33 50% to 30%
36 to 65
66 or more
53 to 70
71 or more
UR 44 to 69
70 or more
Conditions for master disposal box full are met.
<< The diagram shows an example for the second master removal unit of an A3 machine
(with Test Mode Nos. 573 and 575 at default settings) >>
34 to 54
55 or more
30% to 10%
10 or less
Full
1107
OE
C:
FG pulse width is sampled immediately
after compression starts (3rd to 8th
pulses) to determine the speed of the
motor operating under no load.
Here, it is assumed that C = 15 msec. 1108
The compression plate rotates to the A:

RIS
compression end position and stops.

Compression end position is 100° (163 FG pulse width is measured immediately before the
pulses) from the home position. compression plate stops at the compression end position.
Note: Once a sufficient number of masters has been reached, the
Since the pulse count at FULL is 162, the compression load is applied to the motor, slowing the motor and
compression plate in most cases rotates to widening the FG pulse width.
the end position, except when the master Here, it is assumed that A = 30 msec.
disposal box is full. Note that the FG pulse width at the compression completion
position (nearly FULL) is B = 38 msec (when the compression
completion position default adjustment selection is disabled).
A - C = 15 msec: Indicates a decrease in motor speed due to compression of masters

B - C = 23 msec: Indicates a decrease in motor speed due to compression of masters when the master
disposal box is nearly full
The remaining master volume is calculated by comparing the above two values. (In this example, the calcula-
tion results in a value of 65, and the indication shows <30 - 10%>.)
[11-8]
6. Master Disposal Box Safety Switch
E
The master disposal box safety switch checks whether the master disposal box is correctly set in the
machine.
If the master disposal box safety switch is OFF, the main motor, first clamp motor, second clamp motor,
first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master compression motor, second
OP
master making unit transport pulse motor cannot be switched ON.
If the master disposal box safety switch remains OFF (with master disposal box removed from the
machine) for five seconds, the Master Disposal Box Full indication is reset.
UR
OE
1109
Master disposal box safety SW

RIS
[11-9]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Master Removal Unit
Removing the first master removal unit

(1) Switch off power and remove the master disposal box.
OP
(2) Remove the master disposal cover (1) and the paper feed cover.
(3) Unplug the three connectors, remove the one reusable band, remove the mounting screws (RS tight,
M4 x 8, 2 pcs), and pull out the master removal unit toward the paper feed side.
Mounting screws
Master disposal cover (1)
UR 1110
Connectors
OE
Removing the second master removal unit
(1) Switch off power and remove the master disposal box.
(2) Remove the master disposal cover (2).
(3) Disengage the lock located on the master making unit drawer cover using a steel measure, then
open the master making unit drawer cover.
(4) Disengage the lock and move the master making unit toward the first print drum side.
(5) Remove the mounting screws (RS tight, M4 x 8) at four locations.
(Remove two from the paper ejection side; remove the other two from the top side.)
(6) Unplug the three connectors, remove the two reusable bands, and pull out the master removal unit
toward the paper ejection side.
RIS
Connectors
Mounting screws
1111
[11-10]
2. Removing the First Master Removal Unit
E
Removing the round belt
(1) Press the release lever to lower the master removal roller (bottom) assembly.
(2) Detach the snap ring from the front side and remove the pulley shaft.
(3) Detach the snap ring from the rear side, detach the springs from both sides, and remove the master
removal roller (top).
OP
Install the black spring to the rear side.
Snap ring for pulley shaft

Snap ring for master removal roller (top)
Springs
UR
OE
1112 1113
Detach the snap ring, move the bearing metal
out of the way, disengage the gears, and slide Detach the snap ring and springs and
the shaft toward the front side. slide the shaft toward the rear.
Washer
Spring
Black spring for rear side
Snap ring
1114
RIS
Pulley shaft
Master disposal
roller (top)
Master disposal
roller (bottom)
1115
<< Front side >> << Rear side >>
[11-11]
Removing the master removal roller (bottom)

(2) Remove the master transport gear bracket. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs)
E
(3) Remove the two spur gears.
(4) Detach the E-rings from the master removal roller (bottom) from the front and rear sides, remove the
bearing metal, and dismount the master removal roller (bottom).
OP
UR
Master transport gear bracket Spur gears
1116

OE
Removing the compression plate
(1) Keep the master removal roller (bottom) assembly at the raised position.
(2) Remove the compression gear cover (1). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs)
(3) Remove the spur gear and lower the compression plate.
(4) Remove the compression plate block. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 1 pc)
(5) Detach the E-rings from the compression plate shaft from both sides, detach the bearing metal, and
dismount the compression plate.

When installing the compression gear cover (1), keep the compression plate in the raised position.
RIS
Compression gear cover (1)
Spur gear
1117 1118
Compression plate block << Compression plate >>
[11-12]
Removing the master removal roller unit and the master guiding plates
(2) Unplug the connector. (Keep the connector section away from the side plate.)
E
(3) Remove the springs from the front and rear sides.
(4) Remove the mounting screws from the front and rear sides from the outside of the side plates. (RS
tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs each)
(5) Gently push aside the side plate and remove the master removal roller unit.
OP
(6) Remove the E-ring from the master guide fulcrum shaft.
(7) Slide the master guide fulcrum shaft and remove the master guiding plates.
Springs
UR 1119
Mounting screws
OE
Mounting screws
1120
1121
Also remove this section of the connector
from the side plate.
RIS
1122
Master guide fulcrum shaft
[11-13]
3. Removing the Second Master Removal Unit
E
Removing the round belt
(2) Detach the roller springs from both the front and rear sides of the master removal roller (top).
(3) Detach the snap ring from the rear side and remove the boss to which the spring was attached.
(4) Remove the E-ring from the front side and dismount the slide shaft bearing.
OP
(5) Remove the master removal roller (top).
<< Rear side >>
UR 1123
Master removal roller (top)
Snap ring Slide shaft bearing

OE
Roller springs
RIS
1124
<< Front side >>
E-ring
[11-14]
Removing the master removal roller (bottom)

(2) Remove the master transport gear bracket. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs)
E
(3) Remove the three spur gears.
(4) Detach the E-rings from both sides of the master removal roller (bottom), remove the bearing metal,
and dismount the master removal roller (bottom).
OP
Master removal
roller (bottom)
UR
1125
OE
Spur gears Master transport gear
bracket
RIS
[11-15]
Removing the compression plate

(1) Keep the master removal roller (bottom) assembly at the raised position.
(2) Remove the compression gear cover (2). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs)
E
(3) Remove the compression plate block and lower the compression plate.
(4) Remove the sector gear. (with double-washer, M4 x 8, 1 pc)
(5) Detach the E-rings from both sides of the compression plate shaft, detach the bearing metal, and
dismount the compression plate.
OP
When installing the compression gear cover (2), keep the compression plate in the raised position.
Compression plate block Spur gear
UR
OE
1126
Compression gear cover (2)

RIS
1127
<< Compression plate >>
[11-16]
Removing the second clamp unit

(1) Unplug the connectors at two locations.
(2) Remove the mounting screws and dismount the unit. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 4 pcs)
E
OP
Mounting screws
UR
OE
1128
RIS
1129
[11-17]
MEMO
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[11-18]
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
RIS
OE
UR
OP
E
Chapter 13 AF Scanning Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 13-2
1. AF Original Set Mechanism ................................................................................... 13-2
2. AF Original Size-Detection Mechanism ................................................................. 13-4
3. AF Set Detection Mechanism ................................................................................ 13-4
4. AF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Auto Base Control) ................................. 13-5
5. AF Original Scanning Mechanism ......................................................................... 13-6
Removal and Assembly ..................................................................................................... 13-8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
UR
Removing the Original Pickup Roller Frame ........................................................ 13-8
Removing the Original Pickup Roller .................................................................. 13-10
Removing the Original Stripper Roller .................................................................. 13-11
Removing the Original Stripper Pad Assembly ................................................... 13-12
Removing the Original IN Sensor ....................................................................... 13-13
Removing the AF Read Pulse Motor .................................................................... 13-14
Removing Other Rollers ...................................................................................... 13-15
8. Removing the AF-Guide-Potentiometer Ass’y ..................................................... 13-22
OE
Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 13-23
1. AF Scan Start-Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 13-23
2. AF Horizontal-Scanning Position Adjustment ..................................................... 13-23
3. AF Read Pulse-Motor Speed Adjustment (Image Elongation and Shrinkage
Adjustment) .......................................................................................................... 13-23
4. AF Original Guide Fence Potentiometer Adjustment .......................................... 13-24
5. AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment ...................................................... 12-24
RIS
[ 13 - 1 ]
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
Mechanism
E
1. AF Original Set Mechanism
When an original is set along the original guide fence [K] and pushed up against the original stopper
gate [A], the AF original detection sensor [B] turns ON (receives light) and the Master/Print indication
OP
on the panel changes to “Ready to make master.”
After a set length of time, the AF read pulse motor operates in the reverse direction, lowering the
pickup roller [C] in the direction indicated by the arrow and withdrawing the original stopper gate [A]
upward. (In this step, the one-way clutch incorporated between the registration-roller gear and
registration-roller shaft prevents the registration roller [D] from rotating.)
When the pickup roller [C] descends and presses against the original, the pickup roller [C] and original
stripper roller [E] rotate in the original transport direction, and a single original is fed forward by the
action of the original stripper roller [E] and the original stripper pad [F]. This activates the AF original
registration sensor [G] (light blocked), and the edge of the original is stopped by the stationary
registration roller [D].
UR
When the AF original registration sensor [G] turns ON, after a preset length of time the AF read pulse
motor starts rotating in the forward direction. This raises the pickup roller [C] and turns the registration
roller [D], the two read rollers [H] [L], the white roller [I], and the original ejection roller [J], all of which
are linked by the timing belt, in the feed direction.
The original stops temporarily when it moves 90 mm from the original set position.
Meanwhile, when the AF original detection sensor [B] turns ON, the lamp carriage in the scanner unit
conducts a series of operations from lamp illumination to shading compensation, then moves to the AF
read position and stops in the standby mode.
If the Start key is not pressed within 60 seconds, the lamp turns off and the lamp carriage returns to
OE
the home position. Only when the Start key is pressed, the shading compensation operation is
conducted (as well as the auto-base-control operation if the original scanning density is set to AUTO),
and the scanning operation begins.
When the Start key is pressed within 60 seconds, the scanning operation starts immediately if the
original scanning density is not set to AUTO. If it is set to AUTO, the lamp carriage returns to the home
position, and the shading-compensation and auto-base-control operations are performed before the
scanning operation starts.
I
AF-ABC position Shading-compensation
operation range M
RIS
3 mm
1301
8 mm
AF read position HP sensor position
[ 13 - 2 ]
E
J D G E A C
L I H
B
OP
Original feed
1302
G E B C
I
UR
OE
J
1303
RIS
D A K
A: Original stopper gate H: Read roller 1

B: AF Original detection sensor I: White roller
C: Pickup roller J: Original ejection roller
D: Registration roller K: Original guide fence
E: Original stripper roller L: Read roller 2
F: Original stripper pad M: Original stopper (AF)
G: AF original registration sensor
[ 13 - 3 ]
2. AF Original Size-Detection Mechanism
E
The width of the original is detected by the AF guide potentiometer [B] linked to original guide fences [A],
which are aligned with the original. The length of the original is detected by AF original size sensor 1 [C]
and AF original size sensor 2 [D].
A C D B
OP
A: Original guide fences
B: AF guide potentiometer
C: AF original size sensor 1
D: AF original size sensor 2
UR 1337 1338
OE
3. AF Set Detection Mechanism

Whether the AF is closed over the stage glass or not is checked by the AF cover set sensor [E].
The AF cover set sensor [E] is attached on the AF unit.
RIS
E: AF cover set sensor
1340
[ 13 - 4 ]
4. AF Original Scanning Mechanism (with Automatic Base Control)
E
(This operation only occurs when the original scanning density is set to “Auto.”)
Once the AF original set operation is complete, pressing the Start key moves the lamp carriage to the
shading position. After performing the shading-compensation operation, the lamp carriage moves to the
AF-ABC position. Meanwhile, the AF read pulse motor rotates in the forward direction, rotating the
OP
registration roller, the two read rollers, the white roller, and the original ejection roller in the feed
direction. After the AF original IN sensor turns ON (light blocked), the paper is fed for a distance of 22.5
mm and stops. At this position (AF-ABC position), the image sensor scans the surface density of the
original. Then, the flatbed read pulse motor moves the lamp carriage back by 3 mm in the return
direction (to the AF read position).
The AF read pulse motor immediately rotates in the forward direction and, at the same time, the print
signal turns ON and the original scanning operation starts.
When a preset length of time elapses after the AF original IN sensor turns OFF (receives light) due to
the passing of the original, the print signal turns OFF. As soon as the scanning operation is complete,
UR
the AF read pulse motor starts operating at high speed.
When the AF original ejection sensor turns OFF, the original is sent a preset distance and then the AF
read pulse motor stops. The lamp carriage returns to the home position, and the AF read operation
ends.
The auto-base control function is inactive in the Photo, mixed Text/Photo, and Dot-screening modes.
OE
RIS
[ 13 - 5 ]
5. AF Original Scanning Mechanism
E
When the Start key is pressed after the AF original set operation is complete, the AF read pulse motor
[A] rotates in the forward direction, turning the registration roller [B], the two read rollers [C] [H], the
white roller [D], and the paper ejection roller [E] in the feed direction. When the AF original IN sensor
[F] turns ON (light blocked), the original is sent a distance of 25.5 mm, and then the print signal turns
OP
ON and the original scanning operation starts. (The pickup roller returns to the standby position.)
When a preset length of time has elapsed after the AF Original IN sensor [F] turns OFF (receives light)
due to the passing of the original, the print signal turns OFF and, at the same time, the AF read pulse
motor [A] starts operating at high speed.
After the AF original ejection sensor [G] turns OFF, the original is sent a preset distance, and then the
AF read pulse motor [A] stops. The lamp carriage returns to the home position, and the AF read
operation ends.
UR
E
B
OE
D F
1304
C
H
RIS
[ 13 - 6 ]
E
A B
OP
G
E
UR
1305
OE
F D C
A: AF read pulse motor

B: Registration roller
C: Read roller 1
D: White roller
RIS
E: Paper ejection roller

F: AF original IN sensor
G: AF original ejection sensor
H: Read roller 2
[ 13 - 7 ]
Removal and Assembly
E
1. Removing the Original Pickup Asembly
(1) Remove the top cover [A] by loosening the screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the front of the top cover and
removing the screws (4 x 10: 2 pcs) from the rear.
OP
(2) Disconnect the two connectors and the reusable band [C], remove the screws (M3 x 4: 2 pcs),
and detach the sensor-bracket assembly [B].
UR
OE
1306
RIS
1307
C B
A: Top cover
B: Sensor-bracket assembly
C: Reusable band
[ 13 - 8 ]
(3) Remove the resin clips [D] from both sides, pull the bearing metals [E] toward the inside, and
remove the original pickup assembly [F] by passing the drive gear on the rear of the assembly
E
through the hole on the side panel.
E D D E
OP
UR 1308
F
1309
OE
Rear Front
1310
RIS
Original pickup assembly 1311
D: Resin clip
E: Bearing metal
F: Original pickup assembly
[ 13 - 9 ]
2. Removing the Original Pickup Roller
E
(1) Remove the original pickup assembly (refer to the removal instructions in this Chapter).
(2) Remove the resin clip [A], open the end of the K holder [B], and remove the pickup roller [C]. (Note
that the K holder C [D] and parallel pin [E] may fall during disassembly.)
OP
B A C B
UR
OE
1312
D E
RIS
1313
Original pickup assembly
A: Resin clip
B: K holder
C: Original pickup roller
D: K holder C
E: Parallel pin
[ 13 - 10 ]
3. Removing the Original Stripper Roller
E
(2) Remove the K holder C, parallel pin, and pickup roller (refer to the removal instructions in this
Chapter).
(3) Remove the resin clip [B] from the rear of the original stripper roller [A], and move the original
OP
stripper roller in the direction indicated by the arrow.
(4) Remove the E-ring [D], move the K holder F assembly [C] slightly in the direction indicated by the
arrow, pull out the parallel pin holding the K holder F assembly [C] in place from the shaft, and
remove the K holder F assembly [C].
(5) Remove the original stripper roller [A].
[Precautions on Reassembly]
• When installing the parallel pin to hold the K holder F assembly in place, be sure to insert it into the
shallower groove on the K holder F assembly.
UR
• The original stripper roller must be installed with the correct orientation. Be sure to position the gear
side on the front of the machine.
B A C
OE
Rear Front
1314
D
RIS
A: Original stripper roller

B: Resin clip
C: K holder F assembly
D: E-ring
E: Parallel pin
1315
Installation of the K holder F assembly and parallel pin
[ 13 - 11 ]
4. Removing the Original Stripper Pad Assembly
E
(2) Detach original stopper bracket [A] by removing one screw (M3 x 4), and remove the original stopper
[B].
(3) Using the original release lever [C], elevate down the original stripper section.
OP
(3) Being careful not to drop the spring under the original stripper pad assembly [D], slide back the
assembly to disengage it out from the hooks and then take it out from the AF unit through the
opening.
• In putting the original stripper pad assembly [D] back into the AF unit, place an adhesive tape [E]
on the assembly (ref: photograph), and elevate down the original stripper section by using the
original release lever [C]. Push the assembly down into the opening under the stripper sheet [F]
and attach the spring firmly onto the assembly.
unit.
UR
• Use the attached adhesive tape to pull the original stripper pad assembly [D] to hook it onto the AF
• Remove the adhesive tape once the original stripper pad assembly [D] is fixed in its position.
OE
1341 1342
B A C D F
RIS
1343 1345
A: Original stopper bracket

B: Original stopper
C: Original release lever
D: Original stripper pad assembly
E: Adhesive tape
F: Stripper sheet
1344
D F
[ 13 - 12 ]
5. Removing the AF Original IN Sensor
E
(1) Remove the top cover by loosening the screws (M4 x 6: 3 pcs) on the front of the top cover and
removing the screws (M4 x 10: 2 pcs) from the rear.
(2) Remove the screw (M3 x 8: 1 pc), disconnect the connector, and remove the AF original IN sensor
[A].
OP
• Following reassembly, adjust the AF original IN sensor by using Test Mode No. 752 (AF-Read-
Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment).
UR
OE
1316
A: AF original IN sensor
RIS
[ 13 - 13 ]
6. Removing the AF Read Pulse Motor
E
(2) Remove the screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc), and move the harness-bracket assembly [A] to the side.
(3) Remove the open lever [B] together with the open-lever spring [C].
OP
(4) Detach the tension spring [D], remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6: 2 pcs), and then remove the
AF read pulse motor [E] together with the motor tension bracket [F].
UR
1317
OE
A
1318
D F C
RIS
A: Harness-bracket assembly
1319
B: Open lever
C: Open-lever spring E
D: Tension spring
E: AF read pulse motor
F: Motor tension bracket
[ 13 - 14 ]
7. Removing Other Rollers
E
(1) Detach the AF unit from the machine.
(3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the Control PCB [A] (M3 x 6: 2 pcs).
OP
(4) Cut the band indicated by the arrow in the photograph, remove the mounting screws (PM4 x 10: 7
pcs; M4 x 10 + Washer: 2 pcs on the front), and detach the AF mechanism unit.
A
UR
1320
OE
RIS
1321
AF mechanism unit
A: Control PCB I: Actuator disc spring

B: AF cover set sensor connector J: Motor-bracket ass’y
C: AF read pulse motor connector K: Idler ass’y
D: Ground wire L: Idler spring
E: Reusable band M: Resin clip
F: Ground wire from the harness-bracket assembly N: Spur gear
G: Harness-bracket assembly O: Gear ass’y
H: Sensor actuator disc P: Timing belt No.1
[ 13 - 15 ]
(5) Disconnect the AF cover set switch connector [B] and AF read pulse motor connector [C], and
detach the ground wire [D] by removing screw (M3 x 6: 1 pc).
E
(6) Remove the reusable band [E], detach the harness from the three harness clamps, and move the
harness to the side.
(7) Detach the ground wire [F] from the harness-bracket assembly by removing screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc).
(8) Detach the harness-bracket assembly [G] by removing screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc).
OP
(9) Remove the sensor actuator disc [H] together with the actuator disc spring [I].
(10) Detach the motor-bracket assembly [J] by removing screws (M4 x 6: 4 pcs).
(11) Loosen the idler assembly [K] securing screws, and remove the idler spring [L].
(12) Remove the resin clip [M], spur gear [N], E-ring, gear assembly [O], and timing belt No. 1 [P], in that
order.
• The gear assembly has a built-in one-way clutch. Be sure to install the gear assembly with the
stamped face toward the front.
E UR F
J
OE
C
1322
L K
G H I
RIS
1323
[ 13 - 16 ]
E
C B D E
OP
UR
OE
1324
Front < Layout of the rollers > Rear

A
A: Registration roller
B: Read roller No. 1
C: White roller
RIS
D: Read roller No. 2

E: Original ejection roller
[ 13 - 17 ]
Removing the registration roller
E
(13) Remove the timing pulley [A] from the rear side of the roller. Also remove the parallel pin [B] at the
same time.
(14) Remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal.
(15) Remove the resin clip [C] from the front side of the roller, and detach the bearing metal.
OP
(16) Remove the registration roller [D].
A
D
Rear
1325
UR
D
C
Front
1326
OE
1327
A B D C
A: Timing pulley
B: Parallel pin
RIS
C: Resin clip
D: Registration roller
[ 13 - 18 ]
Removing the read roller No. 1
E
* Before removing the read roller No. 1, detach the registration roller.
(13) Remove the resin clip [A] from the rear side of the roller, and detach the timing pulley [B]. Also
remove the parallel pin [C] at the same time.
OP
(15) Remove the E-ring from the front side of the roller, and detach the dial [D]. Also remove the parallel
pin [C] at the same time.
(16) Remove the timing-pulley assembly [E], remove the E-ring, and detach the bearing metal.
(17) Remove the read roller No. 1 [F].
• The timing-pulley assembly [E] has a built-in one-way clutch. Be sure to install the gear assembly
with the stamped face toward the front.
UR B
D
A
OE
1328 1329
Rear Front
RIS
1330
A B C F E C D
A: Resin clip
B: Timing pulley
C: Parallel pin
D: Dial
E: Timing-pulley assembly
F: Read roller No.1
[ 13 - 19 ]
Removing the read roller No. 2
E
(15) Remove the resin clip [A] from the front side of the roller, and detach the bearing metal.
OP
(16) Remove the read roller No. 2 [D].
Rear
1331
UR
A
A
Front
1332
OE
1333
A B C D A
RIS
A: Resin clip
B: Timing pulley
C: Parallel pin
D: Read roller No. 2
[ 13 - 20 ]
Removing the original ejection roller
E
OP
(15) Remove the resin clip [A] from the front side of the roller, and detach the bearing metal.
(16) Remove the original ejection roller [D].
B D
Rear
UR
1334
D
A
A
Front
1335
OE
1336
A B C D A
A: Resin clip
RIS
B: Timing pulley
C: Parallel pin
D: Original ejection roller
[ 13 - 21 ]
8. Removing the AF Original Guide Fence Potentiometer Assembly
E
(1)Open the AF unit.
(2)Detach the stage-cover assembly [A] by removing screws (M3 x 10+Plastic washer: 2 pcs).
(3)Detach the bottom cover [B] by removing screw (M4 x 6: 1 pc).
(4)Unplug connector, and remove the AF originial guide fence potentiometer assembly [E] by
OP
removing screws (M3 x 10: 2 pcs).
• Before putting back the potentiometer assembly, slide the original guide fences [C] to the innermost
(closed) position, and rotate the gear [D] of the potentiometer assembly in the counterclockwise
direction all the way. Then rotate it back one tooth and mount the potentiomenter assembly back on
the AF unit.
• After the assembly is back on the AF unit, activate test mode No. 3045 [AF-guide min.-width VR
value] with the original guide fence closed all the way. Then activate test mode No. 3046 [AF-guide
max.-width VR value] with the original guide fence opened wide all the way.
UR A B
OE
1346 1347
CLOSE
RIS
CLOSE
1348 1349
C D E
1. Close the original guides all the way in.

A: Stage cove assembly
2. Rotate the potentiometer in the counterclockwise
B: Bottom cover
direction all the way.
C: Original guide fence
3. Then return it in the clockwise direction for one tooth
D: Gear
and join the gears, and screw it back on the AF unit.
E: Potentiometer assembly
[ 13 - 22 ]
Adjustment
E
Test chart No.11
1. AF Scan Start-Position Adjustment
Checks and procedure
OP
(1) Place A3 size printing paper on the paper feed tray. Make 1 to
1 size master using test chart No.11 on the AF unit, and make
prints.
(2) Examine the prints to confirm that the scanning start position
is at 5 mm ± 2 mm on the top vertical scale on the test chart
No.11 printed image.
(3) If the scanning start position does not fall within above
specification, make an adjustment using test mode No.3073
(AF Scan Start Position Adjustment).
1351
2.
UR
AF Horizontal-Scan Position Adjustment
1 size master using test chart No.14 on the AF unit.
Test chart No.14
(2) Examine the master created on the print drum, and confirm
that the “e” images on the left and right of the original is not
OE
missing on the created master.
(3) If not all the “e” images are made on the master, make
adjustment using test mode No.3072 (AF Horizontal Scan
Position Adjustment).
1352
3. AF Read Pulse-Motor Speed Adjustment (Elongation & Shrinkage)

RIS

Test chart No.11
1 size master using test chart No.11 on the AF unit, and make
prints.
(2) Lay the print on top of the original to confirm that the image
elongation or shrinkage is within ±1.0% at the 350-mm line of
the test chart image.
(3) If the elongation and shrinkage does not fall within this
specification, make an adjustment using test mode No.3074
(AF Scanning Speed Adjustment).
* Prior to adjustment, adjust the image elongation and
shrinkage by first adjusting the write pulse-motor
speed (see chapter 14).
1350
[ 13 - 23 ]
4. AF Original Guide Fence Potentiometer Adjustment
E
Adjustment
(1) Slide the original guide fence to the innermost (closed) position, and run test mode No. 3045 [AF-
guide min.-width VR value].
(2) Then slide the original guide fence to the outermost (opened) position, and run test mode No.
OP
3046 [AF-guide max.-width VR value].
UR
5. AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
Adjustment
(1) Without an original, execute Test Mode No. 3044 [AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment]. This will automatically adjust the sensitivity of the sensor.
* This adjustment must be made after replacing the sensor.
OE
RIS
[ 13 - 24 ]
Chapter 14 Master Making Section
E
Contents
OP
Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. 14-2
1. Overview of Master Making Section ........................................................................................ 14-2
2. Master Making Unit Transport Mechanism .............................................................................. 14-4
3. Thermal Print Head Elevation Operation ................................................................................ 14-5
4. Master Setting Operation ........................................................................................................ 14-6
5. Master Cutting Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 14-7
6. Master-making Operation ....................................................................................................... 14-8
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
UR
Disassembly ............................................................................................................................... 14-9
1. Removing the Master Making Unit .......................................................................................... 14-9
Removing the Master Making Unit Drawer Cover Safety Switch .......................................... 14-11
Removing the Thermal Print Head Assembly ........................................................................ 14-12
Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor ................................................................................ 14-13
Removing the Write Pulse Motor and Write Roller ................................................................ 14-14
Removing the Cutter Unit ...................................................................................................... 14-15
7. Removing the First Clamp Unit ............................................................................................. 14-17
8. Removing the Master Making Unit Transport Pulse Motor .................................................... 14-18
OE
9. Removing the Master Detection Sensor and Master End Sensor (Light Emitter) ................. 14-19
Adjustment ............................................................................................................................... 14-20

1. Clamp Range Adjustment ..................................................................................................... 14-20
2. Write Start Position Adjustment ............................................................................................. 14-20
3. Master-making Image Elongation and Shrinkage Adjustment ............................................... 14-20
4. Horizontal Write Position Adjustment .................................................................................... 14-21
5. Thermal Print Head Heating Value Setting ............................................................................ 14-21
6. Master Making Unit Stop Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 14-21
7. Master Cut Length Adjustment (Master Cut Angle) ............................................................... 14-22
8. Master Making Length Adjustment ........................................................................................ 14-22
9. Master Positioning Sensor Adjustment ................................................................................. 14-22
RIS
[14-1]
Mechanism
E
1. Overview of Master Making Section
Thermal print head
OP
Master end sensor (light receiver)
Thermal pressure motor
TPH pressure sensor
Master positioning sensor
Master loading roller

UR
Master stocker fan
Load roller (bottom)
Load roller (top) Master stocker roller (top)
Master stocker roller
(bottom)
Write roller
OE
Master making unit sensor
1401
Load pulse motor
RIS
Master roll
Cutter motor Cutter
Write pulse motor Master detection sensor & master end sensor
(light emitter)
1) Master making unit setting detection mechanism

The master making unit sensor checks the master making unit for appropriate settings. If the master
making unit is set correctly, the master setting operation is initiated.
2) Master end detection
The end of the master roll is confirmed when the master end sensor detects the black end mark
attached to the tail end of the mater material on the master roll.
The master end sensor checks every 10 ms while the master is being transported, and the indication
[C02-200] is displayed when the end mark is detected twice in succession.
[14-2]
3) Master making unit drawer cover setting detection mechanism

Since the flatbed section cannot be opened or closed, the master making unit can be pulled out to
replace the master roll.
E
To pull out the master making unit, press the master making unit release button, move the master
making unit to the pull-out position, and open the master making unit drawer cover.
If the master making unit is at a position other than the pull-out position, the master making unit
drawer cover is locked by the hook stopper. Moving the master making unit to the pull-out position
OP
applies pressure to the hook stopper and unlocks the cover.
The master making unit drawer cover safety switch checks whether the master making unit drawer
cover is closed.
When the master making unit drawer cover safety switch is OFF, the main motor, first clamp motor,
second clamp motor, first master disposal motor, second master disposal motor, first master com-
pression motor, second master compression motor, first horizontal pulse motor, second horizontal
pulse motor, cutter motor, and master making unit transport pulse motor cannot be switched ON.
UR
OE
This section presses
against the hook stopper.
RIS
Master making unit

release button 1402
Master making unit drawer cover

Hook stopper
[14-3]
2. Master Making Unit Transport Mechanism
E
During master-making, the master making unit is moved to the print drum side where the master is to be
made.
If the master roll has been replaced, the master making unit moves to the master making unit pull-out
position.
The master making unit transport pulse motor moves the master making unit. The position of the master
OP
making unit is confirmed by the first master making unit position sensor, second master making unit
position sensor, and master making unit pull-out position sensor.
The master making unit is initially positioned on the first print drum side.
First master making unit

Master making unit position sensor
transport pulse motor
UR Second master making

unit position sensor
Master making unit
pull-out position sensor
OE
RIS
1403
[14-4]
3. Thermal Print Head Elevation Operation
E
When the machine is on standby or when it is loading the master onto the print drum after master-mak-
ing, the print thermal head is raised and moved away from the write roller. During master-making and
master transfer operation, the thermal print head is lowered so that it firmly contacts the write roller.
The thermal print head is raised or lowered by the rotation of the eccentric pressure cam, which is turned
by the thermal pressure motor.
OP
The eccentric pressure cam moves the TPH bracket up and down as it rotates.
The stop position of the vertical movement of the motor is detected by the TPH pressure sensor, whose
light path is blocked by the sensor disc.
If power is ON or if an all-reset operation is initiated, initialization commences, and the thermal print head
is set in a position (elevated position) from which it does not apply pressure.
Sensor disc Eccentric pressure cam TPH bracket
TPH pressure sensor
UR
OE
Thermal print head
Write roller
1404
<< Thermal print head at pressure release position >>

RIS
1405
<< Thermal print head in pressure applying condition >>

[14-5]
4. Master Setting Operation
E
The master setting operation described below occurs when the master making unit cover is opened or
closed and the master making unit sensor switches ON.
First, the thermal print head is set to the pressure-applying position, and the write pulse motor rotates to
feed the master (the write pulse motor rotates the write roller and master stocker roller (bottom) to trans-
port the master). When the master positioning sensor switches ON, the motor halts.
OP
Next, the thermal print head is elevated to release pressure, and the write pulse motor rotates again to
feed the master. Once the master is transported 20 mm, the motor halts. (master feed skew adjustment)
The thermal print head returns to the pressure-applying position, and the write pulse motor rotates in
reverse. After the master positioning sensor switches from ON to OFF, the motor halts when the master is
moved back 5 mm (master front end position adjustment: distance of return action set in Test Mode No.
540), and the thermal print head is elevated to release pressure.
The following operation occurs after the master-cutting operation:
The thermal print head moves to the pressure-applying position, and the write pulse motor rotates in the
feed direction. When the master positioning sensor switches ON, the write pulse motor rotates in reverse.
After the master positioning sensor switches from ON to OFF, the motor stops when the master is moved
pressure.
UR
back 5 mm (master front end position adjustment), and the thermal print head is elevated to release
Cutter unit
Thermal print head
OE
1406
Write roller
Master stocker roller (bottom)

RIS
[14-6]
5. Master Cutting Mechanism
E
The master is cut by the rotating blade on the cutter unit operated by the cutter motor. The cutter motor
rotates in only one direction.
The cutter home position switch checks the position of the rotating blade. When the cutter is at the home
position, the cutter home position switch cannot be pressed.
After the cutter motor begins rotating, the cutter home position switch can be pressed. When the switch
OP
cannot be pressed, the cutter motor halts.
Cutter home position switch
UR
OE
1407
Rotating blade
RIS
1408
Cutter motor
[14-7]
6. Master-making Operation
E
Described below is the series of operations from master-making to loading masters onto the print drum.
(1) At the start of master-making, the thermal print head moves to the pressure-applying position,
causing the thermal print head and the write roller to clamp the master. The write pulse motor rotates
to feed the master to the master positioning sensor.
OP
(2) The write pulse motor rotates in reverse to move the master back by the set length from the master
positioning sensor, and the machine waits for scanning preparations to complete.
(3) When the master-making operation is ready to start, the load pulse motor and the write pulse motor
rotate to feed the master to the master loading standby position, and writing begins immediately.
(4) Slightly before the master reaches the master loading standby position, the master stocker fan will
begin operating. When the master reaches the master loading standby position, the load pulse motor
halts and the produced master is sent to the stocker room.
(5) When the print drum is ready to clamp the master, the load pulse motor rotates to move the leading
UR
edge of the master to the clamp plate base, after which the master clamp operation takes place.
(6) When writing is completed, the thermal print head lifts to release pressure, and the print drum rotates
to wrap the master around the print drum.
Thermal print head

OE
Master stocker fan
1409
Master loading roller
Write roller
RIS
Master stocker roller (bottom)
Load roller
[14-8]
Disassembly
E
1. Removing the Master Making Unit
(1) Pull out the master making unit, switch off power, and remove the covers.
• Cover top (upper right) (bind, M4 x 8, 6 pcs; note that one screw secures the bottle cap holder)
OP
• Master making unit inner cover (front) (bind, M3 x 6, 3 pcs)
• Master making unit inner cover (rear) (bind, M3 x 6, 3 pcs)
(2) Unplug the four ribbon cable connectors from the MMR-PCB, open the cable band, remove the cable
guide (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc), and move the ribbon cable out of the way toward the rear.
Cover (bottle cap holder)
Cover (upper right)
Master making unit

inner cover (front)
UR Master making unit
inner cover (rear)
OE
1410
MMR-PCB Ribbon cables (4 pcs) Cable band

RIS
Cable guide
1411
[14-9]
(3) Remove the shoulder screw from the front side and the snap ring from the rear side, and dismount
the master making unit from the paper receiving tray side.
E
OP
1413
1412
<< Cautions in installation >>

UR
• Do not loosen the screws on either side of the master making
unit at the locations indicated in the photo on the right.
The mounting positions of these screws were correctly adjusted
1414
at the factory.
OE
(Master making unit skew adjustment)
Do not loosen these screws.
1415
• When installing the master making unit, adjust the engagement

of the gears (shown in the photo on the right) on the front and
rear sides to ensure that the master making unit is not tilted.
As shown in the photo below, make sure that the sheet metal on
the main unit side and the sheet metal on the master making unit
are parallel.
RIS
1416
With the unit inserted into the

installation position, make sure that
these two sheet metal pieces are
parallel.
If the gears are displaced by a single
tooth, a deviation of 2 to 3 mm will
result.
1417
[14-10]
2. Removing the Master Making Unit Drawer Cover Safety Switch
E
(1) Pull out the master making unit and switch off power.
(2) Remove the cover front (right).
(3) Unplug the connector, and dismount the switch. (with washer, M3 x 14, 2 pcs)
OP
UR 1418
OE
RIS
[14-11]
3. Removing the Thermal Print Head Assembly
E
(2) Disconnect the ground wire by loosening the screw (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc).
(3) Open the master making unit (top) cover.
(4) Detach the master making unit (bottom) cover. (bind, M3 x 6, 2 pcs)
OP
Master making unit (top)
cover
Ground wire
1419 UR Master making unit (bottom)

cover
(5) Remove the connector cover (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc) and unplug the connectors at two locations.
(6) Detach the snap ring and remove the return-prevention spring and bearing metal.
(7) Remove the bearing metal at the back side from the TPH bracket and dismount the thermal print
head assembly.
OE
After replacing the thermal print head, adjust the thermal print head heating value.
Connectors
RIS
Thermal print head
1420
Snap ring
Connector cover
Bearing metal
Return-prevention spring
Bearing metal
1421
TPH bracket
1422
[14-12]
4. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor
E
(2) Dismount the thermal print head assembly.
(3) Remove the thermal pressure gear cover. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 4 pcs)
(4) Detach the thermal pressure springs from both sides.
(5) Detach the E-rings and bearing metal pieces from both sides and remove the TPH fulcrum shaft.
OP
(6) Unplug the connector of the motor and sensor, remove the screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), and
dismount the thermal pressure motor assembly.
Thermal pressure gear cover
UR 1423
OE
Thermal pressure springs
RIS
1424
Thermal pressure motor TPH fulcrum shaft
[14-13]
5. Removing the Write Pulse Motor and Write Roller
E
(2) Unplug the connector, remove the reusable band and mounting screws (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs), and
dismount the write pulse motor assembly.
OP
When installing the write pulse motor assembly, be sure to correctly adjust the belt tension.
Reusable band Connector
UR Write pulse motor
1425
OE
(3) Remove the pulley from the write roller. (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
(4) Remove the write bracket (front). (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs)
(5) Pull out the write roller through the hole in the side plate and remove.
Platen bracket (front)

RIS
Pulley Write roller
1427
1426
[14-14]
6. Removing the Cutter Unit
E
(1) Dismount the master making unit.
• Write pulse motor assembly
• Write roller
• Pulley
OP
Write pulse motor
Write roller
1428
UR Pulley 1429
(3) Unplug the connector for the PCB bracket, bundle the wires, and remove the cutter cover assembly.
OE
Cutter cover assembly

RIS
1430
1431
<< Cutter cover assembly >>
[14-15]
(4) Unplug the connector, bundle the wires, and remove the two shoulder screws.
(5) Detach the reusable band and dismount the cutter unit.
E
When installing the cutter unit, set the unit toward the hole on the master roll side.
OP
Shoulder screws
UR Cutter unit
1432
OE
1433
<< Cutter unit >>
RIS
[14-16]
7. Removing the First Clamp Unit
E
(2) Remove first clamp sensor A together with the bracket. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
(3) Remove the clamp base plate. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 5 pcs)
Note that the spring is hooked to the clamp base plate.
OP
Clamp base plate
UR Mounting screws
1434
OE
(4) Pull out the clamp transport cam (1) and the clamp cam (1).
(5) Remove the snap ring and pull out the pulley.
(6) Dismount the first clamp motor. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
Snap ring Pulley First clamp motor

RIS
Clamp transport cam (1) Clamp cam (1)
[14-17]
8. Removing the Master Making Unit Transport Pulse Motor
E
(2) Remove the mounting screw from the black pulley and slide the pulley toward the gear side to move
it out of the way.
(3) Remove the white pulley. (with double-washer, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
(4) Unplug the connector and dismount the motor. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 2 pcs)
OP
UR
1436
OE
Master making unit transport pulse motor Remove this screw. Move the pulley toward the outside
to move it out of the way.
RIS
[14-18]
9. Removing the Master Detection Sensor and Master End Sensor

(Light Emitter)
E
(2) Open the master making unit cover and remove the master roll.
(3) Remove the transport shaft brackets from the front and rear sides. (RS tight, M3 x 6, 3 pcs each)
OP
Transport shaft brackets
1437 1438
UR
<< Rear side >>
<< Front side >>
(4) Remove the screws on the front and rear sides of the shaft of the set guide plate (B). (RS tight, M3 x
OE
6, 2 pcs)
(5) Remove the shaft together with the set guide plate (B).
* Gently push aside the side plate and pull out the shaft.
* The front side of the shaft has a D-shape cut. Check the shaft position when installing.
Set guide plate (B)
RIS
Shaft
1439
(6) Unplug the connector and dismount the sensor. (bind, M3 x 6, 1 pc)
1440
[14-19]
Adjustment
E
1. Clamp Range Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedure

(1) On the master, mark the end face position at the center of the clamp plate.
OP
(2) Measure the length from the marked position to the leading edge of the master at the center of the
master, confirming that the length measured is 18 mm ± 1 mm.
(3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 543 (Master-
clamp-range adjustment) and make adjustments.
* Increasing the set value increases the master clamp force. Setting increments: 1 (0.1 mm)
2. Write Start Position Adjustment
UR
(2) Remove the master from the clamp plate and measure the distance from the leading edge of the
master to the write start position at the center of the master, confirming that the length measured is
63 mm ± 0.5 mm.
(3) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 541 (Write start-
position adjustment) and make adjustments.
* Increasing the set value will move up the write start position on the master. (The distance between the
leading edge of the master and the write start position becomes shorter.) Setting range: 1 (0.1 mm)
* When adjusting the write start position, make sure that the master clamp range is within the range of
standard values.
OE
3. Master-making Image Elongation and Shrinkage Adjustment

(1) Run Test Mode No. 81 (Test Print B (Crossed Lines)).
(2) Make two prints. Place them in such way that the vertical print position of the first print is positioned
on the right side and the vertical print position of the second print is at the top. Align the right sides of
the prints, confirming that image elongation or shrinkage is less than ±1%.
(Example: If the length is 400 mm, image elongation or shrinkage should be less than ±4 mm.)
making speed adjustment) and make adjustments for the first print drum.
RIS
* Reducing the set value also reduces image size. Increasing the set value increases image size.
[14-20]
4. Horizontal Write Position Adjustment
E
(1) Run Test Mode No. 386 (Activates or deactivates center black dot setting).
(2) Without turning off power, exit Test Mode and make a master without an original on the scanner
stage glass.
(3) Pull out the print drum, confirming that the black line on the master is within 186 mm ± 1 mm of the
OP
inside of the flange on the rear side.
(4) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 1233 (TPH
master-making horizontal position adjustment) and make adjustments.
* Increasing the set value will move the horizontal write position on the master toward the rear, potentially
resulting in the image having missing portions when printed.
5. Thermal Print Head Heating Value Setting
After replacing the thermal print head, you must set the thermal print head heating value before master-
6.
making.
(1) Start Test Mode.

UR
(2) Run Test Mode No. 1234 (TPH resistance input) and enter the resistance value indicated on the
sticker affixed to the thermal print head.
(3) Press the Reset key to return to normal mode.
Master Making Unit Stop Position Adjustment

OE
(1) Remove the cover (front upper), the cover (front left), and the cover (front right).
(2) Run Test Mode No. 483 (Master-making Unit Positioning), confirming that the center of the transport
shaft is within ±0.5 mm of the line connecting the stamped mark on the transport shaft retaining plate
A and the stamped mark on the side plate.
making Unit Adjustment) and make adjustments.
* If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, incorrect clamping pressure, wrinkling
of the master during loading, and incorrect master loading may result.
* Increasing the value set will move the master making unit toward the first print drum side.
RIS
[14-21]
7. Master Cut Length Adjustment (Master Cut Angle)
E
(1) Measure the length of the tail-end margin (distance from the end of the opening to the tail edge of the
master) on the master loaded on the print drum, confirming that length is 9 mm ± 1.5 mm.
(2) If the measurement deviates from the range of standard values, start Test Mode No. 544 (Master cut
length adjustment) and make adjustments.
OP
* Increasing the value set will increase the total length of each master.
8. Master Making Length Adjustment

(2) Peel the master from the print drum. Measure the length of the master-making area, confirming that
this value is 413 mm.
9.
UR
making length adjustment) and make adjustments.
* Increasing the value set increases the master-making area.
Master Positioning Sensor Adjustment
After replacing the master positioning sensor, perform the following adjustment:

(1) Pull out the master making unit. Rewind the master if a master is set.
(2) Remove the master making unit cover (front).
OE
(3) Connect a multimeter to pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of the connector (CN11) for the master
making unit PCB.
(4) Confirm that the voltage is 1.0 V ± 0.2 V.
(5) If the measured voltage deviates from the range of standard values, turn VR1 and VR2 fully clock-
wise.
(6) Turn the VR1 (coarse adjustment) counterclockwise until the voltage reaches approximately 2 V.
(7) Turn the VR2 (fine adjustment) counterclockwise until the voltage is within the range of standard
values (1.0 V ±0.2 V).
RIS
[14-22]
Chapter 15 Test Mode
E
Contents
OP
1. Operating Method ................................................................................................................... 15-2
1) Launching Test Mode ....................................................................................................... 15-2
2) Operation ......................................................................................................................... 15-2
3) Ending Test Mode ............................................................................................................ 15-2
2. Testing Methods ...................................................................................................................... 15-3
3. System Panel Test Mode ........................................................................................................ 15-4
4. Imaging/Scanning Test Mode .................................................................................................. 15-9
5. Master-making/Disposal Test Mode ...................................................................................... 15-12
UR
6. Paper Feed/Eject Test Mode ................................................................................................. 15-16
7. Print Drum/Print Adjustment Test Mode ................................................................................ 15-20
8. Protected Area Test Mode ..................................................................................................... 15-26
9. Test Mode for Optional Unit (AF) ........................................................................................... 15-29
10. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Job Separator) ......................................................................... 15-31
11. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Storage Memory) ..................................................................... 15-32
12. Test Mode for Optional Unit (LBP) ........................................................................................ 15-33
OE
RIS
[15-1]
1. Operating Method
E
1) Launching Test Mode
To start Test Mode, switch on power while simultaneously pressing the < > and < > keys for first
print drum position adjustment on the operation panel. This sets the machine in Test Mode standby
status.
OP
2) Operation
A Test Mode No. can be entered (selected) via keys or by selecting from the menu.
a) Using keys
(1) When the machine is in standby status, enter a desired Test Mode No. using the ten-key
pad. To correct input, press the < C > key and press the desired key.
(2) Press the Start key to start Test Mode operations.
(3) Press the Stop or Start key to exit Test Mode operations and to set the machine in non-
operating or standby status.
b) Selecting from the menuUR

* When parameters are being set, pressing the Start key after changing data registers the input
data and sets the machine in standby status. Pressing the Stop key cancels the setting and
places the machine in standby.
(1) When the machine is in the standby status, select a unit from the Test Mode menu that
includes the test item to be executed.
* Press with a finger on the name of a desired unit on the LCD screen. (This highlights the
selected unit name.)
* The screen displays the Test Mode sub-menu.
(2) Select the test item to be executed from the Test Mode sub-menu.
OE
* Press with a finger on Test Mode operations on the LCD screen. (This highlights the
selected test name.)
(3) Press the Start key to start the Test Mode operations.
(4) Press the Stop or Start key to exit Test Mode and set the machine in non-operating or
standby status.
* When parameters are being set, pressing the Start key after changing data registers the data
and sets the machine in standby status. Pressing the Stop key cancels the setting and places
the machine in standby.
3) Ending Test Mode
When the machine is in Test Mode standby status or in Test Mode non-operating status, depress the
Reset key for 1 or more seconds to exit Test Mode.
RIS
[15-2]
2. Testing Methods
E
1) Sensor/switch check
The statuses of the sensors and switches are indicated by a buzzer.

• Detecting condition: The buzzer beeps at intervals of 0.1 seconds (quick successive beeps)
• Non-detecting condition: The buzzer beeps at intervals of 0.5 seconds (slightly-prolonged succes-
OP
sive beeps)
2) Motor/solenoid check
Pressing the Start key switches the motor/solenoid ON. Pressing the Start or Stop keys halts the
motor/solenoid.
* Note that since error checks are not performed during operations, the moving section may become
locked at a limit position if one is set.
3) Unit operation check
(1) Press the Start key to operate the unit. In general, ordinary error checks will be performed.
4) Data clear
UR
Some units will stop after completing a series of operations, while others continue operating until
a key (Stop key or Start key) is pressed.
(2) An error will result in a continuous buzzer sound. Press the Reset key to clear the error.
Press the Start key to start the operation. The screen will display <In Action>. After a brief period
during which this indication is displayed, the operation halts automatically, and the screen displays
<End>.
5) Data check
OE
Press the Start key to display settings and parameters.
* Set values are displayed but cannot be changed during data check operation.
(6) Data set
(1) Pressing the Start key to change the currently displayed settings and parameters.
(2) Change the data using the ten-key pad. Use the < * > key to switch between +/- indications.
(3) After changing a set value, press the Start key to register the data. The machine will enter
standby status. Pressing the Stop key cancels the setting and places the machine in standby.
* Entering a value outside the permissible range will return the setting to the default value. Entering a
value incompatible with the setting unit will return the setting to the default value.
RIS
[15-3]
3. System Panel Test Mode
E
Print drum
No. Sensor/switch Detecting condition
changeover
0001 Wakeup Key The key pressed. –
0002 Solenoid Counter Connection Signal The solenoid counter is connected. –
0003 24V A output signal 24V-A ON (there is a 24V output) –
OP
0004 24V B output signal 24V-B ON (there is a 24V output) –
0005 Rear Cover Safety SW Switch ON (main unit rear cover is installed) –
Print drum
No. Motor/solenoid Remarks
changeover
0062 Wakeup LED The LED illuminates. –
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
Test Print A (Checkered)
0080 A
Creates a master with Test Pattern 1 (Checkered).
Test Print B (Crossed Lines)
0081 A
0082
0083
0084
0085
0087
Test Print C (Dot 1)
UR
Creates a master with Test Pattern 2 (Crossed Lines).
Creates a master with Test Pattern 4 (Dot 1).

Test Print D (Dot 2)
Creates a master with Test Pattern 5 (Dot 2).
Test Print E (Dot 1 + Crossed Lines)
Creates a master with Test Pattern 6 (Dot 1 + Crossed Lines).
Test Print F (Dot 2 + Crossed Lines)
Creates a master with Test Pattern 7 (Dot 2 + Crossed Lines).
Paper-Feed Test (continuous feeding)
Prints continuously.
* The Speed key is enabled.
A
A
* If the rear cover safety switch is OFF, the operation begins when the rear cover safety switch
OE
is turned ON within 10 seconds after the START key is turned ON.
Low-Speed Printing Operation
0088 A
Prints continuously at 15 rpm.
Unit Initialization
0094 Returns mechanical moving units to their home positions. (scanner, thermal print head, –
compression plate, clamp units, vertical print position, printing pressure)
System Configuration Data Output
0095 B
Creates a master for CI system data.
System Parameter & Error Record Print
0097 Creates a master of the list of data setting changes and error history. B
* The master is created by the first print drum.
RIS
(Note) Meaning of symbols used in the <Print drum changeover> column in the Test Mode chart.
A : <First print drum side>, <second print drum side>, or <both first and second print drums> can
be selected.
B : <First print drum side> or <second print drum side> can be selected.
– : Irrelevant for print drum.
[15-4]
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
E
Machine Clock Activation
0101 Writes the time information set in Test No. 0171 to No. 0173 to the RTC and starts the time count. –
Pressing the Start key begins the operation and automatically stops it after 0.5 seconds.
DSP Download (Main, Secondary)
0102 Pressing the Start key begins download of the DSP program for controlling the main motor and –
second paper feed.
OP
Print drum
No. Data clear Details
changeover
Normally, when a paper jam occurs, the error can be
cleared only by following the jam reset procedure and
removing the cause of the jam. However, this setting
0110 Clearing Jam Status Data –
will force an error caused by jamming to be cleared.
Note that errors involving consumables cannot be
cleared.
Clears data (memory function, programs, properties
settings, etc.) in the user area (data returned to
0111 Clearing User Memory default values). –
0112
Memory UR
Clearing Normal Area Test-Mode Data
0113 Maintenance Count Clear (master making)
0114 Maintenance Count Clear (printing)

* Be sure to record all data before executing this
function.
Returns all settings stored in the main unit FRAM and
main unit EEPROM in the Test Mode to their default
values.
* Does not clear data in protected areas.
* Be sure to record all data before executing this
function.
Resets the maintenance master counter in
maintenance call message.
Resets the maintenance copy counter in
–
–
Resets the maintenance print-drum print counter in
OE
0115 Maintenance Count Clear (print drum) B
Initializes the user business type setting, basic
0116 Setup Wizard Initialize screen setting, and mode transition system selection. –
(There is no need to reset the clock.)
Returns all settings stored in the print drum EEPROM
in the Test Mode to their default values.
Clearing Normal Area Test-Mode Data
0117 * Does not clear data in protected areas. B
Memory
* Be sure to record all the data before executing
this function.
Print drum
No. Data check Content of display
changeover
Displays a list of Test Mode Nos. and settings for
non-default items in the values set.
0120 System Parameter Adjustment Record –
* Items with Nos. from 1200 to 1299 are not
RIS
displayed.
Displays the error codes (D**) for the switches
0121 SW Action Record causing operation shutdown. –
* Displays the eight most recent error codes.
Displays a list of error codes for errors (error type: T,
0122 Error Record A, B) previously generated in normal mode. –
* Displays the 64 most recent error codes.
0123 Maintenance Count Displays the values for all maintenance counters. –
Displays a list of all connected peripherals or optional
0126 Optional Configuration Check –
equipment (AF, ST sorter, NIC).
[15-5]
Print drum
changeover
E
Identifies and displays a paper ID determined based
on information from the paper width potentiometer and
paper size detection sensor.
* Paper IDs and paper sizes
00: No paper 02: B4
01: A3 04: A4 landscape
OP
03: A4 06: B5 landscape
05: B5 08: A5 landscape
07: A5 10: B6 landscape
Paper size on feed tray is displayed by ID 09: B6 12: Postcard landscape
0135 –
numbers. 11: Postcard 14: Legal
13: Ledger 16: Letter landscape
15: Letter
17: Statement
18: Statement landscape
19: Foolscap
50: Paper size undefined 1 (paper size detection
sensor: ON)
No.
0143
Maintenance-Master Count Entry
Description
Setting
UR 51: Paper size undefined 2 (paper size detection
sensor: OFF)
Data setting
Sets the number of masters at which the maintenance call message is displayed.
Setting range: 0 to 9999 (x 100) sheets
Setting unit: 1 (x 100) sheets
Default: 0 sheet
Maintenance-Copy Count Entry
Print drum
changeover
Description Sets the number of prints at which the maintenance call message is displayed.
0144 –
OE
Setting Setting unit: 1 (x 1000) sheets
Default: 0 sheet
Maintenance-Drum Meter Entry
Sets the number of print-drum pressurizing times at which the maintenance call
Description
message is displayed (data stored in print drum PCB).
0145 B
Setting Setting unit: 1 (x 1000) sheets
Default: 0 sheet
Print Quantity Reset Setting
Sets whether the print count value is reset or not when continuous print is set to OFF.
0150 Description –
Setting range: 0 (Reset disabled), 1 (Reset enabled)
Setting
Default: 0 (Reset disabled)
Print Speed After Short Interval
RIS
Enables/disables the gradual print speed acceleration operation.

Setting range: 0 (Disabled), 1 (Enabled)
Setting
Default: 0 (Disabled)
Master-making Speed Mode Selection
Switches between normal and high-speed master-making modes.
Setting range: 0 (Normal speed), 1 (High speed)
Setting
Default: 0 (Normal speed)
Minimum Print Quantity Control
0154 Description Enables/disables the minimum print quantity setting in the properties setting. –
Setting range: 0 (Setting change disabled), 1 (Setting change enabled)
Setting
Default: 0 (Setting change enabled)
[15-6]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Counter Action Control
Enables/disables the counters (solenoid counter, software counter). This setting is
effective until the power switch is turned OFF. Once the power switch is turned OFF,
the setting returns to default (enabled).
Setting
Default: 1 (Enabled)
OP
<Warning> Display Control
Enables/disables the display of <wrong size> warning (F02, F10, F43) at the start of
0159 Description master-making or printing. –
Setting range: 0 (Warning display disabled), 1 (Warning display enabled)
Setting
Default: 1 (Warning display enabled)
Auto Print Repeat Setting
Sets whether the print repeat setting is turned OFF or automatically reset at the end of
0160 Description print repeat. –
Setting range: 0 (Off), 1 (Reset)
Setting
Default: 0 (Off)
First Program Print Repeat Setting
0161 Description
0165
Setting
Description
Setting
OFF.
UR
Enables/disables the reset of the program setting when the print repeat setting is turned
Setting range: 0 (Reset disabled), 1 (Reset enabled)

Default: 0 (Reset disabled)
RLP Mode Switch Timing Control
Adjusts screen switching time in RLP automatic allocation.
Setting range: –5 to +5 (0 to 2.5 sec)
Setting unit: 1 (0.25 sec)
Default: 0 (1.25 sec)
Max. Print Quantity Control
–
Description Enables/disables the maximum print quantity setting; sets maximum print quantity.
0166 –
OE
Setting range: 0 to 9999 (0 to 9999 sheets)
Setting Setting unit: 1 (1 sheet)
Default: 0 (0 sheet) Maximum quantity restriction not set
Paper ID Auto-Repeat Control
Selects whether the paper size setting reverts to the default setting or the previous
Description
setting is maintained when the power is turned ON or the all-reset operation is initiated.
0167 –
Setting range: 0 (Paper size setting is maintained.)
Setting 1 (Paper size setting reverts to default value.)
Default: 0 (Paper size setting is maintained.)
Fine Adjustment Button Display Control
Description Used to display or hide the fine adjustment button.
0168 Setting range: 0 (Hidden) –
Setting 1 (Display)
Default: 0 (Hidden)
RIS
<Properties> Display Control

Description Used to display or hide the properties setting tab.
Setting 1 (Display)
Default: 1 (Display)
Consumable Storage Indication
Description Used to display or hide consumable storage items in the properties display.
Setting 1 (Display)
Default: 1 (Display)
[15-7]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Machine Clock Setting (YEAR)
Sets the <year> in the <year/month/date> setting in the RTC.
* Test Mode No. 0101 must be activated after values are entered in Test Mode No. 0171
Description
through No. 0173. Executing Test No. 0101 registers the values set in Test Mode No.
0171 through No. 0173 into the RTC.
0171 –
Setting range: 2000 to 2199 (Year 2000 to 2199)
OP
Setting unit: 1 (1 year)
Setting Default: 2000 before RTC is set (before Test No. 0101 is executed)
RTC measured value at the time of test activation after RTC is set (after Test
No. 0101 is executed)
Machine Clock Setting (MONTH & DATE)
Sets the <month/date> in the <year/month/date> setting in the RTC.
Description
0172 Setting range: Two upper digits: 01 to 12 (January to December), two lower digits: 01 to 31 –
(1st day to 31st day)
0173
Setting
Description
Setting unit: 1
UR
Default: 0101 before RTC is set (before Test No. 0101 is executed)
Machine Clock Setting (HOUR & MINUTE)
Sets <hour/minute> in the RTC.
Setting range: Two upper digits: 00 to 23 (0 to 23 o’clock), two lower digits: 00 to 59 (00 to
59 minutes)
–
Setting unit: 1
Setting
Default: 0000 before RTC is set (before Test No. 0101 is executed)
OE
Software Option Enable Control
The software option is enabled when the key code (8 digits) is entered and the Start key is
Description
0199 pressed. –
Setting range: 00000000 to 99999999
Setting Setting unit: 1
Default: 00000000
RIS
[15-8]
4. Imaging/Scanning Test Mode
E
Print drum
changeover
0200 Carriage HP sensor The scanner is at the home position. –
0201 Flatbed Original Det. Sensor Light received (original present) –
0202 Flat Bed Original Size Detection Sensor 1 Light received (original present) –
OP
0209 Compression plate open/shut sensor The original stage cover is closed. –
Print drum
changeover
0260 Scanner lamp Switches scanner lamp ON/OFF. –
Print drum
No. Unit check
0281
0284
0287
0289
No.
Carriage Home Action
UR
Returns the scanner to the home position.
Scanner Cycle Continuous Action
Repeats the scanner operation (A3 scanning, ABC enabled).
Scanner Lamp Replace Positioning
Moves the scanner to the lamp replacement position.
Scanner <Shipping> Positioning
Moves the scanner to the machine transport position.
Data setting
changeover
–
Print drum
changeover
Line-Copy Slice Level Adjustment
Adjusts the slice level for text mode (scanning density 3).
OE
Description
0340 Setting range: –16 to +16 * (<+> for reduced density) –
Default: 0
Auto Base Control (ABC) Slice Level Adjustment
Description Adjusts the slice level for text mode (auto scanning density).
Default: 0
Halftone Curve Selection (Photo)
Description Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves for photo mode.
0350 Setting range: 0 to 8 –
Default: 4
RIS
Halftone Curve Selection (Dot Photo)

Description Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves in photo & dot mode.
Default: 4
Halftone Curve Selection (Duo)
Description Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves in text/photo mode.
Default: 4
Halftone Curve Selection (Dot Duo)
Selects the matrix used as the basis for selecting halftone curves in text/photo & dot
Description
0353 mode. –
Default: 4
[15-9]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Trimming Slice Level Adjustment
Description Sets the slice level for the trimming.
Default: –2
OP
Inside-border Paint Range Setting
Sets the number of dots on the inside of the area designating border which are included in
the area specifying border for deletion from the master data in specified area separation.
Description
* Actual change takes place in the unit of <setting value x 8 dots>.
Increasing this value increases the border area to be deleted.
0362 Setting range: 0 (0 dot on the inside of border) –
1 (1 dot on the inside of border)
Setting 2 (2 dots on the inside of border)
3 (3 dots on the inside of border)
Default: 1 (1 dot on the inside of border)
Outside-border Paint Range Setting
Sets the number of dots on the outside of the area designating border which are included
0363
Description
Setting
UR
in the area specifying border for deletion from the master data in specified area separation.
Increasing this value increases the border area to be deleted.
Sets the number of dots on the outside of the area designating border which are used as a
separation border (range) in traced color separation.
Increasing this value broadens the border range (area to be separated).
Setting range: 0 (0 dot on the outside of border)
1 (1 dot on the outside of border)
2 (2 dots on the outside of border)
3 (3 dots on the outside of border)
–
Default: 1 (1 dot on the outside of border)

OE
FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjust
Adjusts the original horizontal scan position on the flatbed. A separate setting is
Description
required for AF.
0380 –
Setting range: –30 to +30 (–3.0 mm to +3.0 mm) *(<+> for adjustment left)
Setting Setting unit: 5 (0.5 mm)
Default: 0 mm
FB Scan Start Position Adjust
Description Adjusts the original scanning start position (amount of scan skip) on the flatbed.
0381 Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0 mm to +4.0 mm) *(<+> for adjustment up) –
Default: 0 mm
FB Scanning Speed Adjustment
Description Adjusts the original scanning speed on the flatbed.
RIS
0382 Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 % to +5.0 %) *(<+> to stretch) –

Setting Setting unit: 1 (0.1 %)
Default: 0 %
Activates or deactivates center black dot setting
Adds a thin black line at the center of image data on the scanned image during printing
in normal master-making and RLP output.
Description
* The thin center black line is added only when using image data scanned by the
0386 –
scanner.
Setting range: 0 (Without thin center black line)
Setting 1 (With thin center black line)
Default: 0 (Without thin center black line)
Hand-written Color Separation Pen Extraction Lower-limit Density
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for hand-written
Description
0389 color separation. –
Default: 100 (Unspecified)
[15-10]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Hand-written Color Separation Pen Extraction Upper-limit Density
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for hand-written
Description
color separation.
0390 –
Default: 220
OP
Hand-written Color Separation (Ink) Pen Extraction Lower-limit Density
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for hand-written
Description
color separation (ink).
0391 –
Default: 90
Hand-written Color Separation (Ink) Pen Extraction Upper-limit Density
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for hand-written
Description
color separation (ink).
0392 –
0393
0394
Description
Setting
Description
Default: 180
separation.
Setting unit: 1
Default: 100
UR
Red-color Separation Pen Extraction Lower-limit Density
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for red-color
Red-color Separation Pen Extraction Upper-limit Density

Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for red-color
separation.
–
–
OE
Default: 220
Specified Area Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Lower-limit Value)
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for specified area
Description
separation.
0395 –
Default: 125
Specified Area Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Upper-limit Value)
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for specified area
Description
separation.
0396 –
Default: 220
Traced Color Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Lower-limit Value)
RIS
Sets the pen extraction lower-limit density used in image processing for traced color
Description
separation.
0397 –
Default: 100
Traced Color Separation Density Extraction Threshold (Upper-limit Value)
Sets the pen extraction upper-limit density used in image processing for traced color
Description
separation.
0398 –
Default: 255
Edge Emphasis Threshold Offset
Description Sets the offset for the following Test Mode setting value.
0399 Setting range: –128 to 127 –
Default: 0
[15-11]
5. Master-making/Disposal Test Mode
E
Print drum
changeover
0400 Master-positioning sensor Light received (master detected) –
0401 Master detection sensor Light path blocked (master detected) –
0402 Master end sensor Light path blocked (master end mark detected) –
OP
0403 Cutter HP SW Switch OFF (cutter at home position) –
0406 TPH pressure sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
0407 Master-making-unit set sensor Light path blocked (master making unit cover closed) –
0410 Master-making-unit releasing button Switch ON (button depressed) –
0411 Master-making Unit Position Sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0412 Master-making Unit Pull-out Position Sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
Switch ON (master making unit cover closed)
Master-making Unit Drawer Cover Safety
0413 * The rear cover safety SW must be ON during this –
Switch
procedure.
0420 Master-disposal Jam Sensor Light received (master detected) B
0421 Master-compression HP Sensor
0423 Master-disposal BOX safety SW

UR Light path blocked (master compression plate at home
position)
Switch ON (master disposal box set in machine)
* For inspections of the first print drum side, the
rear cover safety switch and the master-making
unit drawer cover safety switch must be ON
during this procedure.
* For inspections of the second print drum side,
the rear cover safety switch, the master-making
unit drawer cover safety switch, and the first
B
master disposal box safety switch must be ON

during this procedure.
OE
0425 Master-compression motor FG sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0426 Master-removal motor FG sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
Print drum
changeover
0460 Thermal-pressure motor (CW) Rotates clockwise (CW). –
0461 Thermal-pressure motor (CCW) Rotates counterclockwise (CCW). –
0462 Write pulse motor (CW) Rotates clockwise (master feeding). –
0463 Write pulse motor (CCW) Rotates counterclockwise (master returning). –
0464 Load pulse motor (CW) Rotates clockwise (master feeding). –
0465 Load Pulse Motor CCW (Reverse) Rotates counterclockwise (master returning). –
Rotate both write pulse motor and load pulse motor in
0466 Write pulse motor + Load pulse motor (CW) –
RIS
master-feed direction.
The LED of the master-making unit release button
0467 Master-making-unit release button LED –
illuminates.
0468 Master Stocker Fan –
0470 Master removal motor (CW) Rotates to feed master into the master disposal box. B
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
Cutter motor 1 cycle motion
0480 –
Cuts the master.
Thermal pressure motor action (TPH down)
0481 –
Moves the TPH to the pressure application position.
Thermal pressure motor action (TPH up)
0482 –
Moves the thermal print head to the pressure-releasing position (i.e., moves it out of the way).
Master-making Unit Positioning
0483 B
Moves the master-making unit to the master-making position on the first or second print drum
Master-making Unit Pull-Out Position
0484 –
Moves the master-making unit to the pull-out position.
Master compression-plate home positioning
0490 B
Returns the compression plate to the home position.
[15-12]
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
E
Master compression-plate continuous movement
0493 Repeats the removed master compacting operation. B
A cycle consisting of compacting cycle action -> 3-second standby is repeated.
Cutter motor ON action (cut direction)
0494 –
Rotates the cutter motor in the cutting direction. (maximum time: 10 sec)
Print drum
OP
changeover
Displays the temperature value converted from the A/D
0521 TPH thermistor temperature data –
value of the TPH thermistor.
Displays the A/D value for the temperature around the
0522 Platen Temperature Sensor (A/D) –
write roller.
Displays the temperature value converted from the A/D
0523 Platen Temperature Sensor (°C) –
value of the temperature around the write roller.
Displays the voltage (x 100) applied to the thermal print
0524 TPH power voltage head immediately after power is supplied to the thermal –
print head.
Displays the master start date (year/month/date) stored in
the master tag.
0527 Master usage start date
No.
0540
Master Front-End Position Adjust
Description
Setting
UR * For example, <2003/2/28> is displayed by alternating
indications of <2003> and <0228>.
Data setting
Adjusts the distance of the slight return movement activated after the master positioning
sensor switches OFF to perform the incremental movement required following the
master cutting operation during master setting.
Setting range: 0 to 100 (0 mm to 10.0 mm)
Setting unit: 1 (0.1 mm)
* (<+> for return direction)
–
Print drum
changeover
Default: 50 (5.0 mm)

OE
Write start-position adjustment
Adjusts the master-making start position. (Adjusts the master stop position immediately
Description before write start operation by modifying the distance of the return movement from the
0541 master positioning sensor.) –
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment up)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Master-making length adjustment
Description Adjusts the master-making area (sub-scanning length).
0542 Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0 mm to +10.0 mm) * (<+> to increase length) –
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Master-clamp-range adjustment
Adjusts the master clamp range during master-loading.
RIS
Description
0543 Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0 mm to +10.0 mm) * (<+> to increase) B
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Master cut length adjustment
Description Adjusts the length of a single master (cutting timing).
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°)
0544 B
* (1°C = approx. 1.5 mm, <+> for increased master length)
Setting
Setting unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
[15-13]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Master-making speed adjustment
Regulates the speed of the write pulse motor to adjust image stretching/shrinkage during
Description
master-making.
0547 B
Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0% to +10.0%) * (<+> to stretch)
Setting Setting unit: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0 (0%)
OP
Write Roller Diameter Adjustment
Description Corrects differences in write roller diameters.
0548 Setting range: 2305 to 2315 (23.05 mm to 23.15 mm) –
Default: 2310 (23.10 mm)
Platen Temperature Adjustment Enable/Disable
Enables/disables automatic adjustment of image stretching/shrinkage due to
Description
expansion/contraction caused by write roller temperature fluctuations.
–
0549 Setting range: 0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
Setting 1 (Enabled)
0550
0551
Master-making Unit Adjustment
Description
Setting
Description
Default: 0 (0 mm)
UR
Default: 1 (Enabled)
Adjusts the master-making unit stop position for master-making.

Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 mm to +2.0 mm)
Master-making Unit Pull-Out Position Adjustment

Adjusts the master-making unit stop position for removal.
B
–
Setting
Default: 0 (0 mm)
OE
Master compression-limit position (maximum end position)
Description Sets the pulse count for the compacting limit position.
B
0573 Setting range: 122 to 180 (122 to 180 pulses)
(Compression plate angle from home position: 75° to 110°)
Setting
Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse)
Default: 163 pulses (Compression plate angle from home position: 100°)
Master compression duration adjustment
Sets the time (time for single cycle of compacting FG) for the detection of compacting.
Description * The compacting operation finishes when the one cycle time of the compacting FG
exceeds the set time.
0575 Setting range: 500 to 5600 (5 msec to 56 msec) B
Setting unit: 25 (0.25 msec)
Setting Default: First print drum side in A3 machine: 4100 (41msec)
Second print drum side in A3 machine: 3800 (38msec)
RIS
First print drum and second print drum sides in B4 machine: 3700 (37msec)
Master disposal box full detection position adjustment
Description Sets the pulse count for the full box compacting position.
0576 Setting range: 73 to 163 (73 to 163 pulses) B
(Compression plate angle from home position: 45° to 100°)
Setting
Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse)
Default: 162 pulses (Compression plate angle from home position: 99°)
[15-14]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Master disposal motor speed selection
Selects the master disposal motor speed table relative to master removal print drum
Description
speed.
Setting range: 0 (0.8 times the speed)
0578 1 (0.9 times the speed) B
2 (1.0 times the speed)
OP
Setting 3 (1.1 times the speed)
4 (1.2 times the speed)
Default: 3 (1.1 times the speed)
Compacting Completion Position Default Adjustment Selection
Enables/disables automatic adjustment to correct the default value of the compacting
Description completion position.
0579 * The setting value applies to both first print drum and second print drum sides. –
Setting range: 0 (Disable)
Setting 1 (Enable)
Default: 1 (Enable)
Second Master Removal Print Drum Stop Angle Adjustment
0580
Description
Setting UR
Sets the angle at which the print drum rotates in reverse and halts after the master is
released by the first clamp to permit removal of the master by the second print drum.
Setting range: –15 to +15 (–15° to +15°)
Setting unit: 1 (1°)
Default: 0 (0°)
* Position rotated 16° in reverse from the B-position of the second print drum
–
OE
RIS
[15-15]
6. Paper Feed/Eject Test Mode
E
Print drum
changeover
0600 Paper detection sensor Light received (paper detected) –
0601 Paper-size detection sensor Light received (paper detected) –
0602 Elevator upper-limit sensor A Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
OP
0603 Elevator upper-limit sensor B Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
0604 Elevator lower-limit sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
0605 Paper sensor Light path blocked (paper detected) –
0606 Paper-ejection sensor Light received (paper detected) –
0607 Paper-feed-tray upper safety SW Switch ON (button depressed) –
Switch ON (button depressed)
0608 Paper-feed-tray lower safety SW * The paper feed tray upper safety SW must be –
ON during this procedure.
0609 Paper-feed tray elevation button Switch ON (button depressed) –
0610 Remaining Paper Volume Sensor A Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
0612 Paper-ejection FG sensor

0614 Paper-feed pressure sensor
0615 Registration Sensor
0617 Central Transport Sensor

UR
0611 Remaining Paper Volume Sensor B
0616 Guide Roller Release Home Position Sensor
0618 Paper Ejection Wing Home Position Sensor

0619 Second Paper Feed Motor FG Sensor
0620 Central Flap Home Position Sensor
Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate)
Light path blocked (paper detected)
Light path blocked (paper detected)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Print drum
OE
changeover
0660 Paper ejection motor –
0661 Suction fan –
0662 Separation fan –
0663 Second Paper Feed Motor –
0664 Central Suction Fan –
0665 First Separation Fan –
0666 Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor (CW) –
0667 Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor (CCW) –
0668 Feed Tray Button LED The LED illuminates. –
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
RIS
Paper feed tray maximum up positioning

0681 –
Raises the paper feed tray to the paper feed position when the Start key is pressed.
Paper feed tray elevation up & down
0682 –
Repeats the paper feed tray raising and lowering operations.
Paper feed tray maximum down positioning
0683 –
Lowers the paper feed tray to the lower-limit position when the Start key is pressed.
Separation Pump Solenoid ON/OFF Action
0684 Turns the solenoid ON when the Start key is pressed. The solenoid automatically switches OFF B
after 10 seconds.
Paper Feed Reverse-rotation Solenoid ON/OFF Action
0687 Turns the solenoid ON when the Start key is pressed. The solenoid automatically switches OFF –
after 10 seconds.
Paper-feed clutch ON/OFF action
0688 Turns the clutch ON when the Start key is pressed. The clutch automatically switches OFF –
after 10 seconds.
Scraper Clutch ON/OFF Action (Optional)
0689 Turns the clutch ON when the Start key is pressed. The clutch automatically switches OFF –
after 10 seconds.
[15-16]
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
E
Guide Roller Release Motor
0702 –
Repeats nipping and releasing operations when the Start key is pressed.
Paper Ejection Wing Home Action
0703 –
Moves the paper ejection wings to the home positions.
Paper Ejection Wing Target Shift
0704 –
Moves the wings to the positions set in Test Mode No. 780.
OP
Automatic Multiple Paper Feed Adjustment
0705 One sheet of thin RISO paper must be set at the multiple paper feed sensor position during this –
procedure.
Central Flap Motor (Postcard)
0706 Repeats the flap movement between the postcard position and bottom position when the Start key –
is pressed.
Central Flap Motor (Normal)
0707 –
Repeats the flat movement between the top and bottom positions when the Start key is pressed.
Elevator motor ON action
0708 –
Rotates the elevator motor for raising operation (maximum time: 10 sec).
Automatic Registration Sensor Adjustment
0709 One sheet of thin RISO paper must be set at the registration sensor position during this –
No.
0721
No.
data
procedure.
Data check
Paper width potentiometer
0722 Multiple Paper Feed Sensor

UR
adjustment.
Content of display
Displays the paper width (mm) to the first decimal place after
Displays the A/D value of the multiple paper feed sensor (also serves
as paper sensor).
Elevator upper-limit position selection

Data setting
Print drum
changeover
Print drum
changeover
Selects the paper feed tray stop position (paper feed position).
Description In the case of <Auto>, the upper-limit position is linked to the paper feed pressure lever
OE
position. The position is fixed in settings <1> through <3>.
0740 Setting range: 0 (Auto. Linked to paper feed pressure lever position) –
1 (Normal position)
Setting 2 (Card position)
3 (Custom position)
Default: 0 (Auto. Linked to paper feed pressure lever position)
Paper-feed-clutch ON angle
Description Sets the activation angle for the paper feed clutch.
0741 Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) * (<+> for slower ON timing) –
Setting Setting unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper-feed-clutch OFF angle
Description Sets the deactivation angle for the paper feed clutch when the paper type is normal.
RIS
0742 Setting range: –100 to +100 (–10.0° to +10.0°) * (<+> for slower OFF timing) –
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper feed retries after one paper feed action on 1st paper feed area.
Description Sets the number of paper feed retry operations.
Setting range: 1 (no-paper feed processing: 1 time. No paper feed retry)
* When no-paper feed occurs once, the no-paper feed error is generated.
0743 2 (no-paper feed processing: 2 times. One retry action) –
Setting * When no-paper feed occurs twice, the no-paper feed error is generated.
3 (no-paper feed processing: 3 times. Two retry actions)
* When no-paper feed occurs three times, the no-paper feed error is
Default: 1 (no-paper feed processing: 1 time. No paper feed retry)
Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle (card)
Description Sets the deactivation angle for the paper feed clutch when the paper type is <CARD>.
Default: 0 (0°)
[15-17]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Scraper Clutch ON Angle
Description Sets the activation angle for the scraper clutch.
Default: 0 (0°)
OP
Scraper Clutch OFF Angle
Description Sets the deactivation angle for the scraper clutch.
Default: 0 (0°)
FP Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle
Description Sets the activation angle for the paper feed clutch for proof print.
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper feed jam detection angle. (Paper IN)
0751
0752
Description
Setting
UR
Sets the detection angle for paper feed jam (paper feed IN).
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper feed jam detection angle. (Paper OUT)
Description
Setting
* (<+> for slower detection timing)
Sets the detection angle for paper feed jam (paper feed OUT).
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper receiving jam detection angle. (Paper IN)
* (<+> for slower detection timing)
–
Description Sets the detection angle for paper ejection jam (paper ejection IN).
0753 –
OE
Setting range: –500 to +500 (–50.0° to +50.0°) * (<+> for slower detection timing)
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper receiving jam detection angle. (Paper OUT)
Description Sets the detection angle for paper ejection jam (paper ejection OUT).
0754 Setting range: –500 to +500 (–50.0° to +50.0°) * (<+> for slower detection timing) –
Default: 0 (0°)
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Proof-Print)
Description Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for proof print.
Setting range:
0755 0 (3.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (3.4 times the circumferential speed) –
Setting 2 (3.7 times the circumferential speed), 3 (4.0 times the circumferential speed)
RIS
4 (4.5 times the circumferential speed)

Default: 1 (3.4 times the circumferential speed)
Paper-ejection motor speed adjustment (Print speed No.1)
Description Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for print speed No. 1.
Setting range:
Setting range:
[15-18]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Setting range:
0758 0 (1.1 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.3 times the circumferential speed)
–
OP
Setting range:
0759 0 (1.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.1 times the circumferential speed)
–
Setting range:
0760
0761
Setting
Description
Setting
UR
0 (1.0 times the circumferential speed), 1 (1.1 times the circumferential speed)
Paper-feed-clutch ON angle (Adjustment 1)
Sets the speed of the paper ejection motor for high-speed printing.
Setting range:
–
Paper Ejection Wing Position Adjustment

OE
Description Sets the adjustment value for the amount of paper ejection wing motion.
0779 Setting range: –20 to +20 (–20 to +20 pulses) –
Setting Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse)
Default: 0 (0 pulse)
Paper Ejection Wing Target Position
Sets the positions of the paper ejection wings when the custom paper ejection position
Description is selected.
0780 This setting is reflected in the operation set in Test Mode No. 704. –
Setting range: 0 to 2150 (0 to 2150 pulses)
Setting Setting unit: 1 (1 pulse)
Default: 1434 (1434 pulses)
Central Transport Jam Angle/IN
Description Adjusts the detection angle for paper input jams for the central transport sensor.
RIS

Default: 0 (0°)
Central Transport Jam Angle/OUT
Description Adjusts the detection angle for paper output jams for the central transport sensor.
Default: 0 (0°)
Separation Fan Air Volume Adjustment
Description Adjusts the air flow from the separation fan.
Setting range:
0783 0 (Airflow 55%) Power application time 25%
B
Setting 1 (Airflow 70%) Power application time 40%
2 (Airflow 86%) Power application time 65%
Default: 0 (Airflow 55%)
Central Transport Postcard Adjustment
Description Adjusts the postcard position in the center transport section.
0784 Setting range: 0 to +50 –
Setting Setting unit: 1 (0.1 sec)
Default: 5 (0.5 sec)
[15-19]
7. Print Drum/Print Adjustment Test Mode
E
Print drum
changeover
0801 Position-B sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0802 Main-motor limit sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
0803 Clamp sensor A Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
OP
0804 Clamp sensor B Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) –
0805 Print Drum FG Sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0806 Master loading sensor Light received (master detected) B
0807 Print-drum lock-position sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0808 Drive Lock Release Sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0809 Ink sensor In contact with ink B
0810 Overflow sensor In contact with ink B
0811 Ink-cartridge set SW Switch ON (button depressed) B
0812 Ink pump FG sensor Light path blocked (blocked by shield plate) B
0816 Drum free rotation SW
0818 Print-drum release button
0819 Print-drum connection signal
0820 Print-drum safety switch

0821 Front Cover Safety SW
0830 Print-Pressure HP Sensor
UR
0832 Horizontal Home Position Sensor
No. Motor/solenoid
The print drum is connected to the main unit drawer
connector.
Switch ON (print drum set in machine)
Switch ON (front cover closed)
Remarks
–
–
B
–
B
B
Print drum
changeover
0861 Main-motor action (30 rpm) –
OE
0863 Clamp-motor action (Normal direction) CCW (counterclockwise rotation) B
0864 Clamp-motor action (Opposite direction) CW (clockwise rotation) B
0866 Print-drum release SW (button) The LED illuminates. –
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
Variable print-drum rotation
0880 –
Rotates the print drum when the Speed key is enabled.
Position-A action of the print drum
0881 B
Stops the print drum at position A.
Inking motor ON action
0882 B
Operates the inking motor (maximum time: 1 sec).
Clamp home positioning action
0883 B
Returns the clamp unit to the home position.
RIS
Clamp unit cycle action (3 step cycle)

Pressing the Start key once performs a single cycle of the following operations:
<< First clamp unit >>
Step 1: Clamp home position –> Clamp open
0884 Step 2: Clamp open ｮ Position A adjustment B
Step 3: Position A adjustment –> Clamp closed (clamp at home position)
Step 1: Clamp home position –> Clamp open
Step 2: Clamp open –> Clamp closed (clamp at home position)
Drum lock solenoid ON/OFF action
0885 Pressing the Start key turns the solenoid ON. The solenoid automatically switches OFF after 10 B
seconds.
[15-20]
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
E
Pressure solenoid ON/OFF action
0886 Pressing Start key turns the solenoid ON. The solenoid automatically switches OFF after 10 B
seconds.
Print drum inking action
Performs the following operations in the sequence indicated:
1) Ink is supplied while the print drum (until the inking sensor switches ON) rotates without
OP
applying pressure.
0887 A
2) Confidential operation is executed.
3) From the time the inking sensor switches ON, the print drum rotates 10 turns while pressure
applied.
4) The print drum halts at position B.
Print drum ink-code copy
Copies information on the color and category used for ink cartridge and print drum compatibility
0890 B
from the ink cartridge tag to the print drum EEPROM.
* Wait at least two seconds after setting the ink cartridge.
Machine Position-B stop (The position in which the print drum can be removed from the machine.)
0892 B
Stops the print drum at machine B position.
Print Drum Drive Lock Release Action
0893
0894
connection position.
Master Loading Step Action UR
The horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum to the drive lock release position.
Print Drum Drive Connection Action
The horizontal pulse motor moves the print drum from the drive lock release position to the
Performs the following operations in the sequence indicated:

1) Press the Start key.
2) The master-making unit moves to the master-loading position. (first and second master-
loading positions)
3) The drive motor halts.
4) The clamp unit descends.
B
5) The print drum moves to the position A.

0895 B
6) The clamp unit position A adjustments are made.
OE
7) Master making unit transfer-motor brake is released after one minute.
8) Press the Start key.
9) The clamp unit returns to the home position.
10) Master making unit transfer-motor brake is released.
11) The print drum moves to position B, and the master-making unit moves to the home
position.
12) Pressing the Start key repeats steps 1) through 10).
Vertical-centering action
0900 Simultaneously brings both the vertical print position motor and the second paper feed unit to the –
home positions, then returns the vertical print position to the center (home position).
Vertical print position one cycle action
0901 –
Operates the vertical drive motor up and down for one cycle.
Horizontal Home Action
0902 B
Returns the print drum horizontal position to the center (home position).
RIS
Horizontal Cycle Action

0903 B
Performs a single horizontal movement cycle.
[15-21]
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
E
Print-pressure home positioning
0904 B
Returns the pressure control unit to the home position.
Print-pressure one cycle action
0905 B
Performs a single print pressure control cycle.
Pressure Roller Maintenance Position
Pressing the Start key raises the pressure roller.
OP
0906 B
* This operation is activated only if the Start key is pressed with the print drum removed and the
front cover closed.
Pressure Roller Maintenance Position Cancel
Pressing the Start key lowers the pressure roller.
0907 –
* This operation is activated only if the Start key is pressed with the print drum removed and the
front cover closed.
Print-pressure maintenance positioning
0908 Operates the pressure control pulse motor until the pressure spring removal position (-8130 B
pulses) is reached.
Print drum
changeover
0921 Print-drum angle display
0926 Ink motor FG count

UR
0923 Print-drum ink temperature display
0925 Ink remaining volume display
0928 Displays the Ink use starting date.

Displays the current print drum angle (x 10).
Displays the temperature value (°C) converted from
the A/D value of the ink thermistor.
Displays the amount of ink left in the ink cartridge as a
percent (%) value read from the ink cartridge tag.
Displays the inking motor FG count value read from
the ink cartridge tag. (1 count = 0.1 ml)
Displays the ink use start date stored in the ink
cartridge tag.
* For example, <2003/2/28> is displayed by alternating
indications of <2003> and <0228>.
B
Print drum
No. Data setting
OE
changeover
Master loading sensor detection timing adjustment
Description Adjusts the master-loading detection angle.
0940 Setting range: –200 to +100 (–20.0° to +10.0°) * (<+> for slower detection timing) B
Default: 0 (0°)
Print-drum Position-A adjustment
Description Adjusts the print drum position-A stop position.
0941 Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0° to +4.0°) * (<+> for overrun) B
Default: 0 (0°)
Print-drum position-B adjustment
Description Adjusts the print drum position-B stop position.
RIS
0942 Setting range: –40 to +40 (–4.0° to +4.0°) * (<+> for overrun) B
Default: 0 (0°)
Inking time adjustment (when over X% of ink is consumed from the ink tube.)
Sets the continuous ink sensor OFF detection time that prompts the inkless detection
Description signal if the amount of ink consumed exceeds a set percent value (value set in Test
0943 Mode No. 948) (data stored in print drum PCB). B
Setting range: 5 to 60 (5 to 60 sec)
Setting Setting unit: 1 (1 sec)
Default: 10 (10 sec)
[15-22]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Inking time adjustment (right after the ink tube is replaced)
Description signal after ink cartridge replacement (data stored in print drum PCB).
0944 * This information is recorded in the print drum EEPROM. B
Setting unit: 1 (1 sec)
OP
Setting
Ink overflow detection frequency adjustment
Sets how frequently overflow sensor detection operations are performed to determine
Description ink overflows.
0945 * This information is recorded in the print drum EEPROM. B
Setting range: 1 to 200 (1 to 200 times)
Setting Setting unit: 1 (Once)
Default: 50 (50 times)
Inking time adjustment (when under X% of ink is consumed from the ink tube.)
signal when the consumed ink volume is less than the set percentage (value set in Test
0946
0947
Description
Setting
UR
Mode No. 948) (data stored in print drum PCB).
* This information is recorded in the print drum EEPROM.
Setting unit: 1 (1 sec)
Inking drum rotation quantity (while inking) after ink tube is pulled out and put back.
Description
Setting
Specifies the number of print drum rotations to be performed after ink cartridge
removal/installation.
Setting range: 0 to 10 (0 to 10 times)
Setting unit: 1 (Once)
Default: 1 (Once)
B
Selection of X% for test modes No. 0943 and 0946.

OE
Determines the inkless detection timing switching condition (ink consumption) based on
Description
remaining ink volume.
0948 B
Setting range: 1 to 100 (1% to 100%)
Setting Setting unit: 1 (1%)
Default: 80 (80%)
Print pressure setting for Proof-read printing (black ink)
Selects the print pressure table for determining the density of the first print (using black
Description
ink).
0949 –
Setting range:
Setting 0 (very low density), 1 (low density), 2 (normal), 3 (high density), 4 (very high density)
Default: 2 (normal)
Print pressure setting for Proof-read printing (color ink)
Selects the print pressure table for determining the density of the first print (using color
Description
ink).
RIS
0950 –
Setting range:
Setting 0 (very low density), 1 (low density), 2 (normal), 3 (high density), 4 (very high density)
Default: 2 (normal)
Ink Color Code
Description Sets the color of ink to be set in the print drum (data stored in print drum PCB).
Setting range:
0 (Not specified) 65 (Blue) 66 (Blue2)
64 (Black) 68 (Blue4) 69 (Red)
67 (Blue3) 71 (Red3) 72 (Red4)
70 (Red2) 74 (Green2) 75 (Green3)
0951 73 (Green) 77 (Yellow2) 78 (Brown) B
76 (Yellow) 80 (Purple) 81 (Purple2)
Setting
79 (Brown2) 83 (Gray2) 84 (Light gray)
82 (Gray) 86 (Orange) 87 (Orange2)
85 (Light gray2) 89 (Gold2) 90 (Silver)
88 (Gold) 92 (Pink) 93 (Pink2)
91 (Silver2)
94 (Special color)
Default: 0 (Not specified)
[15-23]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Print Drum Insertion Angle Fine Adjustment
This adjustment is performed if the print drum cannot be inserted even after making the
adjustment in Test Mode No. 942 (Print-drum Position-B adjustment) (data stored in
print drum PCB).
Description
* The position-B positioning operation is based on a value equal to the sum of the
0955 B
values in Test Mode No. 942 and No. 955. This value is between –40 and +40. The
OP
same value also applies when the print drum does engage.
Default: 0 (0°)
Automatic Print Position Reset Condition Setting
Selects the condition for automatic print position reset after master-making or renewal.
* After automatic reset, a proof copy is output and the TC count is incremented.
Description
* In dual-color printing, an automatic reset is performed after master-making by both
print drums, and a proof copy is output.
0956 –
Setting range:
0 (No automatic reset) * Remains at center after master-making/renewal
0969
Vertical Print HP Position Adj
Description
Setting
UR
1 (Automatic reset only after master renewal)
2 (Automatic reset after master-making and renewal)
Default: 0 (No automatic reset)
Sets the home position offset value for the vertical print position phase difference.
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Vertical HP Paper Feed Timing Adj
* (<+> for adjustment up)
Sets the home position offset value for the vertical print position (second paper feed
–
Description
timing).
0971 B
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 to +5.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment up)
OE
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Printing pressure HP adjustment
Sets the offset value for the print pressure position (data stored in print drum PCB).
* This setting should be made only when required by the print drum.
Description
* Printing pressure HP adjustment is based on a value equal to the sum of the values in
0972 Test Mode No. 972 and No. 975. This value is between –500 and +500. B
Setting range: –500 to +500 (–5000 to +5000 pulses)
* (<+> for increased print pressure)
Setting
Setting unit: 1 (10 pulses)
Horizontal HP Adjustment (Print Drum)
Sets the offset value for the horizontal print home position (data stored in print drum
RIS
PCB).
Description * This setting should be made only when required by the print drum.
0973 * Horizontal print HP adjustments are made based on a value equal to the sum of the B
values in Test Mode No. 973 and No. 974. This value is between –20 and +20.
Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 to +2.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment left)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Horizontal HP Adjustment (Machine)
Sets the offset value for the horizontal print home position.
* This setting should be made only when required by the machine.
Description
* Horizontal print HP adjustments are made based on a value equal to the sum of the
0974 B
values in Test Mode No. 973 and No. 974. This value is between –20 and +20.
Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 to +2.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment left)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
[15-24]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Printing Pressure HP Position Adjustment (Machine)
Sets the offset value for the print pressure position.
* This setting should be made only when required by the machine.
Description
* The printing pressure HP adjustments are made based on a value equal to the sum of
0975 the values in Test Mode No. 972 and No. 975. This value is between –500 and +500. B
Setting range: –500 to +500 (–5000 to +5000 pulses)
OP
* (<+> for increased print pressure)
Setting
Setting unit: 1 (10 pulses)
Print Drum Inside Adjustment Selection
Selects the area for storing adjustment values specific to each print drum.
Description Set a unique number if two or more machines are used.
0976 Each print drum can recognize up to three machines. B
Default: 0
Vertical and Horizontal Motion Distance Switching
0977
Description
Setting
UR
Selects whether the motion increment is set to 0.1 mm or 0.5 mm if the fine adjustment
button is not displayed.
Setting range: 0 (0.5 mm)
Default: 0 (0.5 mm)
–
OE
RIS
[15-25]
8. Protected Area Test Mode
E
<< Starting up the Protected Area Test Mode >>
With the machine on standby in normal Test Mode, enter <9874> using the ten-key pad, then press the
Start key.
Print drum
OP
No. Unit check
changeover
Paper size VR adjustment
1102 –
Sets the VR value for 105 mm (A6 paper width).
Paper size VR adjustment
1103 –
Sets the VR value for 297 mm (A3 paper width).
LCD Base Point Compensation
Make adjustments as described below.
1104 1. Touch two points located at diagonally opposite points on the panel. –
2. Display the confirmation screen, touch three points, and confirm that the compensation is
performed properly.
Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode
1105
1106
No.
UR
Sets the main motor control parameters for stable motor control in the DSP, including machine and
motor variations (operation time: approx. 15 sec).
* Both print drum drives must be connected during this operation.
Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode
Sets the second paper feed motor control parameters for stable motor control in the DSP,
including machine and motor variations. (operation time: approx. 20 sec)
* The guide roller must be in its lowered position during this operation.
1198 Initialize Memory

Data clear Details
Initializes the mechanical unit PCB memory.

–
Print drum
changeover
–
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
OE
Drum Code Entry
Sets print drum information and size information in the print drum EEPROM (data stored
1210 Description in print drum PCB). B
Setting
Default: 0
Drum Serial Code Entry 1
Description Inputs the initial 4 digits of the print drum serial code (data stored in print drum PCB).
1211 Setting range: 0 to 9999 B
Default: 0
Drum Serial Code Entry 2
Description Inputs the last 4 digits of the print drum serial code (data stored in print drum PCB).
1212 Setting range: 0 to 9999 B
RIS

Default: 0
[15-26]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Drum Color Code Entry
Sets the print drum color information in the print drum EEPROM (data stored in print
Description
drum PCB).
Setting range:
0 (Not specified) 1 (Black)
OP
2 (Blue) 3 (Medium Blue)
4 (Red) 5 (Bright Red)
6 (Riso Federal Blue) 7 (Purple)
8 (Riso Marine Red) 9 (Burgundy)
1214 10 (Green) 11 (Teal) B
12 (Brown) 13 (Yellow)
Setting 14 (Light Gray) 15 (Gray)
16 (Fluorescence Pink) 19 (Flat Gold)
17 (Fluorescence Orange) 21 (Crimson)
18 (Orange) 31 (Order: paper specified)
20 (Hunter Green) 63 (Any color)
30 (Custom color)
32 (Order: paper not specified)
1215
Description
Setting
UR
Drum Ink Category Entry (First/Second)
Sets the ink category code (3 bits) stored in the print drum EEPROM (data stored in
print drum PCB).
Setting range: 0 (Not specified)
1 (normal)
2 (HD)
3 (Auxiliary 1)
4 (Auxiliary 2)
5 (Auxiliary 3)
B
6 (Auxiliary 4)
7 (Auxiliary 5)
OE
0 (Not specified)
Scanner Adjustment (1) Sub-Scanning
Description Sets the value indicated on the sticker affixed to the scanner unit.
Default: 128
Scanner Adjustment (2) Main-Scanning
Default: 128
RIS
Scanner Adjustment (3) Sub-Scanning Ratio

Default: 50
Scanner Adjustment (4) Offset
1223 Setting unit: 1 –
Default: 255
Setting
* The setting value varies automatically after offset adjustment, and the most recent
setting value is used for the next offset adjustment. However, the value displayed in
Test Mode does not change until the machine is restarted.
[15-27]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Scanner Adjustment (5) Gain
1224 Setting unit: 1 –
Default: 0
Setting
OP
* The setting value varies automatically after gain adjustment, and the most recent
setting value is used for the next gain adjustment. However, the value displayed in Test
Mode does not change until the machine is restarted.
RLP Mode Enable Control
Enables/disables RLP function.
Setting
Default: 0 (Disabled)
LCD Contrast Adjustment
Description Adjusts panel contrast.
1231 Setting range: –120 to +120 –
1232
1233
Setting
Description
Setting
Default: 0
LCD Backlight Adjustment
Description
Default: 85
UR
Adjusts panel backlighting.
Setting unit: 1
TPH master-making horizontal position adjustment

Adjusts the horizontal print position of the thermal print head.
* (<+> for adjustment left)
–
Default: 0 (0 mm)
TPH resistance input
OE
Description Sets thermal print head resistance.
1234 Setting range: 1200 to 2300 (1200 ohm to 2300 ohm) –
Setting Setting unit: 1 (1 ohm)
Default: 1200 ohm
RIS
[15-28]
9. Test Mode for Optional Unit (AF)
E
Print drum
changeover
3000 AF-unit joint signal check An AF is connected. –
3001 AF Original registration sensor Light path blocked (original detected) –
3002 AF Original IN sensor Light path blocked (original detected) –
OP
3003 AF Original OUT sensor Light path blocked (original detected) –
3004 AF original detection sensor Original is detected. –
3005 AF Cover Set SW Switch ON (AF closed) –
3006 AF Original Size Sensor 1 Light received (original detected) –
3007 AF Original Size Sensor 2 Light received (original detected) –
Print drum
changeover
3030 AF read pulse-motor CW Rotates the AF read pulse motor in feed direction. –
Print drum
No. Unit check
3041
3042
3044
3045
UR
AF one cycle action with no Auto Base Control
Performs a single AF scanning cycle.
Picks up original -> Scanner unit returns to home position -> Shading -> Scanner unit moves to
scanning position -> Scans and ejects original -> Scanner unit returns to home position
AF original feed action
Performs AF original feed operation.
Picks up original -> Scans original (original transport)
AF Original IN Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
Adjusts the sensitivity of the original IN sensor.
AF Original Guide Minimum Width
changeover
–
Sets the VR value when the paper guides are brought to the minimum-width position.
AF Original Guide Maximum Width
3046 –
OE
Sets the VR value when the paper guides are brought to the maximum-width position.
Print drum
changeover
3060 AF Original Width (A/D) Displays the A/D value of the AF original width. –
00: None
01: A3 02: B4
03: A4 04: A4 Landscape
05: B5 06: B5 Landscape
07: A5 08: A5 Landscape
09: B6 11: Postcard
3061 AF Original Size Code 13: Ledger 14: Legal –
15: Letter 16: Letter Landscape
17: Statement
18: Statement Landscape
RIS
19: foolscap
33: Irregular size
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
Scanner unit scanning position adjustment (AF scanning)
Description Adjusts mirror (carriage) stop position in AF scanning operation.
3070 Setting range: –20 to +20 (–2.0 mm to +2.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment up) –
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Mirror carriage position adjustment for Auto-Base-Control (AF scanning)
Description Adjusts AF Auto-Base-Control mirror stop position.
3071 Setting range: 0 to 30 (0 mm to 3.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment up) –
Default: 0 (0 mm)
[15-29]
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
E
Scanning horizontal centering position adjustment (AF scanning)
Adjusts horizontal position for scanning of original by the AF. Separate setting for the
Description
flatbed.
3072 –
Setting range: –30 to +30 (–3.0 mm to +3.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment left)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
OP
Scanning start-position adjustment. (AF scanning)
Description Adjusts original scanning start position (amount of scan skip) for the AF.
3073 Setting range: –60 to +60 (–6.0 mm to +6.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment up) –
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Scanning-speed adjustment to control Elongation & Shrinkage in scanning. (AF scanning)
Description Adjusts original scanning speed for the AF. (Adjusts AF read pulse motor speed.)
3074 Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0% to +5.0%) * (<+> to stretch) –
Setting Setting unit: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0 (0%)
3076
AF Original END Signal Timing
Description
Setting
UR
Adjusts original scanning end position.
Default: 0 (0 mm)
* (<+> for adjustment down) –
OE
RIS
[15-30]
10. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Job Separator)
E
Print drum
changeover
3100 Job separator tape jam sensor Turns ON when tape is jammed. –
3101 Job separator tape detection sensor Turns ON where tape is detected. –
3102 Job separator power switch Switch ON –
OP
3103 Job separator connection signal A job separator is connected. –
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
Tape output
3140 –
Outputs one tape.
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
Stamping quantity
Description Sets the number of stamping operations during Test Mode No. 3140 (Tape Output).
3170 Setting range: 0 (No stamping) –
3171
Setting
Description
Setting
UR
1 (1 stamping)
2 (2 stamping)
Default: 0 (No stamping)
Tape jammed message <activate or deactivate>
Displays/hides the tape jam error in tape output.
Setting range: 0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Default: 1 (Enable)
–
OE
RIS
[15-31]
11. Test Mode for Optional Unit (Storage Memory)
E
Print drum
No. Unit check
changeover
Storage Memory Configuration Change
Processing for changing the card used by the RP to a configuration compatible with the current
machine.
3340 –
OP
* Reconfigured card cannot be used by the RP.
* Only one storage device should be set in the slot to permit configuration adjustments.
(Two cards cannot be processed simultaneously.)
Print drum
No. Data clear Details
changeover
Initializes the storage device to delete data from the
32M storage device or when an error related to
3355 Storage Memory Initialize (32M) storage device prevents data restoration. –
* Only one storage device can be set in the slot for
initialization.
Initializes the storage device to delete data from the
128M storage device or when an error related to
3356 Storage Memory Initialize (128M)
No. Data check

UR storage device prevents data restoration.
* Only one storage device can be set in the slot for
initialization.
Content of display
Displays the PC card type.

* Indicates the type of card inserted in the card slot.
If a card for downloading is inserted in the slot,
downloading begins when power is switched on. This
means the card must be inserted after power is
switched on.
–
Print drum
changeover
3360 PC Card Information << Meaning of display >> –

OE
0: No card
1: Card for SH-PCB download
2: Card for mechanical control PCB download
3: Card for function upgrade
4: Storage memory (ATA card)
255: Other card
Displays the volume label, capacity, area used, and
3361 Storage Memory Information available storage area. –
* Only one storage device can be set in the slot.
RIS
[15-32]
12. Test Mode for Optional Unit (LBP)
E
Print drum
No. Data setting
changeover
RLP Print Position Adjustment (Main)
Adjusts RLP print position (main scanning direction).
Description
* If multiple RLP units are installed, this setting will affect all units.
3570 –
OP
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment left)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
RLP Print Position Adjustment (Sub)
Adjusts RLP print position (sub scanning direction).
Description
* If multiple RLP units are installed, this setting will affect all units.
3571 –
Setting range: –50 to +50 (–5.0 mm to +5.0 mm) * (<+> for adjustment up)
Default: 0 (0 mm)
Zero Print Master-making Warning
If auto-link is turned ON, master-making is performed when the print quantity is 0 in
3572
3573
Description
Setting
operation.
RLP Hold Output Enable Control
Description
Setting
UR
PtoP mode. This setting determines whether the warning (F60) is displayed during this
Setting range: 0: (Without warning)

1: (With warning)
Default: 0: (Without warning)
Sets whether the output is held temporarily when the output is made by the RLP sorter,
optional sorter, or electronic sorter using the AF.
Setting range: 0: (Disable)
1: (Enable)
Default: 1: (Enable)
–
RLP Duplex Print Auto-Repeat

OE
Sets whether the screen setting is turned OFF or reset automatically after duplex
Description
printing is completed.
3579 –
Setting range: 0: (Off)
Setting 1: (Reset)
Default: 1: (Reset)
RIS
[15-33]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[15-34]
Chapter 16 Panel Message
E
Contents
OP
Explanation of Panel Messages ................................................................................................. 16-2
1. Error Code Display .................................................................................................................. 16-2
1. Error type ................................................................................................................. 16-2
2. Error point ................................................................................................................ 16-2
1) List of panel messages .................................................................................................... 16-3
2) Details of error codes ....................................................................................................... 16-6
1. Service engineer call errors (T**) ............................................................................. 16-6
2.
UR
2-1 Jam errors (A**) ..................................................................................................... 16-23
2-2 Jam errors (A**: Indicates the detail of J-type error) .............................................. 16-26
3. Option errors (B**) ................................................................................................. 16-28
4. Consumables error (C**) ....................................................................................... 16-31
5. Set check errors (D**) ............................................................................................ 16-33
6. Warnings (E**: Service engineer call) .................................................................... 16-39
7. Warnings (F**: Others) ........................................................................................... 16-40
8. Parameter Errors (H**) ........................................................................................... 16-49
J-type Error Display .............................................................................................................. 16-50
3. Errors Saved in Memory ....................................................................................................... 16-50
OE
RIS
[16-1]
Explanation of Panel Messages
E
1. Error Code Display
• If an error occurs, an error message is displayed with an icon and an error code indicating the specifics
of the generated error.
OP
• Each error code consists of an <error type> indicating the type of error and an <error-point number>
describing the error generating section.
Example: T99-123 T99: Error type

123: Error point
1. Error type
The order of error priority is shown below.
Error type Description

T
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
J
Jam errors
Option errors
UR
Service engineer call errors
Consumables errors
Set check errors
Warnings (service engineer call)
Warnings (other)
Parameter errors
Paper jam errors
2. Error point
OE
The error point classification is shown below.

0** System, panel
1** Scanning section, image processing section
2** Master-making section
3** Master disposal section
4** Paper feed/ejection section
5** Print drum section
6** Printing adjustment section
7** Optional equipment
RIS
[16-2]
1) List of panel messages
E
Error type Description Error type Description
T01 Main motor lock T95 FRAM error
T02 Elevator motor lock T96 Data not input
T03 Clamp motor lock T97 PC card access error
OP
T04 Ink overflow T98 Hardware error
T05 Print positioning pulse motor lock T99 Software error
T06 Horizontal pulse motor lock
T11 Print pressure control pulse motor lock Error type Description
T12 Master disposal section motor lock A01 Master feed error
T13 Cutter motor lock A02 Master loading error on first print drum side
T14 Flatbed error A04 Master removal error on first print drum side
Master present in master removal section on
T15 AF error A05
first print drum side
T17 Solenoid counter not connected A06 Paper feed tray check
T18
T19
T20
T24
T25
T27
T28
T29
No-battery error
UR
Print drum lock solenoid lock
Thermal pressure motor lock
Paper ejection section motor lock
Inking motor lock
Master-making unit motor lock

Second paper feed motor lock
Guide release motor lock
A07
A08
A09
A10
A16
A17
A25
A34
Paper feed error
Paper jam on first print drum
Paper ejection error
AF original feed error
Awaiting removal of master from first print
drum side
A17 [Cutter error]
Central transport error
Awaiting master reset
Master loading error on second print drum
T31 Central flap motor lock A42
side
OE
Master removal error on second print drum
T41 Main motor lock A44
side
Master present in master removal section on
T43 Clamp motor lock A45
second print drum side
T44 Overflow A48 Paper jam on second print drum
Awaiting removal of master from second print
T45 Print-positioning pulse motor lock A56
drum side
T46 Horizontal pulse motor lock
T51 Print pressure control pulse motor lock
T52 Master disposal section motor lock
T58 Print drum lock solenoid lock
T64 Inking motor lock
T67 Master-making unit motor lock
RIS
T91 Panel EEPROM error

T92 Print drum EEPROM write error
T93 NET-D hardware error
T94 Call service error: TPH
[16-3]

B01 Card counter: No card D01 First print drum not installed
E
B21 Storage memory: Read/write error D02 First print drum incompatibility
B22 Job separator: Power OFF D03 First ink cartridge not installed
B23 Job separator: No-tape error D04 First ink cartridge incompatibility
B24 Job separator: Jam error D05 Master not installed
OP
B31 Network cable not connected D07 First master disposal box not installed
B32 NIC: External communication error D08 Master-making unit not installed
B33 ID address setup error D09 Master-making unit not set into position
B34 RLP: No-toner error D11 Front cover not set into position
B35 RLP: Service error D13 Main unit rear cover not set into position
D17 Master incompatibility
Error type Description D18 First print drum pull-out possible
C01 First ink cartridge replacement D19 Master-making unit pull-out possible
Master-making unit drawer cover not in
C02 Master roll replacement D20
position
Master-making unit drawer cover may now be
C03
C04
C05
C41
C43
No-paper error
UR
First master disposal box full
Both master disposal boxes full
Second ink cartridge replacement

Second master disposal box full
D21
D22
D28
D30
D41
D42
D43
D44
opened
First print drum pull-out command
DtoP cancellation due to missing first print
drum
Front cover setting demand
Second print drum not installed
Second print drum incompatibility
Second ink cartridge not installed
Second ink cartridge incompatibility
D47 Second master disposal box not installed
OE
D58 Second print drum pull-out possible
D62 Second print drum pull-out command
DtoP cancellation due to missing second print
D68
drum

E01 Battery replacement
E02 Maintenance call
RIS
[16-4]

Specified area/traced color separation: Image
F01 No master on first print drum F70
E
processing time-out error
F02 Paper/master-making size incompatibility 1 F71 No master on second print drum
Hand-written/red-color separation: Image
F03 Multi-up: Paper size error F72
processing time-out error
Auto tray selection not possible, RLP tray
F05 Minimum print quantity setting error F73
OP
designation disabled
F10 Paper/master-making size incompatibility 2 F74 Turbo not possible due to low temperature
Auto size reproduction disabled (falls outside Combined use of specified area separation
F24 F75
range of possible size reproduction) and AF not possible
Second print drum color not matching with
F30 Multiple feed check F76
DtoP job color
Print drum color not matching with DtoP job
F32 Storage memory: No space available F77
color
Combined use of book mode and AF not
F37 F78 Digitizer: Stage cover open
possible
F43 DtoP original/paper incompatibility F79 Digitizer: No original during rescanning
Auto size reproduction disabled (exceeds
F44
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
UR
original size detection range)
Presence of original unknown/no original

Inconsistency of first print drum color between
DtoP job and specified color
Combined use of AF and postcard size
reproduction not possible
Multi-up: Outside original size detection range
Multi-up: No original when Start key pressed

F80
F81
F82
F83
F85
F90
Paper not compatible with dual-color printing
Dual-color printing: Ink-saving setting only for
one print drum
Paper not compatible with printing by second
print drum
Use of second print drum mode not possible
Scanning not possible: External CI not

connected
Supply stock management (ink)

Use of RLP mode not possible (RLP
F52 F91 Supply stock management (master)
information not acquired)
OE
Use of RLP mode not possible (NET-D
F58
initialization in process)
RLP auto-link/master-making continuation
F60 Error type Description
confirmation (when printing quantity is 0)
General supply parameter input (first print
F61 RLP paper/original size incompatibility H01
drum)
F62 RLP auto-link/RLP error H04 General supply parameter input (master)
RLP auto tray selection/nonstandard-size General supply parameter input (second print
F63 H07
original drum)
F64 Specified function disabled, at job reception
Scan mode auto-saving size
F65
selection/nonstandard-size original
F66 RLP saddle stitching not possible
RIS
F67 RLP rotation sorting not possible

Specified area/traced color separation:
F68
Excess number of specified areas
Specified area/traced color separation:
F69 Distance of border for specified area longer
than master-making size
[16-5]
2) Details of error codes

1. Service engineer call errors (T**)
E
Error type T01 [Main motor lock]
T01-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
Error reset method Press the Reset key.
Error point Error detecting condition
Main motor lock detected.
520
The main motor FG sensor does not switch on within 10 msec after the main motor switches ON.
521 The position B sensor does not change status within 2910 pulses while the main motor is ON.
524 The clamp unit is not at the home position while the print drum operates (except during master disposal).
537 The print drum fails to stop at position B.

538 The print drum is not locked during operations.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
400
T02-***
!!System Error!!
Press Reset Key UR
T02 [Elevator motor lock]

Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
simultaneously.
Error detecting condition
The elevator upper-limit position detection and the elevator lower-limit detection are switches ON
Elevator motor overload detected.

401
The elevator motor overcurrent port was activated 20 consecutive times (polling at 10-msec intervals).
OE
The elevator lower-limit sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the elevator motor applies a
404
lifting force from the elevator lower-limit position.
The elevator upper-limit sensor does not switch ON within 12 seconds after the elevator motor applies a
405
lifting force.
The elevator upper-limit sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the elevator motor applies a
406
lowering force from the elevator upper-limit position.
The elevator lower-limit sensor does not switch ON within 12 seconds after the elevator motor applies a
407
lowering force.
408 The elevator upper-limit sensor remained OFF for more than 2 seconds during elevator servo action.
436 Printing began with the elevator upper-limit sensor in the OFF state in custom paper feed mode.
RIS
[16-6]
Error type T03 [Clamp motor lock]

T03-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
500 The clamp sensor A is OFF at the end of the home positioning action during clamp unit initialization.
The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor operates in the
501
forward direction.
The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor operates in the
502
reverse direction.
503 The clamp sensor A does not switch ON within 3 seconds during clamp unit initialization.
The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp releasing
504
operation.
The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the print drum position-A
505
compensation operation.
The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp unit home
506
positioning operation.
507
508
514
545
546
547
Error type
UR
The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the clamp releasing operation.
The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the print drum position-A compensation operation.
The print drum is not at the horizontal home position while the clamp unit operates.
The clamp unit is not at the specified position at the start of print drum rotation.
The clamp unit is not at the home position at the start of print drum horizontal movement.
The clamp unit is not at the home position when the master-making unit begins its motion.
T04 [Ink overflow]

T04-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
OE
Press Reset Key
Error reset method Press the Reset key with the overflow sensor switched OFF.
The overflow sensor switches ON successively for the set number of times during the 10-ms-interval
513
overflow sensor check.
Error type T05 [Print positioning pulse motor lock]

T05-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
Error reset method Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
RIS

610 Time-out error generated during vertical print positioning.
The 1-step Vertical Print Positioning key was pressed with position information undefined.
612
(This error may occur after a recovery operation.)
616 Step movement was invoked with vertical print positioning system information undefined.
[16-7]
Error type T06 [Horizontal pulse motor lock]

T06-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
The horizontal home position sensor detects no light within xx seconds after the horizontal home
607
positioning operation initiates movement toward the right during drive releasing operation.
The light path of the horizontal home position sensor is not blocked within xx seconds after the
608
horizontal home positioning initiates movement toward the left during drive connecting operation.
Although the horizontal pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value
609 of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in
counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
611 Time-out error generated during horizontal movement.
617 Step movement was invoked with horizontal system information undefined.
618 The clamp unit is not at the home position during horizontal movement.
The light path of the drive release home position sensor is not blocked during drive connecting
627
628
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
operation.
!!System Error!!
Press Reset Key
UR
The drive release home position sensor detects no light during drive releasing operation.
T11 [Print pressure control pulse motor lock]

T11-***

Press the Reset key or switch power OFF, then ON.
The print pressure control sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 3.9 seconds after the print
600
pressure control motor activates to increase pressure during home positioning.
OE
The print pressure control sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 4.6 seconds after the print
601
pressure control motor activates to reduce pressure during home positioning.
Although the print pressure control pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the
602 logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to
complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
Time-out occurred during print pressure relative movement (movement based on pulse count only,
626
without sensor check).
RIS
[16-8]
Error type T12 [Master disposal section motor lock]

T12-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
Overload current detected in master disposal motor.
300
The master disposal motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals).
Master compression motor lock detected.
301
The RMGA compression detection switches ON while lifting the compression plate.
The master compression sensor does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression
305
motor initiates reciprocal motion.
The master compression sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the master compression
306
motor applies a force to begin compression.
The compression detection does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression motor
307
applies a force to begin compression.
The FG count value does not change when the master compression motor applies a force to begin
309 compression, moving away from the home position sensor. (The master compression motor FG sensor
316
Error type
Panel display
UR
does not change status.)
Master disposal motor lock detected.
The master disposal motor FG sensor does not change status within 10 msec after the master disposal
motor switches ON.
T13 [Cutter motor lock]

T13-***
!!System Error!!
Press Reset Key
OE
The cutter home position switch does not change from ON to OFF within 100 ms after the cutter unit
203
moves from the home position.
204 The cutter home position switch does not switch ON within 300 ms after the cutter begins operating.
The master positioning sensor is ON even when the print drum rotates to the specified angle after
205
cutting the master.
The cutter home position switch does not switch ON within 450 ms after the cutter returns to the home
222
position.
RIS
[16-9]
Error type T14 [Flatbed error]

T14-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
112 The home position sensor does not switch OFF within the set time.
113 The home position sensor does not switch ON within the set time.
114 Faulty machine parameters.
115 The scanner operation fails to complete within the set time.
Time-out error generated during black shading (Black compensation fails to complete within the set
116
time.)
Time-out error generated during white shading (White compensation fails to complete within the set
117
time.)
118 The command to the Gate Array scanner was given before the scanner returned to the home position.
Time-out error generated during offset adjustment (Offset adjustment fails to complete within the set
123
time.)
124
125
126
135
136
137
138
140
141
UR
Time-out error generated during gain adjustment (Gain adjustment fails to complete within the set time.)
Offset adjustment processing not completed (Process fails to complete within the set times.)
Gain adjustment processing not completed (Process fails to complete within the set times.)
Device malfunction during offset adjustment.
Device malfunction during gain adjustment.
Device malfunction during black shading.
Device malfunction during white shading.
Scanner unit communication error (NAK generated twice, undefined command, etc.)
Scanner unit communication time-out error (time-out error generated during reception)
142 The scanner unit detected a sequence error in the main printer unit.
OE
150 Time-out error for scanner command reception occurred in the main printer unit.
151 The main printer unit received an undefined command from the scanner.
152 The main printer unit detected a communication sequence error in the scanner unit.
153 Scanner communication error in the main printer unit (ACK, NAK, or reception channel error occurred.)
154 The main printer unit could not complete transmission to the scanner within the set time.
159 Scanner not connected.
Although the read pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the
170 sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter
stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
RIS
[16-10]
Error type T15 [AF error]

T15-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON
Error reset method Switch power OFF, then ON.
OP
004 Communication error with the AF-CPU.
100 Original IN sensor adjustment error in the AF.
101 AF-EEPROM error.
Time-out error generated at the ABC standby position.
This error is issued if the original stops at the ABC standby position after the start of AF scanning
110
operation (with ABC), and the original remains electrically charged for the set time.
* Issued by AF.
The main unit transmitted an operation request command with AF in the 24V OFF state.
111
* Issued by AF.
121 AF unit communication time-out error (time-out error generated during reception).
122 The AF unit detected a sequence error in the main printer unit.
130
131
132
133
134
UR
AF command reception time-out error generated in the main printer unit.
After a command is sent from the printer to the AF, if no response is transmitted within the set time, the
same command is retransmitted. This error is generated if no response is made to this retransmitted
command within the set time.
The main printer unit received an undefined command from the AF.
The main printer unit detected a communication sequence error in the AF unit.
* Issued by AF.
AF communication error in the main printer unit (ACK or NAK error).
The main printer unit did not transmit a signal to the AF within the set time.
After a command is sent from the AF to the printer, if no response is transmitted within the set time, the
same command is retransmitted. This error is generated if no response is made to this retransmitted
command within the set time.
OE
143 Original width VR value error in the AF.
145 AF operation fails to complete within the set time.
146 AF unit communication error (NAK generated twice, undefined command, etc.)
160 The AF unit detection signal switched OFF while the AF unit was in operation.
161 AF unit not connected.
Error type T17 [Solenoid counter not connected]

T17-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
Error reset method Solenoid counter connection signal: ON
RIS

020 The solenoid counter is not connected.
[16-11]
Error type T19 [Thermal pressure motor lock]

T19-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
The TPH pressure sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 2 seconds after the thermal
207
pressure motor operates to reduce pressure (or during home positioning).
The TPH pressure sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 2 seconds after the thermal
208
pressure motor operates to reduce pressure.
The TPH pressure sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 2 seconds after the thermal
216
pressure motor applies a force to begin compression.
The TPH pressure sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 2 seconds after the thermal
217
pressure motor applies a force to begin compression.
Error type T20 [Paper ejection section motor lock]

T20-***
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
414
415
!!System Error!!
Press Reset Key
UR
Press the Reset key.
The paper ejection wing home position sensor does not change status within the set time after the paper
ejection wing pulse motor starts operation.
The paper ejection wing home position sensor does not switch OFF within the set time after the paper
ejection wing pulse motor operates when the paper ejection wings are at the home position (home
position sensor ON).
Paper ejection motor overload current detected.
416 The motor overcurrent port switches ON 20 consecutive times after the paper ejection motor switches
OE
ON (polling at 10-msec intervals).
424 The paper ejection motor FG sensor detected 20 pulses or less within 100 ms.
Paper ejection motor lock detected.
437
The paper ejection motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals).
Although the paper ejection wing pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the
Error type T24 [Inking motor lock]

T24-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
RIS
Inking motor lock detected.
539
The inking motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals).
[16-12]
Error type T25 [No-battery error]

T25-***
E
Panel display !!Low Battery!!
Call Service
Error reset method Replace the battery.
No battery power.
026
OP
* Readjust the machine clock after resetting the error.
Error type T27 [Master-making unit motor lock]

T27-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
The light path of the master-making unit pull-out position sensor was not blocked within the set time
249
when the master-making unit moved to the pull-out position.
251
252
248
250
out position.
UR
Although the master-making unit transport pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop
mode, the logical value of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value.
Or the operation fails to complete in counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array
control).
The pressure plate of the master-making unit opens at a location other than the master-making unit pull-
The master-making unit position sensor does not change status as specified within the set time after the
master-making unit begins moving to the standby position.
master-making unit begins moving to the master-making position.
Error type T29 [Guide release motor lock]

OE
T29-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
The guide roller release home position sensor detects no light within 3.8 seconds after the guide roller
438
begins operating.
The light path of the guide roller release home position sensor is not blocked within 3.8 seconds after the
439
guide roller begins operating.
Overload current detected in the guide release motor.
450 The guide release motor overcurrent port switches ON 20 consecutive times (polling at 10-msec
intervals).
RIS
[16-13]
Error type T31 [Central flap motor lock]

T31-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
The central flap home position sensor detects no light within the set time after the central flap motor
445
begins operating.
The light path of the central flap home position sensor is not blocked within the set time after the central
446
flap motor begins operating.
Overload current detected in the central flap motor.
451 The central flap motor overcurrent port switches ON 20 consecutive times (polling at 10-msec
intervals).
Error type T41 [Main motor lock]

T41-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
521
524
537
538
Press Reset Key
UR
The position-B sensor does not change status within 2910 pulses while the main motor is ON.
The clamp unit is not at the home position when the print drum operates (except in master disposal
operation).
The position-B stop operation failed.
The print drum is not locked during print drum operation.
Error type T43 [Clamp motor lock]

OE
T43-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
500 The clamp sensor A is OFF after the clamp unit initializes and completes home position operation.
The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor begins rotating in the
501
forward direction.
The clamp sensor B does not change status within 1 second after the clamp motor begins rotating in the
502
reverse direction.
503 The clamp sensor A does not switch ON within 3 seconds during clamp unit initialization.
The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp releasing
504
RIS
operation.
The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the position-A
505
compensation operation.
The logical values of the clamp sensors A and B do not match at the start of the clamp unit home
506
positioning operation.
507 The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the clamp releasing operation.
508 The clamp sensor A is ON after completion of the position-A compensation operation.
514 The print drum is not at the horizontal home position while the clamp unit is operating.
545 The clamp unit is not at the specified position when the print drum begins rotating.
546 The clamp unit is not at the home position when the print drum initiates horizontal movement.
547 The clamp unit is not at the home position when the master-making unit begins its motion.
[16-14]
Error type T44 [Overflow]

T44-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
Error reset method With the overflow sensor switched OFF, press the Reset key.
OP
The overflow sensor switches ON successively for the set number of times during the 10-ms-interval
513
check.
Error type T45 [Print-positioning pulse motor lock]

T45-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
610 Time-out error generated during vertical print positioning operation.
612
616
Error type
Panel display
UR
The 1-step Vertical Print Positioning key was pressed with position information undefined.
(This error may occur after a recovery operation.)
Step movement was invoked with vertical print positioning system information undefined.
T46 [Horizontal pulse motor lock]

T46-***
!!System Error!!
Press Reset Key
OE
The horizontal home position sensor detects no light within xx seconds after the horizontal home
607
positioning operation initiates movement toward the right during drive releasing operation.
The light path of the horizontal home position sensor is not blocked within xx seconds after the
608 horizontal home positioning operation initiates movement toward the left during drive connecting
operation.
Although the horizontal pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value
609 of the sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in
counter stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
611 Time-out error generated during horizontal movement.
617 Step movement was invoked with horizontal system information undefined.
618 The clamp unit is not at the home position during horizontal movement.
The light path of the drive release home position sensor is not blocked during drive connecting
627
operation.
RIS
628 The drive release home position sensor detects no light during drive releasing operation.
[16-15]
Error type T51 [Print pressure control pulse motor lock]

T51-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
The print pressure control sensor does not change from OFF to ON within 3.9 seconds after the print
600
pressure control pulse motor activates to increase pressure during home positioning.
The print pressure control sensor does not change from ON to OFF within 4.6 seconds after the print
601
pressure control pulse motor activates to reduce pressure during home positioning.
Although the print pressure control pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the
Time-out error generated in print pressure relative movement (movement based on pulse count only,
626
without sensor check).
Error type T52 [Master disposal section motor lock]
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
300
301
T52-***
!!System Error!!
Press Reset Key
UR
Overload current detected in master disposal motor.
The master disposal motor overcurrent port was ON (polling at 10-msec intervals).
Master compression motor lock detected.
The RMGA compression detection switches ON while lifting the compression plate.
The master compression sensor does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression
305
motor initiates reciprocal motion.
OE
The master compression sensor does not switch OFF within 2 seconds after the master compression
306
motor applies a force to begin compression.
The compression detection does not switch ON within 6.5 seconds after the master compression motor
307
applies a force to begin compression.
The FG count value does not change when the master compression motor applies a force to begin
309 compression, moving away from the home position. (The master compression motor FG sensor does
not change status.)
Error type T64 [Inking motor lock]

T64-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
RIS

Inking motor lock detected.
539
The inking motor FG sensor does not change status within 20 ms after the inking motor switches ON.
[16-16]
Error type T67 [Master-making unit motor lock]

T67-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
248
master-making unit begins moving to the standby position.
250
master-making unit begins moving to the master-making position.
UR
OE
RIS
[16-17]
Error type T91 [Panel EEPROM error]

T91-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
OP
968 Read error generated in the panel EEPROM.
969 Write error generated in the panel EEPROM.
976 Checksum error generated in the panel EEPROM.
977 Verification error generated in the panel EEPROM.
Error type T92 [Print drum EEPROM write error]

T92-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
Error reset method
Error point
570
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

UR
T93 [NET-D hardware error]

T93-***
!!System Error!!
Switch power OFF, then ON.
The print drum EEPROM is being accessed while the print drum is performing a releasing action.

OE
932 No response from the NIC when NIC is accessed.
933 No response for 90 seconds during NET-D initialization.
Error type T94 [Call service error: TPH]

T94-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
The TPH code does not correspond to the machine model code when the power is switched ON (only
RIS
225 when the master-making unit is in the operating position) or when the master-making unit is inserted in
the operating position.
[16-18]
Error type T95 [FRAM error]

T95-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
OP
The size of the stored/acquired information does not correspond to the NVRAM-specified size for that
036
information (mechanical unit).
The machine serial number information sent from the SH-PCB does not correspond to the machine
059
serial number information in the mechanical control PCB.
Error type T96 [Data not input]

T96-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Error reset method Enter parameters in Test Mode.
Error point
171
172
433
569
613
972
Error type
UR
TPH resistance not set.
Scanner adjustment not completed.
Paper width potentiometer (VR) not set.
Print drum color or ink category not set.
Print pressure compensation not set.
REv data storage area not initialized.
T97 [PC card access error]

T97-***
OE
!!System Error!!
Panel display
Press Reset Key
939 PC card access error: PC card not set.
940 PC card access error: Device information multiple-ID error (PCMCIA card information error).
941 PC card access error: Device error (incompatible CF card error).
942 PC card access error: File creation failed (File with the same name already exists).
943 PC card access error: Unformatted.
944 PC card access error: Media ID error.
945 PC card access error: Media error (CF card cannot be accessed).
RIS
PC card access error: Insufficient disc capacity (Not enough space available on the CF card to write
946
data).
990 PC card access error: Specified file not found on the selected drive.
991 PC card access error: The file accessed is not currently open.
992 PC card access error: File information storage folder already in use.
993 PC card access error: Incorrect read address setting for data transfer to mechanical unit.
994 PC card access error: File deletion failed.
[16-19]
Error type T98 [Hardware error]

T98-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
OP
No response from the SH4F PCB.
002 Although SH4F PCB signal is detected at power ON, if no response is received from the SH4F PCB and
an T98-069 error is detected, the detected error is rewritten to this error code.
005 Hardware error (Machine model code error).
006 FRAM checksum error.
025 Faulty tag RF PCB (initial communication with the tag RF PCB failed).
034 Unable to write data to the main unit EEPROM (EEPROM cannot be accessed).
035 CRC error generated in the main unit EEPROM (EEPROM data error).
038 The machine model information for the PCB and the EEPROM fail to match.
039 Incorrect EEPROM.
051
053
054
055
064
065
067
UR
Communication error with touch-panel controller.
Unsuccessful attempt to read memory parameters (program, mode, user paper).
Unsuccessful attempt to write memory parameters (program, mode, user paper).
The machine model code sent from the SH-PCB does not correspond to the machine model information
in the mechanical control PCB.
Communication between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB: Undefined command was issued.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (01) (on mechanical control PCB
side): Incorrect number of bytes in received command.
side): RNK received.
068
side): NAK received 3 times.
OE
069
side): No ACK response.
070
side): Transmission prevented by SH PCB.
071
side): Command received while awaiting response.
072
side): FB command received in mode other than download mode.
073
side): FC/FD command received in mode other than download mode.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (10) (on SH PCB side): FE
074
command received (No mechanical control PCB program).
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (11) (on SH PCB side): Incorrect
075
number of bytes in received command.
RIS
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (12) (on SH PCB side): Received
076
ACK not specified in sequence.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (13) (on SH PCB side): RNK
077
received.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (14) (on SH PCB side): NAK
078
received 3 times.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (15) (on SH PCB side): No ACK
079
response.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (16) (on SH PCB side):
080
Transmission prevented by the mechanical control PCB (CTS = 1).
[16-20]

T98-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
OP
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (17) (on SH PCB side): Mechanical
081
control download mode was transmitted in error.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (18) (on SH PCB side): Mechanical
082
CTS remained at <1> for 2 seconds.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (19) (on SH PCB side): FA
083
command received at time other than startup.
Communication error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB (20) (on SH PCB side): <80>
084
command not received within 10 seconds after power ON.
085 Unsuccessful attempt to read user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values).
086 Unsuccessful attempt to write user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values).
087 No values set for memory parameters (program, mode, user paper).
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
UR
No values set for user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values).
The DIP-SW 1 on the SH4F PCB is switched ON (PCB check setting is switched ON).
The machine model code in memory parameters (program, mode, user paper) does not match.
The checksum for memory parameters (program, mode, user paper) does not match.
The machine model code in user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values) does
not match.
The checksum for user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values) does not
match.
Communication sequence error between SH PCB and mechanical control PCB.
The checksum for user parameters (administrator settings, Test Mode adjustment values) does not
match during standby.
096 The checksum for memory parameters (program, mode, user paper) does not match during standby.
OE
097 The Test Mode adjustment value set in the print drum memory lies outside the adjustment range.
The machine serial number information in the main unit EEPROM does not correspond to the machine
098
serial number information in the FRAM.
099 SH4F PCB: Undefined interrupt processing was generated.
Faulty image PCB (Memory check of the image processing IC failed).
119
(Image processing IC check timing: during initialization)
Time-out error generated while awaiting scanner serial communication interrupt command (The CPU
failed to receive interrupt command from FORCE device within 100 ms).
120 Scanner serial communication timing: Transmission of data to AK8412 (A/D converter).
Transmission of data to scanner gate array.
Reading of data from scanner gate array
129 Faulty scanner gate array PCB (Error generated in the memory check of the scanner gate array).
Time-out error (action other than sensor standard) for the write pulse motor during master transport in
245
RIS
master-making operation.
Time-out error (action other than sensor standard) for the load pulse motor during master transport in
246
master-making operation.
The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the upper-limit value during automatic
422
multiple paper feed adjustment in Test Mode No. 705.
[16-21]

T98-***
E
!!System Error!!
Panel display
OP
The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the lower-limit value during automatic
423
multiple paper feed sensor adjustment in Test Mode No. 705.
The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the upper-limit value during automatic
448
registration sensor adjustment in Test Mode No. 709.
The DA setting for adjustment of the light-emitting section reached the lower-limit value during automatic
449
registration sensor adjustment in Test Mode No. 709.
922 SH4F PCB system lock (image communication error).
934 Communication error between mechanical control PCB and tag RF PCB (detection on tag RF PCB side).
Communication error between mechanical control PCB and tag RF PCB (detection on mechanical
935
control PCB side).
937 Serial number not set.
938
947
948
949
950
952
953
960
UR
Old FRAM version.
24V-A does not switch ON (possibility of blown 24V-A fuse).
24V-B does not switch ON (possibility of blown 24V-B fuse).
24V-A does not switch OFF.
24V-B does not switch OFF.
Checksum error in SH4F PCB flash memory.
Error generated during attempt to write data to SH4F PCB flash memory.
Error generated during attempt to read data from SH4F PCB flash memory.
961 SH4F PCB flash memory not in use.

OE
Illegal power ON command received from the mechanical control PCB at a time other than boot up or
978
wake-up.
979 Abnormal setting value in SH4F PCB flash memory properties.
The software for the mechanical control PCB does not match the DSP (main, second) software.
986
Download the DSP software version suitable for the software for the mechanical control PCB.
987 Communication error between DSP and mechanical control PCB.
The second paper feed motor parameter and the main motor parameter are <00h>. Main motor
988 parameter acquisition mode and second paper feed motor parameter acquisition mode in Test Mode
have not been executed.
Error type T99 [Software error]

T99-***
!!System Error!!
RIS
Panel display
900 Heart-beat lock error.
[16-22]
2-1 Jam errors (A**)
E
Error type A01 [Master feed error]
A01-***
Master Mis-Feed
Panel display
Pull Out Master Making Unit and Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master in Place.
OP
Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON and Master positioning sensor: OFF
Error reset method
<< Reset the master to cancel the error. >> (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
During master settings, cutting, or making, the master positioning sensor does not switch ON, even
201
after the master is sent.
During master setting or at the start of the master-making operation, the master positioning sensor does
202
not switch OFF, even when the master is rewound for the set time.
206 Time-out error generated during master-making operation.
211 The master positioning sensor is ON during standby.
214 The master positioning sensor is ON at the start of the master-making operation.
Although the write pulse motor has completed the operation in sensor stop mode, the logical value of the
215
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

UR
sensor at the arrival point does not match the design value, or the operation fails to complete in counter
stop mode within the specified time (faulty gate array control).
A02 [Master loading error on first print drum side]

A02-***
Master Loading Error
Pull Out Print Cylinder 1 and
Discard Master
First print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and first print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF
<< Pull out the print drum to cancel the error. >>
* If the print drum is at position B when this error occurs, the print drum lock is automatically released.
OE
The master loading sensor was OFF when the presence of master was checked at the specified angle
509
during master-loading operation.
Error type A04 [Master removal error on first print drum side]
A04-***
Master Disposal Error
Panel display
Discard Master
Error reset method << Pull out the print drum to cancel the error. >>
RIS
303 Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the print drum check.
[16-23]
Error type A05 [Master present in master removal section on first print drum side]
A05-***
E
Master Jammed in Disposal Unit
Panel display
Pull Out Master Disposal Box 1 and
Remove Jammed Master
First master disposal box safety SW: OFF and first master disposal jam sensor: OFF
Error reset method << When the master disposal box is pulled out, the error is cancelled if the master has been removed.
>> (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
OP
304 Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the master disposal box check.
312 The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the start of the master-making operation.
315 The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the completion of the recovery operation.
Error type A06 [Paper feed tray check]

A06-***
Panel display Safety SW on Standard Feed Tray is Activated
Reset paper on Standard Feed Tray
Paper feed tray upper safety SW: ON or Paper feed tray lower safety SW: ON
Error reset method
Error point
403
435
Error type
Panel display
UR
(Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
The paper feed tray safety switch is OFF.

The paper feed tray interlock switch is OFF during operations.
A16 [Awaiting removal of master from first print drum side]

A16-***
Master Remains on Print Cylinder 1
Remove Master
OE
525 Waiting for master to be removed.
Error type A17 [Cutter error]

A17-***
Panel display System Error in Master Making Unit
Take Out Master and then Close Master Making Unit Cover
Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON and Master detection sensor: OFF
Error reset method
<< When the master making unit cover is closed without a master, the error is cancelled. >>
RIS
The cutter home position switch is OFF when the machine enters standby, at the start of the master-
209
making operation, or when the master material is set.
[16-24]
Error type A34 [Awaiting master reset]

A34-***
E
Panel display Master Not Set in Place
Insert Lead Edge of Master into Master Entrance and Close Master Making Unit
Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON and Master positioning sensor: OFF
Error reset method
<< When the master material is re-inserted, the error is cancelled. >>
OP
218 Requesting the reset of master material.
Error type A42 [Master loading error on second print drum side]
A42-***
Master Loading Error
Panel display
Discard Master
Second print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and second print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF
509
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

UR
The master loading sensor was OFF when the presence of master was checked at the specified angle
during master-loading operation.
A44 [Master removal error on second print drum side]

A44-***
Master Disposal Error
Discard Master
<< Pull out the print drum to cancel the error. >>
OE
303 Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the print drum check.
Error type A45 [Master present in master removal section on second print drum side]
A45-***
Master Jammed in Disposal Unit
Panel display
Pull Out Master Disposal Box 2 and
Remove Jammed Master
Second master disposal box safety SW: OFF and second master disposal jam sensor: OFF
Error reset method << When the master disposal box is pulled out, if the master has been removed, the error is cancelled.
>> (Or switch power OFF, then ON.)
304 Master removal error or removed master jam detected during the master disposal box check.
RIS
312 The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the start of the master-making operation.
315 The master disposal jam sensor was ON at the completion of the recovery operation.
Error type A56 [Awaiting removal of master from second print drum side]
A56-***
Master Remains on Print Cylinder 2
Panel display
Remove Master
525 Wait for the master to be removed.
[16-25]
2-2 Jam errors (A**: Indicates the detail of J-type error)
E
Error type A07 [Paper feed error]
The central transport sensor was OFF when the paper reached the central transport sensor, and the
409
paper feed sensor was ON when the operation stopped (paper feed error).
The paper feed sensor switched OFF consecutively for n number of times at the time of the initial paper
OP
412
feed jam detection (no-paper feed error).
413 The paper feed sensor was ON when the paper left the paper feed sensor (extra-long paper error).
418 The paper feed sensor was ON at the start of the operation.
429 Paper feed error (for recovery).
432 The paper feed sensor was already ON at the time of paper feed retry after no-paper feed.
443 The registration sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the registration sensor.
444 The registration sensor was ON although there was no paper.
Error type A08 [Paper jam on first print drum]

Error point
410
421
430
Error type
Error point
UR Error detecting condition
The central transport (paper ejection) sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the central
transport (paper ejection) sensor, and the paper feed (central transport) sensor was OFF when the
operation stopped (paper jam on print drum).
The paper feed sensor was ON when extra-long paper left the paper feed sensor in the extra-long
paper mode (paper length longer than 555 mm).
Paper jam on print drum (for recovery).
A09 [Paper ejection error]

411 The paper ejection sensor was ON when the paper left the paper ejection sensor.
OE
417 The paper ejection sensor was ON at the start of the operation.
431 Paper ejection error (for recovery).
RIS
[16-26]
Error type A10 [AF original feed error]

E
Original jam error resulting from pulled-out original.
• The original IN sensor switched OFF while the original registration sensor and the original IN sensor
were ON during scanning.
102 • The paper ejection sensor switched OFF before completion of scanning (prior to SIG_C output).
• The original registration sensor switched OFF from the time of completion of leading edge insertion
OP
operation to the time of scanning start.
* Issued by AF.
Original jam at the AF registration sensor (extra-long paper error).
The original registration sensor fails to switch OFF after the original IN sensor switched ON (max:
103
movement of 486 mm).
* Issued by AF.
Original jam at the original IN sensor
The original IN sensor fails to switch OFF after the original registration sensor switched OFF (max:
105
movement of 84 mm).
* Issued by AF.
Original jam at the original OUT sensor
The original OUT sensor fails to switch OFF after the original IN sensor switched OFF (max: movement
106
107
108
of 86 mm).
* Issued by AF.
* Issued by AF. UR
Original registration sensor non-arrival jam
Paper fails to reach the original registration sensor after the feed operation started (max.: movement of
103 mm).
Original IN sensor non-arrival jam

Paper fails to reach the original IN sensor after the scanning operation started (max.: movement of 42
mm).
* Issued by AF.
Original OUT sensor non-arrival jam
Paper fails to reach the original OUT sensor after the original IN sensor switched ON (max.: movement
109
of 86 mm).
OE
* Issued by AF.
169 The AF opens and triggers an error while a master is in the AF.
Error type A25 [Central transport error]

419 The central transport sensor was ON at the start of the operation.
The central transport sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the central transport sensor
440
(central transport error).
The central transport sensor was ON at the time the paper left the central transport sensor (central
441
transport error).
The central transport sensor was ON when the paper reached the central transport sensor, and the
RIS
447
central transport sensor was OFF when the operation stopped (central transport error).
Error type A48 [Paper jam on second print drum]

The central transport (paper ejection) sensor was OFF at the time the paper reached the central
410 transport (paper ejection) sensor, and the paper feed (central transport) sensor was OFF when the
operation stopped (paper jam on print drum).
[16-27]
3. Option errors (B**)
E
Error type B01 [Card counter: No card]
B01-***
Panel display
Insert Card in Key/Card Counter
Error reset method Insert the card.
OP
730 Card counter: No card
Error type B21 [Storage memory: Read/write error]

B21-***
!!System Error!!
Panel display
715 Storage memory access error.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
721
B22-***
UR
B22 [Job separator: Power OFF]
!! Job Separator is OFF !!

Turn On Power Switch of it
Press the Reset key. (Confirm that the job separator is switched ON.)
With the tape separation setting switched ON, the job separator is in a Power OFF state when the Start
key is pressed.
The BUSY signal remains at <L> (powe is switches OFF during job separator tape output) for more than
727
7 seconds after the cluster-A signal switches ON.
OE
Error type B23 [Job separator: No-tape error]
B23-***
Panel display No Paper Tape in Job Separator
Replace Tape Roll
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Confirm that the job separator is switched ON.)
With the BUSY signal at <H> (Power ON) and the tape separation setting switched ON, the tape
722
detection signal is at <H> (no tape) when the Start key is pressed.
The tape detection signal is at <H> (no tape) after the tape output command is issued, and the BUSY
723
signal changed from <L> to <H> (after completion of operation).
RIS
[16-28]
Error type B24 [Job separator: Jam error]

B24-***
E
Panel display Paper Tape Jam in Job Separator
Remove Paper Tape
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Confirm that the job separator jam is reset.)
With the BUSY signal at <H> (Power ON) and the tape separation setting switched ON, the tape
724
OP
detection signal is at <L> (tape remaining) when the Start key is pressed.
The tape jam detection signal remains at <H> for more than 1.2 seconds after cluster-A signal switched
725
ON (tape transport error).
The tape jam detection signal was at <L> when the BUSY signal changed from <L> to <H> or it remains
726
at <L> for more than 7 seconds after the cluster-A signal switched ON (tape ejection error).
Error type B31 [Network cable not connected]

B31-***
Panel display !! No Linked Printer Detected !!
Check Cable Connection and Power Supply for Linked Printer
Error point
916
920
Error type
Panel display
The network cable was not connected when the machine starts up.
Error detected by NET-D (NAK received).
* No response from communication destination, interruption by communication destination, TCP/IP not
operating in the NET-D, unauthorized interrupt received from the main unit, etc.
B32 [NIC: External communication error]

B32-***
!! No Linked Printer Detected !!
Check Cable Connection and Power Supply for Linked Printer
Error reset method Press the Reset key. << Remove the cause of the error in the printer to cancel the error. >>
OE
MIB information request error.
* Transmission not possible after waiting 3 seconds (WAK), no response from communication
914
destination, interruption by communication destination, TCP/IP not operating in the NET-D, unauthorized
interrupt received from the main unit, etc.
No MIB information returned.
915 * No response from the NET-D (communication destination) for 50 seconds (error detected in main
unit).
917 Network communication error.
Error type B33 [ID address setup error]

B33-***
Panel display No IP Address Assigned to This Printer
RIS
Contact Your Network Administrator

931 The DHCP is ON, but the DHCP server cannot be found.
[16-29]
Error type B34 [RLP: No-toner error]

B34-***
Panel display
E
No Toner in Linked Printer
919 No toner in the Prioa (linked printer).
OP
Error type B35 [RLP: Service error]
B35-***
Panel display
Linked Printer in Error
970 Service error in Prioa (linked printer).
UR
OE
RIS
[16-30]
4. Consumables error (C**)
E
Error type C01 [First ink cartridge replacement]
C01-***
Panel display No Ink in Print Cylinder 1
Replace Ink Cartridge
First ink cartridge set SW: OFF -> ON << Install a new ink cartridge to cancel the error. >>
OP
Error reset method Or first print drum safety SW: OFF, first print drum connection signal: OFF, and first print drum lock
sensor: OFF << Pull out the print drum to cancel the error. >>
512 The ink sensor does not switch ON when the inking operation is conducted for the set time (inkless).
563 The remaining volume information in the ink tag reached the default value.
574 Inkless error was generated 5 times for the same ink cartridge.
Error type C02 [Master roll replacement]

C02-***
Panel display No Master
Error reset method
Error point
200
240
253
Error type
>>
UR
Replace Master Roll
Master-making unit sensor: OFF -> ON << Open and close the master-making unit to cancel the error.

The 10-ms-interval master end check detected 2 consecutive times during the master transport.
The remaining volume information in the master tag reached the maximum value.
No-master error was generated twice for the same master.
C03 [First master disposal box full]

C03-***
Panel display Master Disposal Box 1 is Full
OE
Empty Master Disposal Box
Error reset method Switch OFF the first master disposal box sensor OFF, then turn ON after waiting at least 5 seconds.
After the master compression motor activates in the compressing direction, the compression detection
308
switches ON before the FG count exceeds the specified volume.
Error type C04 [No-paper error]

C04-***
Panel display
Add Paper
Error reset method The paper detection sensor is ON.
402 The paper detection sensor is OFF.
RIS
[16-31]
Error type C05 [Both master disposal boxes full]

C05-***
E
Panel display Master Disposal Box 1 and 2 are Full
Empty Both Master Disposal Boxes
Switch OFF the first master disposal box sensor, then switch it back ON after waiting at least 5
Error reset method seconds. Switch OFF the second master disposal box sensor, then switch ON after waiting at least 5
seconds.
OP
After the master compression motor on the first print drum side or second print drum side begins to
317 apply a compression force, the compression detection activates and the other disposal box exceeds
90% capacity before the FG count exceeds the specified volume (Expected disposal box full).
Error type C41 [Second ink cartridge replacement]

C41-***
Panel display No Ink in Print Cylinder 2
Second ink cartridge set SW: OFF -> ON << Install a new ink cartridge to cancel the error. >>
Error reset method Or second print drum safety SW: OFF, second print drum connection signal: OFF, and second print
drum lock sensor: OFF << Pull out the print drum to cancel the error. >>
Error point
512
563
574
Error type
Panel display
The ink sensor does not turn ON when inking is performed for the set time (inkless).
The remaining volume information in the ink tag reached the specified value.
An inkless error was generated 5 consecutive times for the same ink cartridge.
C43 [Second master disposal box full]

C43-***
Master Disposal Box 2 is Full
Empty Master Disposal Box
Switch OFF the second master disposal box sensor, then switch back ON after waiting at least 5
Error reset method
OE
seconds.
After the master compression motor begins to apply a compressive force, the compression detection
308
switched ON before the FG count exceeds the specified volume.
RIS
[16-32]
5. Set check errors (D**)
E
Error type D01 [First print drum not installed]
D01-***
Panel display
Set Print Cylinder in Place
First print drum safety SW: ON, first print drum connection signal: ON, and first print drum lock sensor:
Error reset method
ON << Install the print drum to clear the error. >>
OP
526 The print drum is removed. (The connection signal, safety SW, and lock sensor are OFF.)
527 The print drum connection signal is OFF after the print drum is installed.
528 The print drum safety switch is OFF after the print drum is installed.
529 The print drum lock sensor is OFF after the print drum is installed (time-out during insertion: 5 sec).
The print drum connection signal does not switch OFF within 5 seconds after the print drum safety
530
switch switches OFF when the print drum is removed.
Error type D02 [First print drum incompatibility]

D02-***
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
532
Error type
Panel display
UR
Wrong-Type Print Cylinder
Installed in Cylinder Position 1
Replace with Correct Type
Replace with the correct print drum. (The print drum code must match the machine model.)
The print drum is incompatible.
D03 [First ink cartridge not installed]

D03-***
Install Ink Cartridge
in Print Cylinder 1
OE
Error reset method First ink cartridge set SW: ON
533 The ink cartridge set switch is OFF.
Error type D04 [First ink cartridge incompatibility]

D04-***
Wrong-type Ink Cartridge Installed in
Panel display Cylinder 1 or Cannot Read Ink Info
or Contact Dealer/Riso Office
Error reset method Replace with a correct ink cartridge.
RIS
534 The ink cartridge is incompatible.

560 Error due to missing ink cartridge tag.
561 Ink tag communication error (tag communication error due to noise).
Abnormal ink tag information.
562
Checksum error, verification error, storage of master information, etc.
564 Serial number mismatch detected during the periodic ink tag serial number check.
Software error involving ink tag.
575
Antenna CH selection error, erroneous writing of data to write-protected area.
[16-33]
Error type D05 [Master not installed]

D05-***
Panel display
E
Set Master in Place
Error reset method Master-making unit sensor: OFF << Open the master-making unit to clear the error. >>
210 The master detection sensor is OFF.
OP
Error type D07 [First master disposal box not installed]
D07-***
Panel display
Set Master Disposal Box 1 in Place
Error reset method First master disposal box safety SW: ON << Install the master disposal box to clear the error. >>
310 The master disposal box safety switch is OFF.
Error type D08 [Master-making unit not installed]

D08-***
Panel display
Set Master Making Unit in Place
Error reset method
Error point
224
226
227
228
UR
With the master-making unit removed, the second master-loading sensor or the master-making unit pull-
out position sensor is ON, and the cover safety SW is OFF. << Install the master-making unit into the
main unit to clear the error. >>
The master-making unit is in the pulled-out condition (safety switch, lock sensor OFF).
The master-making unit safety switch is OFF after the master-making unit is installed.
The master-making unit lock sensor is OFF after the master-making unit is installed (time-out during
insertion: 5 sec).
The master-making unit lock sensor is ON after the master-making unit is removed (master-making unit
safety switch is OFF).
OE
Error type D09 [Master-making unit not set into position]
D09-***
Panel display
Close Master Making Unit Cover
Error reset method Master-making unit sensor: ON << Close the master-making unit to clear the error. >>
212 The master-making unit sensor is OFF.
Error type D11 [Front cover not set into position]

D11-***
Panel display
Close Front Cover
Error reset method Front cover safety SW: ON
RIS
535 The front cover safety switch is OFF.
[16-34]
Error type D13 [Main unit rear cover not set into position]
D13-***
E
Panel display Rear Cover of Main Body is Off
Call Service
Error reset method Rear cover safety SW: ON
009 The rear cover of the main unit is not set into position. (The rear cover safety switch is OFF.)
OP
Error type D17 [Master incompatibility]
D17-***
Wrong-type Master Installed
Panel display or Cannot Read Master Info
Replace Master Roll
or Contact dealer/Riso office
Master-making unit safety SW: ON -> OFF and Master-making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF << Pull out
Error reset method
the master-making unit to clear the error. >>
236 The master is incompatible.
237
238
239
241
256
Error type
UR
Error due to missing master tag.
Master tag communication error (tag communication error due to noise).
Abnormal master tag information.
Checksum error, verification error, storage of ink information, etc.
Serial number mismatch detected during the periodic master tag serial number check.
Software error involving master tag.
D18 [First print drum pull-out possible]

D18-***
Panel display
Print Cylinder 1 has been Unlocked
OE
First print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and first print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF << Pull out the
print drum to clear the error. >>
Error reset method Or Front cover set SW: ON << Close the front cover to clear the error. >>
Or master-making unit release button: ON << Press the master-making unit release button to clear the
error. >>
522 The print drum is in the pull-out position. (The print drum lock solenoid is ON.)
Error type D19 [Master-making unit pull-out possible]

D19-***
Panel display
Master Making Unit has been Unlocked
Second master-loading sensor: OFF; Master-making unit pull-out position sensor: OFF; and Cover
Error reset method safety SW: OFF
RIS
Or master-making unit drawer cover safety SW: OFF -> ON

223 The master-making unit is in the pull-out position (solenoid ON).
[16-35]
Error type D20 [Master-making unit drawer cover not in position]

D20-***
Panel display
E
Close Master Making Unit Access Cover
Error reset method Master-making unit drawer cover safety SW: OFF -> ON
The master-making unit drawer cover is not in position.
254 (Master-making unit removed (second master-loading position sensor: ON or master-making unit pull-
OP
out position sensor: ON) and cover safety SW: OFF)
Error type D21 [Master-making unit drawer cover may now be opened]
D21-***
Panel display Ready to Open
Master Making Unit Access Cover
Master-making unit drawer cover safety SW: ON -> OFF
Error reset method
Or Pull-out position sensor: ON -> OFF
The master-making unit drawer cover may now be opened.
255
(Master-making unit pull-out position sensor: ON and Cover safety SW: ON)
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Error point
D22-***
UR
D22 [First print drum pull-out command]
Print Cylinder 1 is not Set in Place

Press Cylinder Release Button and
Pull Out Print Cylinder Once
after Button Lights
First print drum safety SW: OFF; first print drum connection signal: OFF; and first print drum lock
sensor: OFF
The print drum lock sensor is ON when the print drum lock solenoid is ON. (The check is performed
531
100 ms after the print drum lock solenoid switches ON.)
OE
Data cannot be written to or read from the EEPROM inside the print drum. (EEPROM cannot be
540
accessed.)
542 CRC error in the EEPROM inside the print drum (data error in the EEPROM).
577 The print drum is not set into position correctly (print drum radius difference).
Error type D28 [DtoP cancellation due to missing first print drum]
D28-***
Dual-color Job Data Received
Panel display
Set Print Cylinder 1 in Place
Color: 1 (Color name)
Error reset method Print drum detection.
RIS
573 The print drum required for DtoP is not installed.
Error type D30 [Front cover setting demand]

D30-***
Panel display Starting Recovery Action
Close Front Cover
Error reset method Front cover SW: ON
The front cover is not in position when a single print drum is set into place in position and the print drum
576
removal button is pressed without the print drum at position B.
[16-36]
Error type D41 [Second print drum not installed]

D41-***
Panel display
E
Second print drum safety SW: ON, second print drum connection signal: ON, and second print drum
Error reset method
lock sensor: ON << Install the print drum to clear the error. >>
526 The print drum has been pulled out. (The connection signal, safety SW, and lock sensor are OFF.)
OP
527 The print drum connection signal is OFF after the print drum is installed.
528 The print drum safety switch is OFF after the print drum is installed.
529 The print drum lock sensor is OFF after the print drum is installed (time-out during insertion: 5 sec).
The print drum connection signal does not switch OFF within 5 seconds after the print drum safety
530
switch switched OFF when the print drum is removed.
Error type D42 [Second print drum incompatibility]

D42-***
Wrong-Type Print Cylinder
Panel display
Installed in Cylinder Position 2
Replace with Correct Type
Error reset method
Error point
532
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

UR
Replace with the correct print drum. (The print drum code must match the machine model.)
The print drum is incompatible.
D43 [Second ink cartridge not installed]

D43-***
Install Ink Cartridge
in Print Cylinder 2
Second ink cartridge set SW: ON

OE
533 The ink cartridge set switch is OFF.
Error type D44 [Second ink cartridge incompatibility]

D44-***
Wrong-type Ink Cartridge Installed in
Panel display Cylinder 2 or Cannot Read Ink Info
or Contact Dealer/Riso Office
Error reset method Replace with the correct ink cartridge.
534 The ink cartridge is incompatible.
560 Error due to missing ink cartridge tag.
RIS
561 Ink tag communication error (tag communication error due to noise).
Abnormal ink tag information.
562
Checksum error, verification error, storage of master information, etc.
564 Serial number mismatch detected during periodic ink tag serial number check.
Software error involving ink tag.
575
[16-37]
Error type D47 [Second master disposal box not installed]

D47-***
Panel display
E
Set Master Disposal Box 2 in Place
Error reset method Second master disposal box safety SW: ON << Install the master disposal box to clear the error. >>

310 The master disposal box safety switch is OFF.
OP
Error type D58 [Second print drum pull-out possible]
D58-***
Panel display
Print Cylinder 2 has been Unlocked
Second print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF and second print drum safety SW: ON -> OFF << Pull
out the print drum to clear the error. >>
Error reset method Or front cover SW: ON << Close the front cover to clear the error. >>
Or master-making unit release button: ON << Press the master-making unit release button to clear the
error. >>
522 The print drum is in the pull-out position. (The print drum lock solenoid is ON.)
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method
Error point
D62-***
UR
D62 [Second print drum pull-out command]
Print Cylinder 2 is not Set in Place

Press Cylinder Release Button and
Pull Out Print Cylinder Once
after Button Lights
Second print drum safety SW: OFF; second print drum connection signal: OFF; and second print drum
lock sensor: OFF
The print drum lock sensor is ON when the print drum lock solenoid is ON. (The check is performed
531
OE
100 ms after the print drum lock solenoid switches ON.)
Data cannot be written to or read from the EEPROM inside the print drum. (EEPROM cannot be
540
accessed.)
542 CRC error in the EEPROM inside the print drum (data error in the EEPROM).
577 The print drum is not set into position correctly (print drum radius difference).
Error type D68 [DtoP cancellation due to missing second print drum]
D68-***
Dual-color Job Data Received
Panel display
Color: 2 (Color name)
Error reset method Print drum detection.
RIS
573 The print drum required for DtoP is not installed.
[16-38]
6. Warnings (E**: Service engineer call)
E
Error type E01 [Battery replacement]
E01-***
Panel display !!Battery Replacement!!
Call Service
OP
Battery voltage is below 2.1 V when power is switched ON (replacement of battery required).
* Since the battery voltage detected by the software is 0.5 V below the actual battery voltage, error
detection activates when the value set in the RTC is below 1.6 V.
* Precautions for battery replacement
010 Switch ON main power before replacing the battery. If the battery is replaced with the main unit OFF, the
following two problems may occur:
The internal clock data will be incorrect. -> Reset the clock.
The <T25-026 No-battery> error will be issued once again when power is switched ON after battery
replacement. -> Switch power OFF, then ON again, and confirm that no error is issued.
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
011
012
!!Maintenance!!
Call Service
UR
E02 [Maintenance call]
E02-***
(maintenance call).
The master count reached the value set in the Test Mode at power ON, reset, or operation completion
The copy count reached the value set in the Test Mode at power ON, reset, or operation completion
(maintenance call).
The maintenance count in the print drum reached the value set in the Test Mode at power ON, reset, or
022
operation completion (maintenance call).
OE
RIS
[16-39]
7. Warnings (F**: Others)
E
Error type F01 [No master on first print drum]
F01-***
No Master on
Panel display
Print Cylinder 1
Make a New Master
OP
Error reset method Press the Reset key. Set an original and execute the master-making operation.
015 There is no master on the print drum at the start of printing.
Error type F02 [Paper/master-making size incompatibility 1]

F02-***
Page Format is Larger
Panel display than Paper Size
!! Possible Ink Smudges
on Prints !!
Error reset method
Error point
018
Error type
Panel display
UR
Press the Continue button or Stop button (Check print paper size).
F03 [Multi-up: Paper size error]

F03-***
!! Multi-Up is Not Available
with This Paper Size !!
Replace with Proper Paper
of Standard Size
Paper and master-making sizes (master size on print drum) do not match at the start of printing.
Error reset method Press the Close button. Set standard-size paper on the paper feed tray.
OE
016 The multi-up operation was executed with nonstandard paper.
Error type F05 [Minimum print quantity setting error]

F05-***
Panel display Enter Print Quantity Over [%02d],
Programmed Minimum Value
Error reset method Reset the print quantity.
In print or master-making modes with Auto-Print switched ON, the set number of prints failed to meet the
019
minimum print quantity when the Start key was pressed.
RIS
Error type F10 [Paper/master-making size incompatibility 2]

F10-***
Page Format is Larger
than Paper Size
Panel display !! Possible Ink Smudges
on Prints !!
(Continue->PROOF Key)
Error reset method Press the Continue button or Stop button. (Check print paper size.)
021 Paper and master-making sizes (master size on print drum) do not match at the start of proof printing.
[16-40]
Error type F24 [Auto size reproduction disabled (falls outside range of possible size reproduction)]
F24-***
E
!! Images may not fit
Panel display in Frame of Paper with
This Reproduction Size !!
Re-perform the size setting
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Manually enter the size reproduction setting.)
OP
Size reproduction setting falls outside the permissible range when the operation started based on the
037
auto size reproduction setting.
Error type F30 [Multiple feed check]

F30-***
!! Possible Multiple
Panel display
Paper Feed !!
Check Printed Copies
Error reset method Press the Multiple Feed Detection OFF button or Reset key.
420
425
426
Error type
Panel display
UR
Multiple feed detected during operation (when no paper jam error is generated).
Multiple feed occurred in the operation in which reference data was obtained in the sensor light emission
level check.
Multiple feed occurred in the most recent operation in the sensor light emission level check.
F32 [Storage memory: No space available]

F32-***
!! The Data Storage Area
has Become Full !!
Clear Old Storage Data
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Check the available capacity.)
OE
713 Inadequate storage memory during data write.
Error type F37 [Combined use of book mode and AF not possible]
F37-***
!! Book Shadow Editor
is Not Available
Panel display with ADF !!
Place Original on
Stage Glass
Error reset method Press the Close button.
RIS
050 With book mode set, an original was found on the AF at the start of the master-making operation.
Error type F43 [DtoP original/paper incompatibility]

F43-***
!! Unmatched Size--
Panel display Current Page and
Printing Paper !!
Check Paper Size
Error reset method Press the Continue button or Stop button. (Check print paper size.)
902 Paper and original sizes do not correspond at the start of DtoP master-making.
[16-41]
Error type F44 [Auto size reproduction disabled (exceeds original size detection range)]
F44-***
E
!! No Auto Reproduction
Panel display with This Original
and Printing Paper !!
Select Size Manually
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Manually enter the size reproduction setting.)
OP
901 The original size detection failed. (The original did not conform to the detection specification.)
Error type F45 [Presence of original unknown/no original]

F45-***
Panel display Original Undetected
Reset Original
Error reset method Reset the original. Press the Continue button or Stop button.
Master-making operation or RLP output was executed with the auto tray or auto size reproduction
954
setting set to ON, and the presence of an original could not be detected.
959
981
Error type
Panel display
UR
Master-making operation or RLP output was executed without an original.
When the Next button was clicked on the multi-up count entry screen of Multi-up Wizard, no original was
detected.
F46 [Inconsistency of first print drum color between DtoP job and specified color]
F46-***
!! Unmatched Color --
Data Color and
Cylinder Color 1 !!
Change Print Cylinder
Color: (Color name)
OE
Error reset method Press the Reset key or the Continue button. (Replace the print drum.)
The color of the print drum fails to match between the color specified for DtoP job and the color set for
903
the specified print mode.
Error type F47 [Combined use of AF and postcard size reproduction not possible]
F47-***
[A4->Card] Reproduction
is Not Available
Panel display in combination with ADF
Place Original on
Stage Glass
Error reset method Remove the original from the AF and press the Close button.
RIS

Master-making operation or RLP output was performed with <A4 -> Postcard> size reproduction
904
selected and original set on the AF.
Error type F48 [Multi-up: Outside original size detection range]

F48-***
Original Size Exceeds
Panel display
Limitation of Multi-Up
Specify Original Size
955 If multi-up is set, the size of the original is nonstandard or falls outside the permissible range.
[16-42]
Error type F49 [Multi-up: No original when Start key pressed]

F49-***
E
Panel display Original Undetected
Reset Original
Error reset method Press the Stop button.
989 No original is detected when the Enter key is pressed for the single original/multi-original multi-up setting.
OP
Error type F52 [Use of RLP mode not possible (RLP information not acquired)]
F52-***
Acquiring Linked Printer
Panel display
Configuration Data
Please Wait a Moment
912 RLP mode cannot be used. (RLP information has not been acquired.)
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
927
Error type
F58-***
UR
F58 [Use of RLP mode not possible (NET-D initialization in process)]
Starting Up RISORINC-NET
Please Wait a Moment
Press the Close button.
RLP mode cannot be used. (The NET-D is being initialized.)
F60 [RLP auto-link/master-making continuation confirmation (when printing quantity is 0)]

F60-***
OE
!! Number of Copies
is set to "0"!!
Panel display Printing Operation will
Start on this Printer
(Continue -> START key)
Error reset method Press the Start key or Stop button.
929 Confirmation of auto-link operation/master-making continuation (when printing quantity is 0).
Error type F61 [RLP paper/original size incompatibility]

F61-***
Panel display Set Proper Paper Size
in the Linked Printer
RIS
Error reset method Select paper using Manual Feed or Paper Selection.
930 RLP paper/original size is incompatible.
[16-43]
Error type F62 [RLP auto-link/RLP error]

F62-***
E
!!Auto-Link Operation is
Not Available!!
Panel display Specified Linked Printer
may be in Error or
Turned OFF
Error reset method Press the Stop button
OP
956 Error generated on the RLP side during RLP auto-link operation.
Error type F63 [RLP auto tray selection/nonstandard-size original]

F63-***
!! No Auto Paper Size
Selection with Irregular
Panel display Size Original !!
Select Paper Size
and then Restart
Error reset method
Error point
971
Error type
Panel display
UR
Press the Reset key. (Manually select paper.)
RLP output was performed with a nonstandard-size original and auto paper size selection.
F64 [Specified function disabled, at job reception]

F64-***
Processing Print Data
from PC
This Function is Not
Available while Process-
ing Current Data
OE
An instruction involving an exclusive function (scan mode, overlay, name insertion, digitizer, hold,
964
simplified separation) was issued for DtoP job reception, development, or awaiting-output status.
Error type F65 [Scan mode auto-saving size selection/nonstandard-size original]

F65-***
Auto Page Size Selection
is Not Available for
Panel display Irregular-Size Original
Select Format Size to Store
and then Restart
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Manually select storage size.)
RIS

The size selected in auto size (storage data) selection at the start of scanning operation was
965
nonstandard.
Error type F66 [RLP saddle stitching not possible]

F66-***
Saddle Stitching is Not
Panel display
Available with This Paper
Size
The paper in the specified paper feed tray was not A3, B4, or A4 (landscape) at the time of RLP output
962
with saddle stitching function switched ON.
[16-44]
Error type F67 [RLP rotation sorting not possible]

F67-***
E
!! Improper Paper for
Rotation Sorting !!
Panel display Set Same Sized Paper in
2 Trays, One in Horizontal
and Other in Vertical
Direction
OP
No paper of the size specified by the RLP Paper Tray is set in either portrait or landscape orientation at
963
the time of RLP output with rotation sorting function switched ON.
Error type F68 [Specified area/traced color separation: Excess number of specified areas]
F68-***
!! Exceeding Number of
Panel display Editing Areas Selected !!
Deselect Some Areas and
Redo Color Separation
Error reset method
Error point
173
Error type
Panel display
UR
The number of specified areas for specified area/traced color separation exceeded the maximum value.
F69 [Specified area/traced color separation: Distance of border for specified area longer than
master-making size]
F69-***
Cannot Read Selection Area
Reset Original Correctly
OE
The distance of the border of the specified area for specified area/traced color separation exceeds the
174
value corresponding to the master being made.
Error type F70 [Specified area/traced color separation: Image processing time-out error]
F70-***
!! Complicated Area Form !!
Panel display
Re-circle Editing Areas and
175 Image processing time-out error during specified area/traced color separation.
RIS
Error type F71 [No master on second print drum]

F71-***
No Master on
Panel display
Print Cylinder 2
Make a New Master
Error reset method Press the Reset key. Set an original and execute the master-making operation.
015 No master is found on the print drum at the start of printing.
[16-45]
Error type F72 [Hand-written/red-color separation: Image processing time-out error]

F72-***
E
!! Complicated Area Form !!
Panel display
Re-circle Editing Areas and
OP
176 Image processing time-out error during hand-written/hand-written (ink)/red-color separation.
Error type F73 [Auto tray selection not possible, RLP tray designation disabled]
F73-***
Paper Size cannot be
Panel display Defined by Specified
Reproduction Size
Select Paper Size Manually
Error reset method Select paper using Manual Feed or Paper Selection. Press the Reset key.
The specified fixed size reproduction and the detected original size do not match at the start of RLP.
975
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
UR
Or zoom/independent size reproduction was specified.
F74 [Turbo not possible due to low temperature]

F74-***
Printer Temperature is Low
<150ppm> is Not Available
[Cancel] [Continue]
Press the Stop button or Continue button.
980 Turbo print was used at temperatures below 15°C while using the second print drum.
OE
Error type F75 [Combined use of specified area separation and AF not possible]
F75-***
Specified Area Separation
is Not Available
Panel display in Combination with ADF
Place Original on
Stage Glass
982 With specified area separation set, an original was on the AF at the start of master-making.
Error type F76 [Second print drum color not matching with DtoP job color]
RIS
F76-***
Data Color and
Panel display Cylinder Color 2 !!
Change Print Cylinder
Color: (Color name)
Error reset method Press the Reset key or Continue button. (Replace the print drum.)
903 The color of the print drum to be used fails to match for the DtoP job and the specified print mode.
[16-46]
Error type F77 [Print drum color not matching with DtoP job color]
F77-***
E
Data Color and
Panel display Cylinder Colors !!
Change Print Cylinders
Color: (Color name)
Color: (Color name)
OP
Error reset method Press the Reset key or Continue button. (Replace the print drum.)
903 The color of the print drum to be used fails to match for the DtoP job and the specified print mode.
Error type F78 [Digitizer: Stage cover open]

F78-***
Close Stage Cover
Panel display If original moves

you may not get
Error reset method

Error point
731
Error type
Panel display
desired result
UR
Close the stage cover. Press the Close button.
The stage cover was opened during the digitizing operation.
F79 [Digitizer: No original during rescanning]

F79-***
Set Original
and Press Start Key
Re-scanning will be Started
to Add Image Processing
OE
Error reset method Press the Start key or Stop button.
732 No original was detected at the start of digitizer rescanning.
Error type F80 [Paper not compatible with dual-color printing]

F80-***
Dual-Color Printing is Not
Available for This Paper
Panel display Size
Load Paper Larger than
B5（ Portrait）
Error reset method Press the Reset key. (Use paper larger than the minimum size.)
RIS

966 The paper size is smaller than the minimum paper size for dual-color printing.
Error type F81 [Dual-color printing: Ink-saving setting only for one print drum]
F81-***
Either of Masters is Made
Panel display in Ink Saving Process
Operate Dual-Color
Printing?
Error reset method Press the Stop button or Continue button.
At the start of dual-color printing operation, the master was made with one print drum in ink-saving
967
master-making mode and the other in normal master-making mode.
[16-47]
Error type F82 [Paper not compatible with printing by second print drum]
F82-***
E
Printing is Not Available
for This Paper Size with
Panel display Print Cylinder 2
Set Print Cylinder to be
Used in Cylinder Position 1
and Re-select Printing Mode
OP
974 The paper size is smaller than the minimum paper size for printing with the second print drum.
Error type F83 [Use of second print drum mode not possible]
F83-***
Printing is Not Available
for This Setting with
Panel display Print Cylinder 2
Set Print Cylinder to be
Error reset method

Error point
973
Error type
UR
Used in Cylinder Position 1
and Re-select Printing Mode
There is no confidential master on the first print drum at the start of printing/proof-printing operation with
the second print drum.
F85 [Scanning not possible: External CI not connected]

F85-***
! Scanning is Not Possible !
Panel display External CI is not Connected
or Processing Connection
OE
Check Cable Connection
Error reset method Press the Close button or Start key.
995 The PS7R is not connected.
Error type F90 [Supply stock management (ink)]

F90-***
Check Stock of
Panel display
Required Ink and
Please Order If Needed
RIS
957 Stock management counter for the relevant color ink ≥ Specified quantity (setting value).
Error type F91 [Supply stock management (master)]

F91-***
Check Stock of
Panel display
Required Master and
Please Order If Needed
958 Stock management counter for the master ≥ Specified quantity (setting value).
[16-48]
8. Parameter Errors (H**)
E
Error type H01 [General supply parameter input (first print drum)]
Ink (Cylinder 1)
Panel display Cannot Get Consumables Info
Input Values Required
Error reset method Enter the parameters and press the Start key.
OP
Enter parameters, since first ink tag color information, steady-state viscosity information, and FP
566
viscosity information are unreliable.
Error type H04 [General supply parameter input (master)]

Ink (Master)
Panel display Cannot Get Consumables Info
Error reset method Enter the parameters and press the Start key.
242
Error type
Panel display
Error reset method

Error point
571
UR
Enter parameters, since master tag sensitivity information, steady-state viscosity information, and FP
H07 [General supply parameter input (second print drum)]

Ink (Cylinder 2)
Cannot Get Consumables Info
Enter parameters and press the Start key.
Enter parameters, since second ink tag color information, steady-state viscosity information, and FP
OE
RIS
[16-49]
2. J-type Error Display
E
Paper jam (including AF original feed error) generates an internal [A**] error. However, since this type of
error is combined with another error code, the panel displays a [J**] error code.
<**> in the [J**] error code is a value obtained by assigning a bit to each error (one of four types shown in
the table below) subject to paper jam processing and adding the numeric values corresponding to the
assigned bits.
OP
The detailed error code is displayed by pressing the < * > key.
Error type J** [Paper jam error]

J**
Paper Jam
Panel display
Remove Paper in Indicated Areas
and Press [OK] Button
Error type Error name Bit Numeric value

A10 AF original feed error Bit 0 1
A09
A08/A48
A07
A25
Paper feed error
UR
Paper ejection error
Paper jam on print drum
Central transport error
Example) When <A10> and <A08> are generated, [J05] is displayed.

Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
2
4
8
16
3. Errors Saved in Memory

OE
The following errors are saved in memory and cannot be cleared simply by switching off the power.

A04 Master removal error on first print drum side
A44 Master removal error on second print drum side
A08 Paper jam on first print drum
A48 Paper jam on second print drum
A25 Central transport error
C01 First ink cartridge replacement
C41 Second ink cartridge replacement
C02 Master roll replacement
RIS
C03 First master disposal box full

C43 Second master disposal box full
C05 Both master disposal boxes full
[16-50]
CHAPTER 17: OTHER PRECAUTIONS
Chapter 17: Other Precautions
E
OP
Contents
1. Machine Setup During the Installation ................................................................................ 17-2
1) Set-up Wizard .............................................................................................................. 17-2
2. Sales Mode ....................................................................................................................... 17-3
3. Firmware Downloading Procedure ...................................................................................... 17-4
UR
4. Downloading the DSP Software ......................................................................................... 17-5
5. Replacing the Mechanical control PCB .............................................................................. 17-6
6. Replacement of the SH4F PCB .......................................................................................... 17-7
7. Battery Replacement ......................................................................................................... 17-7
8. Acquiring the Main Motor Parameters ................................................................................ 17-7
9. Acquiring the Second Paper Feed Motor Parameters ......................................................... 17-8
10. Replacement of the Print drum PCB ................................................................................. 17-8
OE
11. Adjusting the Print Position .............................................................................................. 17-9
12. Adjusting the Horizontal Print Position ............................................................................. 17-9
RIS
[ 17 - 1 ]
r reference.
al fo
1. Machine Setup During the Installation hnical manu
tec
en from RZ5
tak
age is
E
1) Set-up Wizard
This p
Set-up wizard is designed for enhancing customer satisfaction with his or her RZ5 unit, depending on
the type of customer account. Until the Set-up wizard is completed at the time of the machine
installation, the Set-up wizard display keeps popping up each time the machine power is turned ON.
OP
Typically used functions at commercial, educational and print shop accounts are pre-registered at
[BASIC], [SCHOOL] and [PRINTING] respectively.
Set-up wizard is deeply related in providing maximum functionality with the RISO i Quality System
benefits.
In order to take the maximum advantage of the RISO i Quality System, the [setting of the
machine clock] is essential.
[ Selections ]
UR
1703
OE
1701
[ Direct Access ]
Set-up wizard customer brackets

Master-Making
User Category Area Name Print Screen Link Screen
Screen
Dot Renew Dot
DIRECT ACCESS Reserve Reserve
2 in 1 Interval
Memory Memory Memory
STANDARD
Confidential Confidential nce.
SELECTIONS Idling Idling
al for refere
Book nical ma
nu
RIS
te ch
RZ5Program
taken from Dot Renew Dot
his page is Reserve Reserve
T DIRECT ACCESS
2 in 1 Interval
Book
SCHOOL
Confidential Confidential
SELECTIONS
Idling Idling
Program
Dot Renew Dot
DIRECT ACCESS Reserve Reserve
2 in 1 Interval
PRINTING
Confidential Confidential
SELECTIONS Idling Idling
Book
Program 1702
[ 17 - 2 ]
2. Sales Mode
E
1) Easy access to change the machine settings by the Salesman and Serviceman.
Turn the machine power ON, while pressing the + key and x key on the Operation Panel.
The [Sales Mode] is essential in setting the machine to the best condition to suit each customer.
OP
The activation of the Sales mode helps troubleshooting the minor troubles on the machine.
There are total of 25 items under the Sales Mode. The first 2 items, starting with P are linked to the
Admin. (user mode), and the remaining 23 items are linked to the serviceman test mode.
The [Sales Mode] is for the use by the Salesman and the Serviceman's use only, and is not intended for
the customer (operator) use.
Code No. Item

P001
P004
0080
0095
0110
0116
UR
Displayed Language
Beep Sound
Test Print A
System Configuration Data Output
Clear Error Status Data
Set-up Wizard Initialize
0126 Optional Configuration Check
0150 Print Quantity Repeat Setting
OE
0154 Min. Print Quantity Control
0159 Warning Display Control
0160 Auto Multi-Up Recovery
0161 Program Print Repeat Setting
0166 Max. Print Quantity Control
0167 Paper ID Auto-Repeat Control
0168 Fine Adjustment Button Display Control
0169 Admin. Display Control
RIS
0170 Consumable Storage Indication

0199 Paper Size Detection Selection
0951 Ink Color Code
0956 Automatic Print Position Reset Condition Setting
0977 Vertical and Horizontal Motion Distance Switching
1229 RLP Mode Enable Control
3572 Zero Print Master Making Warning
3573 RLP Hold Output Enable Control
3579 Link Duplex Print Auto-Repeat
1704
[ 17 - 3 ]
3. Firmware Downloading Procedure

(1) Switch OFF the machine power.
E
(2) Remove the download slot cover from the side of the rear cover, on the paper-feed side of the machine, by
removing one screw (M3x6 : 1 pc).
(3) Insert the downloading CF card in an card adopter, containing appropriate firmware for the Mechanical
OP
control PCB and SH4F PCB for the specific machine model.
(4) Turn ON the machine power. The firmware for the Mechanical control PCB is automatically downloaded
the first. The green LED 3 on the SH3M2 PCB, as well as the LED on the wake-up key on the operation
panel starts to blink. The program is being downloaded.
(5) When the green LED 3, green LED 2 and LED on the wake-up key changes from blinking to a solid light,
the firmware downloading to the Mechanical control PCB is successfully finished. The firmware downloading
to the SH4F PCB starts automatically. The green LED 3 lights solid, and both the green LED 2 and the
wake-up key LED blinks to indicate that the downloading has started. The firmware downloading to the
SH4F PCB is successfully finished when the green LED 3, green LED 2 and wake-up LED all lights solid.
UR
* If a red colored LED 1 aside the download slot blinks and the wake-up key LED changes to a solid light, the
firmware downloading to the Mechanical control PCB went through an error and ended unsuccessfully.
* If a red colored LED 1 aside the download slot lights up to a solid light and the wake-up key LED changes
to a solid light, the firmware downloading to the SH4F PCB went through an error and ended unsuccessfully.
The firmware downloading procedure must be repeated from the very start.
(6) After the firmware downloading is successfully finished, switch OFF the machine power and remove the
downloading CF card from the machine.
OE
(7) Mount the download slot cover back on the machine.
Note: The firmware downloading can be done with the 128CF card inserted.
RIS
[ 17 - 4 ]
4. Downloading the DSP Software
E
(1) After downloading firmware for the mechanical control PCB and for the SH4F PCB, turn ON the ma-
chine in test mode to confirm that the machine is working properly.
(2) Switch OFF the machine power and insert the download CF card, in an adopter, containing the DSP
software.
(3) Launch Test Mode and run Test Mode No. 102 (DSP Download (Main, Secondary).
OP
(4) Check the operation panel and make sure that the download is completed (The download should take
around one minute).
(5) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the CF card.
(6) Launch Test Mode again and run Test Mode No. 126 (Optional Configuration Check). Check the soft-
ware version.
(7) If an error occurs during this process, repeat the procedure from the beginning.
Note: The DSP software downloading can be done with the 128CF card inserted.
UR
OE
RIS
[ 17 - 5 ]
5. Replacing the Mechanical control PCB
E
(1) Remove the first and second print drums.
(2) Switch off power, remove the EEPROM and battery, and dismount the mechanical control PCB.
(3) Reinstall the EEPROM and battery removed in Step (2) to a new mechanical control PCB and mount the
OP
new mechanical control PCB in the machine.
(4) Download the software for the mechanical control PCB (See the appropriate section of this Chapter).
(5) Download the DSP software (See the appropriate section of this Chapter).
(6) Switch off power and enter Test Mode.
(7) Run Test Mode No. 1198 (Initialize Memory), then switch off power.
(8) Launch Test Mode again and run Test Mode No. 883 (Clamp home positioning action), Test Mode No. 893
(Print Drum Drive Lock Release Action), and Test Mode No. 900 (Vertical-centering action), for both the first
and second print drums.
UR
(9) Install the print drums and run Test Mode No. 9874 to enter into the protected area test mode.
(10)Without turning the power OFF, run test mode No. 1105 (Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode) and
Test Mode No. 1106 (Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode) for both the first and second
print drums.
(11) Switch power OFF, then ON.
(12)The machine will start up normally if this procedure is performed correctly.
(13)Set the machine calendar and time on the machine from the Adim. tab on the operation panel.
OE
RIS
[ 17 - 6 ]
6. Replacement of the SH4F PCB
E
1. Turn OFF the machine power. Then insert a clean CF (compact flash) card, in a card adopter with no data
inside, into the card slot on the SH4F PCB.
2. Turn ON the machine power in Test Mode and activate Test Mode No. 103 to upload the test mode settings
from the existing SH4F PCB onto the CF card.
OP
3. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the CF card from the slot.
4. Replace the existing SH4F PCB with a new one.
5. Download SH4F PCB firmware onto the new SH4F PCB, using another CF card in a card adopter. The
firmware version to download must be the same version as the one which was in the removed SH4F PCB.
6. Turn OFF the machine power once the firmware is downloaded onto the new SH4F PCB, and remove the
CF card from the slot.
7. Turn the machine power back ON in Test Mode. Activate Test Mode No. 9874 to access into the protected
area test mode.
UR
8. Without turning the power OFF, activate test modes No. 1193 (REv data clear), No.110 (Jam status clear),
No. 111 (user area memory clear), and No. 112 (test mode data clear).
9. Turn OFF the machine power and insert the CF card, with the uploaded test mode settings, removed from
the machine in step No. 3 above.
10. Turn the machine power back ON in Test Mode and activate Test Mode No. 105 (downloading of the stored
test mode settings back into new SH4F PCB).
11. Turn OFF the machine power and remove the CF card from the card slot.
OE
12. Turn ON the machine power, and if the machine starts up in normal condition, the PCB replacement job is
completed.
7. Battery Replacement
Replace the battery on the mechanical control PCB with the machine power ON.
* If the battery is removed from the machine with the machine power OFF, in certain conditions the internal
clock of the machine initializes to programmed default. In that case, the internal clock of the machine (the
calender and the time) must be set from the Admin. tab of the operation panel.
RIS
8. Acquiring the Main Motor Parameters

CAUTION:
Always acquire the main motor parameters after replacing the mechanical control PCB or the main motor.
(1) Set the first and second print drums in the machine.
(2) Activate test mode No. 9874 to access into the protected area test mode.
(3) Run Test Mode No. 1105 (Main Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode).
(3) The print drums will begin rotating and obtain the parameters automatically.
(4) Check the panel display to confirm that the process is complete.
[ 17 - 7 ]
9. Acquiring the Second Paper Feed Motor Parameters

CAUTION:
E
Always acquire the Second paper feed motor parameters each time the Mechanical control PCB or the
Second paper feed motor is replaced.
(1) Activate test mode No. 9874 to access into the protected area test mode.
OP
(2) Run Test Mode No. 1106 (Second Paper Feed Motor Parameter Acquisition Mode).
(3) The guide roller moves to the nipping position, and the second paper feed motor begins to rotate and
obtains the parameters automatically.
(4) Check the panel display to confirm that the process is complete.
10. Replacement of the Print drum PCB

UR
1. Turn OFF the machine power. Then insert a clean CF (compact flash) card, in a card adopter with no data
inside, into the card slot on the SH4F PCB.
2. Turn ON the machine power in Test Mode and activate Test Mode No. 104 to upload the test mode settings
OE
from the existing Print Drum PCB onto the CF card by selecting the correct print drum by the test mode.
Keep the CFcard in the machine.
3. With the machine still powered ON and still in the Test Mode, open the front door of the machine and press
the print drum release button (green button), and then pull out the Print Drum out of the machine.
4. Replace the Print drum PCB with a new one. Then insert the Print Drum back in the machine and close the
front door.
5. With the machine still in the Test Mode, enter Test Mode 9874 to go into the protected area test mode.
6. Then activate Test Mode No.1211 and No.1212 to input the Serial Number of that Print Drum, by chosing
the correct print drum by the test mode.
RIS
7. Activate Test Mode No. 106 to download the print drum test mode setting into the Print drum PCB, which
was uploaded in the CF card by step No. 2 above.
8. Turn OFF the machine power, and remove the CF card from the machine.
9. Turn the machine power back ON and if the machine starts up in normal condition, the replacement
procedure is completed.
10. If Error Message No. T97-990 [PC card access error: Specified file not found on the selected drive.] displays,
it means that the Print Drum serial number input by Test Modes No. 1211 and No. 1212 are wrong. In this
case, repeat the procedure from above step 5.
[ 17 - 8 ]
11. Adjusting the Print Position
E
Perform the procedure described below to adjust the print position:
(1) Adjust the master clamp range (See Chapter 14 <Master-Making Section>).
OP
(2) Adjust the Write start position (See Chapter 14 <Master-Making Section>).
(3) Adjust the Print start position (See Chapter 5 <Second Paper Feed Section>).
(4) Adjust the Master-making elongation and shrinkage (See Chapter 14 <Master-Making Section>).
(6) Adjust the FB scan start position (See Chapter 12 <FB Original Scanning Section>).
(7) Adjust the FB scanning image elongation and shrinkage adjustment (See Chapter 12 <FB Original Scanning
Section>).
Precaution in adjustment
UR
Before making above test mode adjustments, it is important that all the mechanical components, such as the
main drive area, paper feed area, print drum area, etc. are adjusted first.
If the machine is equipped with the optional Auto Document Feeder (AF), the test mode adjustment on the AF
unit should be made after the adjustments on the FB (flatbed) scanning is made.
OE
12. Adjusting the Horizontal Print Position
Perform the procedure described below to adjust the horizontal print position:
(1) Adjust the horizontal write position (See Chapter 14 <Master-Making Section>).
(2) Adjust the horizontal print position (See Chapter 9 <Print Drum Section>).
RIS
[ 17 - 9 ]
MEMO
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[ 17 - 10 ]
Chapter 18 PCBs
Chapter 18 PCBs
E
Contents
OP
1. Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 18-2
1) General wiring diagram .................................................................................................... 18-2
2) Power supply section wiring diagram ............................................................................... 18-3
3) Inter-PCB wiring diagram ................................................................................................. 18-4
4) Master-making section wiring diagram ............................................................................ 18-5
5) Paper feed section wiring diagram ................................................................................... 18-6
6) Imaging section wiring diagram ....................................................................................... 18-7
7) Paper ejection section/center transport section wiring diagram ....................................... 18-8
2.
UR
8) Main unit wiring diagram .................................................................................................. 18-9
9) Paper removal section wiring diagram ........................................................................... 18-10
10) Panel section wiring diagram ......................................................................................... 18-11
11) First print drum section wiring diagram .......................................................................... 18-12
12) Second print drum section wiring diagram ..................................................................... 18-13
13) Interlock section wiring diagram ..................................................................................... 18-14
14) Option section wiring diagram ........................................................................................ 18-15
Power Supply Unit Fuse List ................................................................................................. 18-16
OE
RIS
[18-1]
1.
1)
Chapter 18 PCBs
Actuators and sensors TPH

in scanner section 444-80001 (A3)
444-80002 (B4)
Actuators and sensors
installed on
main unit rear side MMR-PCB MAKE-MASTER-PCB RF PCB 3ch Antenna
Scanner PCB
024-28501 024-28511 444-59003 444-59006
Wiring Diagrams

General wiring diagram
in scanning section Actuators and sensors in

PRINTER-PCB
master making unit,
024-50506 first clamp unit
Actuators and sensors in
center transport section
Card counter IV: N
RIS
installed between side plates
112-00004 SH4F-PCB MECHA-CONTROL-PCB of paper feed section
024-50502 in paper ejection section 024-50500 Actuators and sensors

NET-D
in second master
102-00013
removal section
AFVI;N
Panel unit
024-00302
[18-2]
DRUM-PCB in first print drum
LCD-CTL-PCB
023-37138 024-17178
Job sorter IV: N
Antenna
113-00003
OE
444-59002
MAIN-SW-PCB;SAN MODE-KEY-PCB DSP RF PCB 3ch

MM-DRIVE-PCB
024-37201 024-37137 444-59003

024-50503 in second print drum
Actuators and sensors Actuators and sensors in DRUM-PCB
PFR-PCB
installed on paper feed first/second master removal
024-12601 024-17178
section rear side sections, second clamp unit Antenna
444-59002
UR
PF-TRAY-PCB
024-12602
on main unit front side
Paper feed tray

Main motor,
PS16-HWW internal sensors second paper
feed motor & sensor
024-50510

OP
SW
in horizontal sliding section E
1801
2)
024-53001 024-53002
TPH MAKE-MASTER-PCB Master-making MMR-PCB Rear upper power PS16-HWW
024-28503 024-28511 mechanical unit wires 024-28501 supply unit wires 024-53005 024-53008
444-80001 (A3) 024-50510 Power switch wires Power switch assembly
TPH wires
444-80002 (B4)
CN12 CN7 CN3 CN5 CN6
-S -S L-SWin L-SWin
20 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 5 4 2
TGND TGND N.C N.C N.C L-SWout
CN9 19 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02
-S TGND TGND N-SWin N-SWin
01 01 01 01 18 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03
TGND TGND TGND N.C N-SWout
02 02 02 02 17 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
TGND TGND TGND N-SWout N.C N.C RLY+
03 03 03 03 16 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 01 05
TGND TGND TGND N.C RLY-
04 04 04 04 15 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 02 06 6 3 1
TGND TGND TGND L-SWout
05 05 05 05 14 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 VL6P CT2P Power switches (5V relays)
TGND TGND TGND
06 06 06 06 13 08 08 08 08 08 VH7P
TGND TGND TGND
07 07 07 07 12 09 09 09 09 09 To front lower motor wires 01
TPH TGND TGND
08 08 08 08 11 10 10 10 10 10 (Main unit wiring diagram) 02
TPH TPH TPH
09 09 09 09 10 11 11 11 11 11 CT2P
TPH TPH TPH
10 10 10 10 09 12 12 12 12 12
TPH TPH TPH
11 11 11 11 08 13 13 13 13 13
TPH TPH TPH
12 12 12 12 07 14 14 14 14 14
TPH TPH TPH 024-53002
13 13 13 13 06 15 15 15 15 15
+S TPH TPH Rear upper power
14 14 14 14 05 16 16 16 16 16 SH4F-PCB
RIS
TPH TPH
XH14P XH14P 04 17 17 17 17 17 supply unit wires 024-50502
TPH TPH
03 18 18 18 18 18
TPH TPH
02 19 19 19 19 19 CN9 CN9
+S +S GND(5.1V)
01 20 20 20 20 20 01 01 01 01
GND(5.1V)
Power supply section wiring diagram
FE20P FE20P DF1B20P DF1B20P 02 02 02 02

5.1V
03 03 03 03
5.1V
04 04 04 04
/P.F
05 05 05 05
GND(24V)
06 06 06 06
24V-A
07 07 07 07
VH7P VH7P
024-53007
Mechanical control
[18-3]
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB PCB power supply wires
024-50500
CN6
GND (5.1V)
CN1
024-53006
MM-DRIVE-PCB
01 01 01 01 Drive power supply wires 024-50503
GND (5.1V)
02 02 02 02
OE
5.1V
03 03 03 03 CN12 CN9
5.1V GND(18V-1)
04 04 04 04 01 01 01 01
GND (24V) 18V-1
05 05 05 05 02 02 02 02
GND (24V) GND(18V-2)
06 06 06 06 03 03 03 03
24V-B 18V-2
07 07 07 07 04 04 04 04
24V-A
08 08 08 08 XH4P XH4P
24V-C
09 09 09 09
N.C
VH9P 10 10 CN3 CN14
024-53010 GND(24V)
VH10P 01 01 01 01
Rear upper 24V-C
02 02 02 02
GND(35V)
assembly wires CN2 03 03 03 03
N.C GND(35V)
01 01 04 04 04 04
N.C GND(35V)
CN4 02 02 05 05 05 05
DA-DAT 35V
15 15 03 03 06 06 06 06
DA-LAT 35V
UR
14 14 04 04 07 07 07 07
DA-CLK 35V
13 13 05 05 08 08 08 08
SLEEP
12 12 06 06 VH8P VH8P
/24V-ON
11 11 07 07
/TPH-ON CN10
10 10 08 08
/P.F N.C (AC (N)-OP1)
09 09 09 09 01
GND(5.1V) N.C
08 08 10 10 02
N.C (AC (L)-OP1)
07 07 CT10P 03
06 06
05 05
04 04 To scanner unit relay PCB
03 03 (Imaging section wiring diagram)
02 02
01 01
MINI-CT15P
OP
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1802
SH4F-PCB 024-53010 MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-53011 MM-DRIVE-PCB
024-50502 Rear upper assembly wires 024-50500 Rear lower assembly wires A
CN2 CN3 CN27 CN4
024-50503
3)
GND INK-MTR-FG-SNR1
16 16 01 01 A01 A01 A17 A17
SH-TxD DRUM-THRM1
15 15 02 02 A02 A02 A16 A16
/SH-RTS GND
14 14 03 03 A03 A03 A15 A15
GND DRUM-EEP-DI1
13 13 04 04 A04 A04 A14 A14
SH-RxD DRUM-EEP-DO1
12 12 05 05 A05 A05 A13 A13
/SH-CTS DRUM-EEP-CLK1
11 11 06 06 A06 A06 A12 A12
SCLK DRUM-EEP-CS1
10 10 07 07 A07 A07 A11 A11
GND GND
09 09 08 08 A08 A08 A10 A10
/VIPRQ INK-MTR-FG-SNR2
08 08 09 09 A09 A09 A09 A09
/VISRQ DRUM-THRM2
07 07 10 10 A10 A10 A08 A08
GND GND
06 06 11 11 A11 A11 A07 A07
WUP-SW DRUM-EEP-DI2
Chapter 18 PCBs
05 05 12 12 A12 A12 A06 A06

N.C DRUM-EEP-DO2
04 04 13 13 A13 A13 A05 A05
PSU-SLP DRUM-EEP-CLK2
03 03 14 14 A14 A14 A04 A04
GND DRUM-EEP-CS2
02 02 15 15 A15 A15 A03 A03
/SH-SLP GND
01 01 16 16 A16 A16 A02 A02
DRUM-HEL-TxD
MINI-CT16P MINI-CT16P A17 A17 A01 A01
DRUM-HEL-RxD
B01 B01 B17 B17
GND
B02 B02 B16 B16
UPPER-LIMIT-SNR-A
B03 B03 B15 B15
024-53001 UPPER-LIMIT-SNR-B
B04 B04 B14 B14
Master making GND
B05 B05 B13 B13
PILED-SNR-RAD
MAKE-MASTER-PCB mechanical unit wires MMR-PCB 024-53010 B06 B06 B12 B12
Rear upper assembly wires PILED-SNR-RCV
024-28501 B07 B07 B11 B11
024-28511 REGIST-SNR-RAD
CN1 CN5 CN1 CN1 B08 B08 B10 B10
24V-A /MTR-ENB1 REGIST-SNR-RCV
30 01 A15 A15 A01 A01 B09 B09 B09 B09
24V-A MTR-CLK1 GND
Inter-PCB wiring diagram
29 02 A14 A14 A02 A02 B10 B10 B08 B08

24V-A MTR-LAT1 /DRUM-SET-SAFETY-SW1
28 03 A13 A13 A03 A03 B11 B11 B07 B07
GND MTR-DAT1 /DRUM-SET-SAFETY-SW2
27 04 A12 A12 A04 A04 B12 B12 B06 B06
GND /MTR-ENB2 GND
26 05 A11 A11 A05 A05 B13 B13 B05 B05
GND MTR-CLK2 /MST-DSP-MTR-OC2
25 06 A10 A10 A06 A06 B14 B14 B04 B04
GND MTR-LAT2 MST-DSP-MTR-BUF
24 07 A09 A09 A07 A07 B15 B15 B03 B03
GND MTR-DAT2 N.C
23 08 A08 A08 A08 A08 B16 B16 B02 B02
GND GND CHAKUHAN-SNR2
RIS
22 09 A07 A07 A09 A09 B17 B17 B01 B01
GND GND
21 10 A06 A06 A10 A10 MINI-CT34P MINI-CT34P
MTR-DAT2 GND
20 11 A05 A05 A11 A11 024-53011
MTR-LAT2 GND Rear lower assembly wires A
19 12 A04 A04 A12 A12
MTR-CLK2 24V-A
18 13 A03 A03 A13 A13 CN28 CN5
/MTR-ENB2 24V-A GND
17 14 A02 A02 A14 A14 A01 A01 A19 A19
MTR-DAT1 24V-A MAIN-THRM-VOLT
16 15 A01 A01 A15 A15 A02 A02 A18 A18
MTR-LAT1 GND GND
15 16 B15 B15 B01 B01 A03 A03 A17 A17
MTR-CLK1 GND SPF-THRM-VOLT
14 17 B14 B14 B02 B02 A04 A04 A16 A16
/MTR-ENB1 GND GND
13 18 B13 B13 B03 B03 A05 A05 A15 A15
5V WRITE-PH A 5V
12 19 B12 B12 B04 B04 A06 A06 A14 A14
5V WRITE-PH B MAIN-FG-SNR-PHA
11 20 B11 B11 B05 B05 A07 A07 A13 A13
HEL RxD /WRITE-EN A MAIN-FG-SNR-PHB
10 21 B10 B10 B06 B06 A08 A08 A12 A12
HEL TxD /WRITE-EN B 5V
[18-4]
09 22 B09 B09 B07 B07 A09 A09 A11 A11
SNR-DAT WRITE-PD 5V
08 23 B08 B08 B08 B08 A10 A10 A10 A10
/SNR-LAT SNR-CLK SPF-FG-SNR
07 24 B07 B07 B09 B09 A11 A11 A09 A09
SNR-CLK /SNR-LAT MAIN-MTR-PWM
06 25 B06 B06 B10 B10 A12 A12 A08 A08
WRITE-PD SNR-DAT MAIN-MTR-BRK
05 26 B05 B05 B11 B11 A13 A13 A07 A07
/WRITE-EN B HEL TxD SPF-MTR-PWM
OE
04 27 B04 B04 B12 B12 A14 A14 A06 A06
/WRITE-EN A HEL RxD SPF-MTR-BRK
03 28 B03 B03 B13 B13 A15 A15 A05 A05
WRITE-PH B 5V MAIN-RLY-CNTL1
02 29 B02 B02 B14 B14 A16 A16 A04 A04
WRITE-PH A 5V MAIN-RLY-CNTL2
01 30 B01 B01 B15 B15 A17 A17 A03 A03
/FRONT-ACT-ENA1
FE30P FE30P MINI-CT30P MINI-CT30P A18 A18 A02 A02
FRONT-ACT-SCK1
A19 A19 A01 A01
FRONT-ACT-LAT1
CN2 CN6 CN2 CN19 B01 B01 B19 B19
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL FRONT-ACT-DAT1
05 01 05 05 01 01 B02 B02 B18 B18
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 5V
04 02 04 04 02 02 B03 B03 B17 B17
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL /FRONT-ACT-ENA2
03 03 03 03 03 03 B04 B04 B16 B16
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL FRONT-ACT-SCK2
02 04 02 02 04 04 B05 B05 B15 B15
24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL FRONT-ACT-LAT2
01 05 01 01 05 05 B06 B06 B14 B14
FRONT-ACT-DAT2
FE5P 024-53001 FE5P MINI-CT5P MINI-CT5P B07 B07 B13 B13
GND
024-53010 B08 B08 B12 B12
Master making Rear upper assembly wires FRONT-SNR-CLK1
B09 B09 B11 B11
UR
mechanical unit wires /FRONT-SNR-LAT1
B10 B10 B10 B10
FRONT-SNR-DAT1
B11 B11 B09 B09
GND
B12 B12 B08 B08
FRONT-SNR-CLK2
PFR-PCB 024-53010 B13 B13 B07 B07
Rear upper assembly wires /FRONT-SNR-LAT2
024-12601 B14 B14 B06 B06
FRONT-SNR-DAT2
CN1 CN7 B15 B15 B05 B05
5V GND
17 17 01 01 B16 B16 B04 B04
5V MST-DSP-FG-SMR2
16 16 Remaining paper volume sensor A 02 02 B17 B17 B03 B03
COMPRESS-FG-SNR2
15 15 Remaining paper volume sensor B 03 03 B18 B18 B02 B02
GND
14 14 04 04 B19 B19 B01 B01
13 13 Guide roller release motor home position sensor 05 05 MINI-CT38P MINI-CT38P
12 12 Paper size detection sensor 06 06
11 11 Paper detection sensor 07 07
10 10 Paper width potentiometer 08 08
09 09 09 09
GND
08 08 10 10
GND
OP
07 07 11 11
24V-A
06 06 12 12
Guide roller release motor
05 05 13 13
Paper feed clutch
04 04 14 14
Scraper clutch
03 03 15 15
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
02 02 16 16
24V-A
01 01 17 17
MINI-CT17P MINI-CT17P
E
1803
Master end light emitter, 024-28504 MAKE-MASTER-PCB 024-28504
Master making unit rear wires 024-28511 Master making unit front wires
4)
master detection sensor (bottom)
CN3 CN4
GND A (24V-A)
03 03 A01 A01 A01 A01 06 06
Vout B (24V-A)
02 02 A02 A02 A02 A02 05 05
5V /A (24V-A) N.C
01 01 A03 A03 A03 A03 04 04
N.C (GND) /B (24V-A) N.C Load pulse motor
CT3P A04 A04 A04 A04 03 03
N.C (SC) A (24V-B-IL)
A05 A05 A05 A05 02 02
N.C (SIO) B (24V-B-IL)
A06 A06 A06 A06 01 01
N.C (/CS) /A (24V-B-IL)
A07 A07 A07 A07 CT6P
N.C (5V) /B (24V-B-IL)
A08 A08 A08 A08
Second print drum master-making, 2nd step: CW N.C N.C
A09 A09 A09 A09 06 06
Other than above: CCW N.C N.C
A10 A10 A10 A10 05 05
N.C A (24V-A) N.C
A11 A11 B01 B01 04 04
RED MTR1 (24V-B-IL) B (24V-A) N.C Master making unit transport pulse motor
01 02 B01 B01 B02 B02 03 03
BLK Relay MTR2 (24V-B-IL) /A (24V-A)
02 01 B02 B02 B03 B03 02 02
GND /B (24V-A)
CT2P B03 B03 B04 B04 01 01
Vout N.C (GND)
First clamp motor B04 B04 B05 B05 CT6P
5V N.C (GND)
B05 B05 B06 B06
GND GND
B06 B06 B07 B07 06 06
Vout /SW
03 03 B07 B07 B08 B08 05 05
5V MTR1 (24V-A) N.C
02 02 B08 B08 B09 B09 04 04
N.C (24V-A) MTR2 (24V-A) N.C Write pulse motor
01 01 B09 B09 B10 B10 03 03
N.C (GND)
First clamp sensor A CT3P B10 B10 CT20P 02 02
N.C
B11 B11 01 01
CT22P CT6P
03 03
02 02
01 01 Rotary cutter unit
First clamp sensor B CT3P
N.C N.C
RIS
04 01
N.C N.C
03 02
Master making unit Pressure plate unit Relay SW1
02 03
SW2
CN5 01 04
GND
03 03 01 01 CT4P Cutter HPSW
Vout
Master-making section wiring diagram
02 02 02 02
5V
01 01 03 03
GND RED
Master end sensor CT3P 04 04 02 Relay 01
Vout BLK
light receiver (top) 05 05 01 02
5V
06 06 CT2P
MTR1 (24V-A)
07 07 Cutter motor
MTR2 (24V-A)
03 03 08 08
02 02 CT8P
[18-5]
01 01 024-28503 024-28506
TPH pressure sensor CT3P TPH wires Master making unit center wires
CN7
GND
01 01 03 03
Vout
OE
Depressurizing: CW 02 02 02 02
5V
Pressurizing: CCW 03 03 01 01
VLED
04 04 CT3P Master making unit sensor
GND
RED 05 05
01 02 Vout
BLK Relay 06 06
02 01 24V-A
07 07
CT2P GND
08 08 Prism
Thermal pressure motor MINI-CT8P 03 03
02 02
RF PCB 3ch 01 01
024-28509 CT3P Master-positioning sensor
444-59003 Master RF PCB I/F wires
CN1 CN6 CN6
N.C 5V
01 08 08 01 01
UR
N.C GND
02 07 07 02 02 RED
HEL TxD 02 01
03 06 06 03 03 Relay BLK
HEL RxD 01 02
TMP 05 05 04 04 CN11
/RESET N.C (Master-positioning sensor analog voltage) CT2P
04 04 05 05 01
/STOP N.C (GND)
CN2 03 03 06 06 02
N.C RUN N.C (GND) Master stocker fan
01 02 02 07 07 03
N.C Connection signal
02 01 01 08 08 CT3P
N.C
444-59006 03 MINI-CT8P 09 09
Antenna 024-28508 TMP MINI-CT9P
Master making unit front wires
CN3
HEL RF-SIG
01 01 01 01
HEL GND
02 02 02 02
03 03 03 03
TMP TMP
OP
488-90030
Ground wire (U3-80-R3)
Pressure plate unit TPH

E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1804
023-53023 024-53028 024-53028
Paper feed safety Paper feed lower-limit Rear lower
SW lead wire safety SW wires assembly wires A MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
024-50500
5)
CN23
COM 04 24V-A 04 24V-A
01 01 01 01 01
N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C (GND)
02 02 03 02 03 02 02
N.C N.C N.C N.C SW
03 03 Relay 02 03 Relay 02 03 03
NO SW 24V-A
Paper feed lower-limit safety SW 04 01 04 01 04 04
N.C (GND)
CT4P (blue) CT4P (blue) 05 05
SW
023-53023 024-12604 024-53035 06 06
Paper feed safety SW lead wire Front upper assembly wires MTR1 (24V-A)
Elevator upper-limit sensor wires 07 07
MTR2 (24V-A)
08 08
COM 04 24V-A 04 24V-A 06
01 01 01 01 XA8P
N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C 05 N.C
02 02 03 02 03 02
N.C Relay 02 N.C N.C Relay 02 N.C N.C 04 N.C
03 03 03 03
NO SW SW
Paper feed upper-limit safety SW 04 01 04 01 04 Relay 03
Chapter 18 PCBs
CT4P (blue) CT4P (blue) 05 02

Descending: CW 023-12602 06 01
Ascending: CCW Elevator mechanical unit wires CT6P
RED MTR1 (24V-A) MTR1 (24V-A)
01 Relay 02 01 03
BLK N.C N.C
02 01 02 Relay 02
MTR2 (24V-A) MTR2 (24V-A)
CT2P 03 01
Elevator motor CT3P
MM-DRIVE-PCB
Elevator unit Main unit sheet metal
024-12604 024-53035 024-50503
Elevator (top) sensor wires Front upper assembly wires
PFR-PCB CN3
024-12609 GND GND
024-12601 03 03 01 13 A01 A01
Paper feed motor wires Vout Vout
CW 02 02 02 12 A02 A02
5V 5V
CN2 01 01 03 11 A03 A03
RED 02 24V-A GND GND
01 01 01 Paper feed upper-limit sensor A CT3P 04 10 A04 A04
BLK Relay MTR- Vout Vout
02 01 02 02 05 09 A05 A05
24V-A 5V 5V
CT2P 03 03 06 08 A06 A06
CLT- GND GND
Guide roller release motor 04 04 03 03 07 Relay 07 A07 A07
24V-A Vout Vout
05 05 02 02 08 06 A08 A08
CLT- 5V 5V
06 06 01 01 09 05 A09 A09
24V-A GND GND
+ 04 07 07 Paper feed lower-limit sensor B CT3P (blue) 10 04 A10 A10
01 SOL- /SW /SW
N.C N.C 08 08 11 03 A11 A11
02 03 5V 5V
N.C N.C CT8P 12 02 A12 A12
RIS
Relay 02
03 LED- LED-
- 03 03 13 01 A13 A13
04 01 N.C (GND)
02 02 MINI-CT13P A14 A14
Paper feed section wiring diagram
CT4P N.C
01 01 A15 A15
N.C (5V)
Paper feed clutch Paper feed pressure sensor CT3P A16 A16
GND GND
Second master 03 03 01 03 B01 B01
N.C (24V-A) 04 Vout Vout
02 02 02 Relay 02 B02 B02
N.C N.C SW1 04 loading sensor 5V 5V
03 01 01 01 03 01 B03 B03
N.C 02 N.C SW2 GND
02 03 CT3P CT3P B04 B04
N.C (CLT-) LED+ Relay 02 /SW
01 03 B05 B05
LED- 024-53029 5V
CT4P (blue) 04 01 Second master loading sensor wires B06 B06
LED-
Feed tray button CT4P B07 B07
LED
+ 021-51029 SW1 5V B08 B08
01 02 01 04 B09 B09
- Relay Pushbutton SW-ASSY1 SW2 LED
02 01 02 03 B10 B10
Print drum removal button LED+ 5V
[18-6]
Relay 02
CT2P 03 B11 B11
Paper feed reverse-rotation LED- GND B12 B12
024-12605 04 01
prevention solenoid Paper feed (bottom) sensor wires Vout
024-12613 CT4P B13 B13
5V
CN3 Paper feed transport B14 B14
GND 021-51029 Vout B15 B15
03 03 01 01
Vout (bottom) sensor wires Pushbutton SW-ASSY1 5V B16 B16
02 02 02 02
5V
OE
01 01 03 03 CT32P
GND LED 04
Remaining paper volume sensor A CT3P 04 04 Paper sensor light emitter 02 02 01
Vout 5V
05 05 01 01 02 03
5V LED Relay 02
06 06 CT3P 03
GND 5V
03 03 07 07 04 01
Vout
02 02 08 08 03 03 MINI-CT4P
5V N.C
01 01 09 09 Registration sensor light emitter 02 02
GND
Remaining paper volume sensor B CT3P (blue) 10 10 01 01
Vout
11 11 ZHR3P
5V 024-12606
12 12
03 03 MINI-CT12P Paper feed transport (top) sensor wires
02 02
GND 05
01 01 03 03 01
Vout 04
Paper feed lower limit sensor CT3P Paper sensor light receiver 02 02 02
5V
01 01 03 Relay 03
Vout 02
CT3P 04
5V
UR
03 03 05 01
02 02 03 03 MINI-CT5P
N.C
01 01 Registration sensor light receiver 02 02
Guide roller release home position sensor CT3P 01 01
Paper feed tray ZHR3P
024-12608 PF-TRAY-PCB 024-12607

Paper feed tray 024-12602 Paper feed
internal wires mechanical unit wires
CN2 CN1 CN4
GND GND
03 03 01 01 01 01
Vout Length Vout
02 02 02 02 02 02
5V Presence/absence Vout
01 01 03 03 03 03
GND Width Vout
Paper size detection sensor CT3P 04 04 04 04
Vout 5V
05 05 05 05
5V
06 06 FE5P FE5P
GND
03 03 07 07
Vout
OP
02 02 08 08
5V
01 01 09 09
Paper detection sensor CT3P MINI-CT9P
N.C N.C
01 04
RED
01 02 03
YEL Relay
02 03 02
BLK
03 04 01
Paper width potentiometer CT4P
021-51032
E
1805
Potentiometer assembly ASSY
024-53001
TPH MAKE-MASTER-PCB Master-making MMR-PCB SH4F-PCB
024-28503 024-28511 mechanical unit wires 024-53051
444-80001 (A3) 024-28501 TPH signal relay wires 024-50502
TPH wires
444-80002 (B4)
6)
CN10 CN8 CN8 CN4 CN8
TPH CODE2 TPH CODE2 TPH CODE2
01 01 28 28 01 28 A14 A14 A01 A01
02 02 27 27 02 27 A13 A13 A02 A02
03 03 26 26 03 26 A12 A12 A03 A03
THERM THERM STB1
04 04 25 25 04 25 A11 A11 A04 A04
TPH CODE0 TPH CODE0 LAT1
05 05 24 24 05 24 A10 A10 A05 A05
TPH CODE1 TPH CODE1 GND
06 06 23 23 06 23 A09 A09 A06 A06
/STB1 /STB1 GND
07 07 22 22 07 22 A08 A08 A07 A07
CLK1 CLK1 5V
08 08 21 21 08 21 A07 A07 A08 A08
/LAT1 /LAT1 STB2
09 09 20 20 09 20 A06 A06 A09 A09
DI1 DI1 LAT2
10 10 19 19 10 19 A05 A05 A10 A10
GND GND STB3
11 11 18 18 11 18 A04 A04 A11 A11
GND GND LAT3
12 12 17 17 12 17 A03 A03 A12 A12
GND GND STB4
13 13 16 16 13 16 A02 A02 A13 A13
5V 5V LAT4
14 14 15 15 14 15 A01 A01 A14 A14
5V 5V DI4
15 15 14 14 15 14 B14 B14 B01 B01
5V 5V CLK4
16 16 13 13 16 13 B13 B13 B02 B02
/STB2 /STB2 DI3
17 17 12 12 17 12 B12 B12 B03 B03
CLK2 CLK2 CLK3
18 18 11 11 18 11 B11 B11 B04 B04
/LAT2 /LAT2 DI2
19 19 10 10 19 10 B10 B10 B05 B05
DI2 DI2 CLK2
20 20 09 09 20 09 B09 B09 B06 B06
/STB3 /STB3 5V
21 21 08 08 21 08 B08 B08 B07 B07
CLK3 CLK3 5V
22 22 07 07 22 07 B07 B07 B08 B08
/LAT3 /LAT3 GND
23 23 06 06 23 06 B06 B06 B09 B09
DI3 DI3 DI1
24 24 05 05 24 05 B05 B05 B10 B10
/STB4 /STB4 CLK1
25 25 04 04 25 04 B04 B04 B11 B11
CLK4 CLK4 TPH CODE1
26 26 03 03 26 03 B03 B03 B12 B12
/LAT4 /LAT4 THERM
27 27 02 02 27 02 B02 B02 B13 B13
DI4 DI4 TPH CODE4
28 28 01 01 28 01 B01 B01 B14 B14
DF11-28P DF11-28P FE28P FE28P MINI-CT28P MINI-CT28P
Scanner unit
Imaging section wiring diagram
RIS
CCD PCB
CN10
5V
A01 A01 A01 A01
SD0
A02 A02 A02 A02
SD1
A03 A03 A03 A03
SD2
A04 A04 A04 A04
SD3
A05 A05 SD4 A05 A05
A06 A06 A06 A06
SD5
A07 A07 A07 A07
SD6
A08 A08 SD7 A08 A08
A09 A09 A09 A09
DCLK
A10 A10 A10 A10
/LST A11
A11 A11 A11
TRIG
A12 A12 A12 A12
[18-7]
SDIN
A13 A13 A13 A13
SDCLK
A14 A14 A14 A14
/RESET
A15 A15 5V A15 A15
A16 A16 A16 A16
24V-A
A17 A17 A17 A17
GND
B01 B01 B01 B01
OE
GND
B02 B02 B02 B02
GND
B03 B03 B03 B03
GND
B04 B04 B04 B04
GND
B05 B05 GND B05 B05
B06 B06 GND B06 B06
B07 B07 B07 B07
GND
B08 B08 GND B08 B08
B09 B09 GND B09 B09
B10 B10 GND B10 B10
B11 B11 B11 B11
/AKEN
B12 B12 B12 B12
SDOUT
B13 B13 B13 B13
/GAEN
B14 B14 B14 B14
GND
B15 B15 GND B15 B15
B16 B16 GND B16 B16
UR
B17 B17 B17 B17
HIF34P HIF34P
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
024-53010
Relay PCB Rear upper assembly wires 024-50500
CN7 CN8
GND N.C (24V-A)
07 07 01 01 01 01
/LAMP N.C (Original illuminating lamp)
06 06 02 02 02 02
24V-A N.C (24V-A)
05 05 03 03 03 03
GND N.C (Original illuminating lamp)
04 04 04 04 04 04
Flatbed original detection sensor N.C (24V-A)
03 03 05 05 05 05
5V N.C (Original illuminating lamp)
02 02 06 06 06 06
Scanner home position sensor
01 01 07 07 CT6P
MINI-CT7P 08 08
OP
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
MINI-CT15P
To MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
(Power supply section wiring diagram)
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1806
7)
Chapter 18 PCBs
024-53011
Rear lower assembly wires A
RED 04
01
BLU
02 03
N.C Relay 02 N.C
03
WHT
04 01
Second separation fan A CT4P
Suction unit
024-21701
Paper ejection motor wires
RED 04
01
BLU
02 03
N.C N.C MECHA-CONTROL-PCB Central suction unit
RIS
Relay 02
03
WHT 024-50500
04 01
Suction fan CT4P 024-53012 024-53027 024-55801
Rear lower assembly wires B Central transport wires H Central transport wires U
CN30 CN29
24V-A 24V-B 24V-B 24V-B 04 RED
CCW A01 A01 A01 A01 A12 A01 12 01 01
GND GND GND GND BLU
A02 A02 A02 A02 A11 A02 11 02 03 02
RED 02 N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C
01 A03 A03 A03 A03 A10 A03 10 03 02 Relay 03
BLK Relay GND GND GND GND WHT
02 01 A04 A04 A04 A04 A09 A04 09 04 01 04
24V-A 24V-A 24V-A 24V-A 24V-A
CT2P 01 10 A05 A05 A05 A05 A08 A05 08 05 CT4P Central suction fan
GND GND MTR- MTR- MTR-
Paper ejection motor 02 09 A06 A06 A06 A06 A07 A06 07 06
N.C N.C N.C GND GND Relay GND
03 08 A07 A07 A07 A07 A06 A07 06 07
GND GND Vout Vout Vout
04 07 A08 A08 A08 A08 A05 A08 05 08
[18-8]
24V-A 24V-A 5V 5V 5V 02 RED
06 06 05 06 A09 A09 A09 A09 A04 A09 04 09 Relay 01
MTR- Relay MTR- GND GND GND BLK
05 05 06 05 A10 A10 A10 A10 A03 A10 03 10 01 02
N.C A (24V-A) A (24V-A) Vout Vout Vout
04 04 07 04 A11 A11 A11 A11 A02 A11 02 11 CT2P
N.C B (24V-A) B (24V-A) 5V 5V 5V
03 03 08 03 A12 A12 A12 A12 A01 A12 01 12 Central flap motor
/A (24V-A) /A (24V-A) N.C N.C Relay N.C
02 02 09 02 A13 A13 B01 B01 B12 B01 CT12P CW
/B (24V-A) /B (24V-A) N.C N.C N.C
OE
Paper ejection wing pulse motor 01 01 10 01 A14 A14 B02 B02 B11 B02
N.C N.C N.C N.C
CT6P CT10P A15 A15 B03 B03 B10 B03 03 03
N.C N.C N.C N.C
B01 B01 B04 B04 B09 B04 02 02
N.C 24V-B 24V-B
B02 B02 B05 B05 B08 B05 01 01
GND GND GND GND
01 09 B03 B03 B06 B06 B07 B06 CT3P Central flap home position sensor
Vout Vout N.C N.C N.C
02 08 B04 B04 B07 B07 B06 B07
5V 5V GND GND
03 03 03 07 B05 B05 B08 B08 B05 B08
GND GND 24V-B 24V-B
02 02 04 06 B06 B06 B09 B09 B04 B09 024-55802
Vout Vout GND GND Central transport sensor wires
01 01 05 Relay 05 B07 B07 B10 B10 B03 B10
5V 5V N.C N.C N.C
Paper ejection motor FG sensor CT3P 06 04 B08 B08 B11 B11 B02 B11
Paper ejection section/center transport section wiring diagram
GND GND B12 GND B12 GND GND

07 03 B09 B09 B12 B01 03 01 03 03
Vout Vout Vout
08 02 B10 B10 CT24P MINI-CT24P 02 Relay 02 02 02
5V 5V 5V
09 01 B11 B11 01 03 01 01
24V-A B12 B12
03 03 MINI-CT9P CT3P CT3P Central transport
GND
UR
02 02 B13 B13 sensor
N.C
01 01 B14 B14
GND B15 B15
Paper ejection wing CT3P
home position sensor CT30P
04 RED
01
GND BLU
03 03 01 03 03 Relay 02
Vout N.C 02 N.C
02 02 02 Relay 02 03
5V WHT
01 01 03 01 01 04
Paper ejection sensor CT3P CT3P CT4P First separation fan A
024-21703 024-21702
Paper ejection sensor relay wires Paper ejection sensor wires RED
04 01
BLU
03 Relay 02
N.C 02 N.C
03
WHT
01 04
OP
RED 04
01 CT4P
BLU First separation fan B
02 Relay 03
N.C 02 N.C
03
WHT
04 01
Second separation fan CT4P
E
1807
8)
MM-DRIVE-PCB
Main motor assembly
024-50503
024-53039
Main motor wires
CN15
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB RED MTR1 (35V)
01 01 01 01
N.C N.C N.C
02 02 02 02
024-50500 BLU MTR2 (35V)
03 03 03 03
Main motor VL3P VL3P
024-53012
024-53038
Rear lower 024-53019 024-53020 Main/second FG wires
assembly wires B Rear (top) sensor wires Rear (top) sensor relay wires CN2
GND GND
CN26 CN2 01 04 01 01
+ 02 24V-B GND GND MMFG_A MMFG_A
01 01 01 A01 A01 12 01 03 03 02 03 02 02
SOL- Vout Vout MMFG_B Relay MMFG_B
02 Relay 01 02 02 A02 A02 11 02 02 02 03 02 03 03
A (24V-B) 5V 5V Vcc Vcc
CT2P 03 03 A03 A03 10 03 01 01 04 01 04 04
First pressure solenoid B (24V-B) GND GND Main motor FG sensor GND
04 04 A04 A04 09 04 CT3P First position-B sensor CT4P 05 05
/A (24V-B) Vout Vout N.C
05 05 A05 A05 08 05 06 06
/B (24V-B) 5V 5V PMFG_A
06 06 A06 A06 07 06 07 07
A (24V-B) 24V-B GND GND Vcc
09 01 04 07 07 A07 A07 06 Relay 07 03 03 08 08
B (24V-B) SOL- Vout Vout
05 02 03 08 08 A08 A08 05 08 02 02 MINI-CT8P
/A (24V-B) A (24V-B) 5V 5V
07 03 Relay 02 09 09 A09 A09 04 09 01 01
/B (24V-B) B (24V-B) GND GND GND
03 04 01 10 10 A10 A10 03 10 CT3P (blue) First print drum FG sensor 01 04
/A (24V-B) Vout Vout N.C
CT4P 11 11 A11 A11 02 11 02 03
Main unit wiring diagram
/B (24V-B) 5V 5V PMFG_A
12 12 A12 A12 01 12 03 Relay 02
First pressure control pulse motor GND Vcc
CT12P B01 B01 MINI-CT12P 03 03 04 01
Vout Second paper feed motor FG sensor
B02 B02 02 02 CT4P
5V
B03 B03 01 01 024-53039
+ 02 GND
01 B04 B04 CT3P Second position-B sensor Main motor wires
Relay Vout
02 01 B05 B05 CN1
5V RED 35V
CT2P B06 B06 01 02 01 01
Second pressure solenoid GND BLK MTR-
B07 B07 03 03 02 01 02 02
Vout
RIS
B08 B08 02 02 DF1B2P DF1B2P
5V
B09 B09 01 01 Second paper feed motor
A (24V-B) GND 024-53036
09 01 04 B10 B10 CT3P (blue) Second print drum FG sensor CCW CN11
B (24V-B) Vout Front lower motor wires N.C
05 02 03 B11 B11 A01 A01
/A (24V-B) 5V N.C
07 03 Relay 02 B12 B12 A02 A02
/B (24V-B) A (24V-B-IL)
03 04 01 MINI-CT24P 03 03 06 A03 A03
To first horizontal B (24V-B-IL)
CT4P 02 02 05 A04 A04
pulse motor 24V-B-IL
01 01 04 A05 A05
Second pressure control pulse motor (First print drum section 24V-B-IL
CT3P Stage cover sensor 03 A06 A06
/A (24V-B-IL)
wiring diagram) 02 A07 A07
/B (24V-B-IL)
01 A08 A08
24V-C
03 03 CT6P A09 A09
CNT-
02 02 A10 A10
24V-C
01 01 A11 A11
CNT-
[18-9]
CT3P First master making unit position A12 A12
sensor N.C
B01 B01
N.C
B02 B02
A (24V-B-IL)
03 03 01 02 B03 B03
B (24V-B-IL)
02 02 02 01 B04 B04
24V-B-IL
01 01 CT2P B05 B05
Total counter 24V-B-IL
OE
023-53017 024-53021 CT3P Second master making unit B06 B06
Rear upper motor wires position sensor /A (24V-B-IL)
PM lead wire B07 B07
/B (24V-B-IL)
A (24V-A) AUTO-SHUT-OFF B08 B08
09 01 04 03 03 B09 B09
B (24V-A) 5V
05 02 03 02 02 B10 B10
/A (24V-A) Relay N.C (24V-C)
07 03 02 01 01 01 02 B11 B11
/B (24V-A) N.C
03 04 01 CT3P (blue) Master making unit pull-out 02 01 B12 B12
CT4P position sensor CT2P (blue) CT24P
Master counter
Read pulse motor
CN9 CN18 06
A (24V-A) GND To second horizontal
01 01 01 01 03 03 05
24V-B 02 B (24V-A) Vout pulse motor
01 02 02 02 02 02 02 04
BRK Relay /A (24V-A) 5V
02 01 03 03 03 03 01 01 (Second print drum 03
/B (24V-A) GND
CT2P 04 04 04 04 CT3P First print pressure section wiring diagram) 02
24V-B Vout control sensor
05 05 05 05 01
UR
Print drum brake BRK 5V
06 06 06 06 CT6P
A (24V-B) 08 A (24V-B)
06 06 01 07 07 MINI-CT6P 03 03
B (24V-B) 07 B (24V-B) To power switch
05 05 02 08 08 02 02
N.C /A (24V-B) 06 /A (24V-B) assembly 02
04 04 03 09 09 01 01
N.C /B (24V-B) 05 /B (24V-B) (Power supply
03 03 04 10 10 CT3P Second print pressure 01
24V-B 24V-B 024-53012 control sensor
02 02 05 Relay 04 11 11 Rear lower assembly wires B section wiring diagram) CT2P
Print-positioning 01 SOL- SOL-
01 06 03 12 12
pulse motor 24V-B 02 24V-B
CT6P 07 13 13
SOL- SOL-
08 01 14 14
CT8P CT14P
+ 02
01
Relay
02 01
First separation pump solenoid CT2P
+ 02
01
Relay
OP
02 01
Second separation pump solenoid CT2P
024-53009
Rear upper motor relay wires
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1808
021-51029 024-25101
Pushbutton switch Second master ejection unit wires
MM-DRIVE-PCB 024-53037 assembly 1 MTR1 (24V-B-IL) RED
9)
Second master 10 01 02 01
024-50503 MTR2 (24V-B-IL) Relay BLK
09 02 01 02
ejection relay wires 04 SW1 GND
01 08 03 CT2P
SW2 Vout
CN10 03 02 07 04 Second master compression motor
GND LED+ 5V
01 01 02 Relay 03 06 05 Compression: CW
/SW LED- Relay MTR-
02 02 01 04 05 06 Decompression: CCW
5V 24V-B-IL
03 03 CT4P Master making unit removal SW 04 07
LED- GND
04 04 03 08
MTR1 (24V-B-IL) Vout 03 03
05 05 02 09
MTR2 (24V-B-IL) 5V 02 02
06 06 01 10
GND 01 01
07 07 CT10P
Vout CT3P Second master compression motor FG sensor
08 08 5V
Chapter 18 PCBs
09 09 CW
MTR-
10 10
24V-B-IL 02 RED
11 11 01
GND Relay BLK
12 12 01 02
Vout
13 13 CT2P
5V
14 14 Second master disposal motor
CT14P 024-25104
Second master disposal
transport FG wires
GND
03 01 03 03
Vout
02 Relay 02 02 02
First master ejection unit 5V
01 03 01 01
CT3P CT3P Second master disposal
024-24100 024-53016 024-53010 MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-53010 motor FG sensor
First master disposal First master disposal Rear upper Rear upper 024-25100
CCW transport wires relay wires assembly wires 024-50500 assembly wires Second clamp/master disposal sensor wires
CN13 CN15
RED 02 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL 24V-B-IL MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR1 (24V-B-IL) 02 RED
01 01 14 01 14 A01 A01 01 01 11 01 01
BLK Relay MTR- MTR- MTR- MTR2 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL) BLK
02 01 02 13 02 13 A02 A02 02 02 10 02 01 Relay 02
GND GND GND GND GND
CT2P 03 12 03 12 A03 A03 03 03 09 03 CT2P
Vout Vout Vout Vout 08 Vout
First master disposal motor 04 11 04 11 A04 A04 04 04 04 Second clamp motor
5V 5V 5V 5V 5V
05 10 05 10 A05 A05 05 05 07 05 HP return: CW & CCW
GND GND GND GND GND
RIS
06 09 06 09 A06 A06 06 06 06 Relay 06 Master-making action: CCW
024-24102 Vout Vout Vout Vout Vout
07 08 A07 A07 07 07 05 07 03 03
First master disposal 5V Relay 07 5V 07 Relay 08 5V 5V 5V
08 08 07 A08 A08 08 08 04 08 02 02
transport FG wires GND GND GND GND GND
09 06 09 06 A09 A09 09 09 03 09 01 01
Vout Vout Vout Vout Vout
10 05 10 05 A10 A10 10 10 02 10 CT3P Second clamp sensor
GND 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V
Paper removal section wiring diagram
03 03 01 03 11 04 11 04 A11 A11 11 11 01 11
Vout GND GND GND
02 02 02 Relay 02 12 03 12 03 B01 B01 CT11P CT11P 024-25102
5V Vout Vout Vout Second master disposal sensor wires
01 01 03 01 13 02 13 02 B02 B02
5V 5V 5V
First master disposal motor CT3P CT3P 14 01 14 01 B03 B03
MTR1 (24V-B-IL) GND
FG sensor CT14P CT14P B04 B04 06 01 03 03
024-24140 MTR2 (24V-B-IL) Vout
B05 B05 05 02 02 02
First master GND 5V
B06 B06 04 03 01 01
disposal sensor wires Vout Relay GND
B07 B07 03 04 CT3P Second master disposal
5V Vout
B08 B08 02 05 jam sensor
GND N.C (GND) 5V
03 03 01 06 01 06
[18-10]
Vout N.C B09 B09
02 02 02 05 B10 B10 024-53040 CT6P
5V N.C (5V)
01 01 03 04 B11 B11 Master-making/disposal 03 03
GND Relay
First master disposal jam sensor CT3P 04 03 CT22P safety SW lead wire 02 02
Vout
05 02 01 01
5V COM
OE
06 01 01 01 CT3P Second master
N.C N.C
CT6P To rear safety SW wires 02 02 compression
Relay N.C
03 03 03 03 home position sensor
(Interlock section wiring diagram) NO
02 02 04 Second master disposal safety SW
01 01 CT4P (blue)
First master compression CT3P
home position sensor Second master removal unit
GND
01 03
Vout
02 Relay 02
5V
03 01
First master loading sensor CT3P
UR
024-24101 024-53016
First master First master disposal
compression wires relay wires
RED 02 MTR1 (24V-B-IL) MTR1 (24V-B-IL)
01 01 05 01 05
BLK Relay MTR2 (24V-B-IL) MTR2 (24V-B-IL)
02 01 02 04 02 04
GND GND
CT2P 03 Relay 03 03 Relay 03
Vout Vout
First master compression motor 04 02 04 02
5V 5V
Compression: CW 05 01 05 01
Decompression: CCW CT5P CT5P
03 03
02 02
01 01
First master compression motor FG sensor CT3P
024-53040
OP
Master-making/disposal
safety SW lead wire
COM
01 01
N.C N.C To rear safety SW wires
02 02
N.C Relay
03 03 (Interlock section wiring diagram)
NO
First master disposal safety SW 04
CT4P (blue)
E
1809
Panel unit
024-37140 MODE-KEY-PCB
Mode key lead wire
CN6 CN1 024-37137
/KIN6
LCD-CTL-PCB 01 01 02
/KOUT7
02 02 01
023-37138 CT2P 024-37139 CT2P (Board IN)
Main SW lead wire
CN4 CN1
GND
01 01 13 MAIN-SW-PCB;SAN
WUP LED
02 02 12
/WAKEUP 024-37201
SH4F-PCB 03 03 11
LATCH
04 04 10
024-50502 SCK
024-53050 05 05 09
SOUT
Panel wires 06 06 08
CN3
GND
CN1 07 07 07
/WR VCC2
A01 A01 16 16 08 08 06
Vcc COM3
A02 A02 15 15 09 09 05
/RD COM2
A03 A03 14 14 10 10 04
A5 COM1
A04 A04 13 13 11 11 03
Vcc COM0
A05 A05 12 12 12 12 02
A4 GND
A06 A06 11 11 13 13 01
A3
A07 A07 10 10 CT13P 024-37139 CT13P (Board IN)
Vcc
A08 A08 09 09 Main SW lead wire
A2
A09 A09 08 08 CN5 CN2
A1 GND
A10 A10 07 07 01 01 15
10) Panel section wiring diagram
Vcc /KIN5
A11 A11 06 06 02 02 14
A0 /KIN4
A12 A12 05 05 03 03 13
/CS /KIN3
A13 A13 04 04 04 04 12
RIS
Vcc /KIN2
A14 A14 03 03 05 05 11
/SLEEP /KIN1
A15 A15 02 02 06 06 10
P-DOWN /KIN0
A16 A16 01 01 07 07 09
N.C /KOUT6
A17 A17 MINI-CT16P 08 08 08
N.C /KOUT5
A18 A18 09 09 07
N.C /KOUT4
A19 A19 10 10 06
N.C /KOUT3
A20 A20 CN9 11 11 05
/WAIT /KOUT2
B01 B01 20 20 12 12 04
GND /KOUT1
B02 B02 19 19 13 13 03
GND /KOUT0
B03 B03 18 18 14 14 02
D0 GND
B04 B04 17 17 15 15 01
D1
B05 B05 16 16 CT15P CT15P (Board IN)
[18-11]
GND
B06 B06 15 15
D2
B07 B07 14 14 CN8
D3 COM
B08 B08 13 13 01 01 LCD
GND LED0
B09 B09 12 12 02 02
D4 LED1
OE
B10 B10 11 11 03 03
D5 LED2
B11 B11 10 10 04 04
GND LED3
B12 B12 09 09 05 05
D6
B13 B13 08 08 XH5P
D7
B14 B14 07 07
GND
B15 B15 06 06 CN2
/RESET S
B16 B16 05 05 01
/WAKEUP CP1
B17 B17 04 04 02
GND CP2
B18 B18 03 03 03
Vcc N.C
B19 B19 02 02 04
/INT DISP
B20 B20 01 01 05
CD0
MINI-CT20P MINI-CT20P 06
CD1
07
CD2
UR
08
CD3
09
VDD
10
VSS
11
VEE
12
FE12P
CN3
TY1
01
TX1
02
TY0 Touch panel
03
TX0
04
FM4P
CN12
OP
N.C (VLCD_CHECK)
01
N.C (GND_CHECK)
02
PH2P
023-43775
LCD control unit
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1810
RF PCB 3ch
444-59003 024-53030
MM-DRIVE-PCB Print drum drawer
024-53026 wires H
024-50503 Print drum drawer CN1
relay wires H HEL RF-SIG
01 01
HEL GND
CN6 CN6 02 02
5V
01 01 08 08 03 03
GND
02 02 07 07 TMP
HEL TxD
03 03 06 06
HEL RxD
04 04 05 05
/RESET
05 05 04 04 CN3
/STOP N.C
06 06 03 03 01
RUN N.C
07 07 02 02 02
Connection signal
08 08 01 01 03
GND
09 09 MINI-CT8P TMP
Vout
Chapter 18 PCBs
10 10
5V
11 11
24V-C
12 12 SOL-
13 13 First horizontal sliding unit
14 14 024-53030
15 15 Print drum drawer
16 16 wires H
17 17
GND
18 18 05 01 03 03
Vout
MINI-CT18P 04 02 02 02
5V
03 Relay 03 01 01
24V-C
02 04 CT3P First print drum lock position
To print drum drawer wires H SOL-
01 05 sensor
(Second print drum section MINI-CT5P
wiring diagram) First print drum unit
02 24V-C
01
Relay SOL-
01 02
CT2P
First print drum locking solenoid
DRUM-PCB 024-53030
024-53030 024-17172 Antenna
Print drum drawer 024-17178 Print drum internal wires
N.C Connection present/absent
01 wires U CN3
N.C RUN HEL RF-SIG
02 CN2 01 01 01 01
N.C RxD HEL GND HEL GND
03 A10 A01 02 02 02 02 02 02
N.C TxD HEL RF-SIG
RIS
04 A09 A02 01 01 03 03 03 03
N.C GND Connection present/absent N.C
05 A08 A03 06 MINI-CT2P TMP TMP
N.C Vcc RUN N.C
06 A07 A04 05
024-53026 RxD N.C MINI-
MINI-CT6P A06 A05 04 CN4
Print drum drawer TxD N.C CT6P N.C (GND)
A05 A06 03 01 01
relay wires H GND N.C N.C
A04 A07 02 02 02
Vcc N.C N.C (5V)
CN8 A03 A08 01 CN1 03 03
11) First print drum section wiring diagram
INK MTR1 INK MTR1 INK MTR1 GND

A01 A01 20 01 A02 A09 14 14 04 04 01 01
24V-C 24V-C 24V-C OVER1
A02 A02 19 02 A01 A10 13 13 05 05 02 02
INK FG1 INK FG1 INK FG1 INK1
A03 A03 18 03 12 12 06 06 03 03
/BOTTLE SW1 /BOTTLE SW1 B12 B01 /BOTTLE SW1 THRM1
A04 A04 17 04 B11 B02 11 11 07 07 04 04
THRM1 THRM1 THRM1 5V
A05 A05 16 05 B10 B03 10 10 08 08 05 05
INK1 INK1 INK1 GND
A06 A06 15 06 B09 B04 09 09 09 09 CT5P First ink sensor
OVER1 OVER1 OVER1 /BOTTLE SW1 First ink cartridge set SW
A07 A07 14 07 B08 B05 08 08 10 10
GND GND GND 5V
A08 A08 13 08 B07 B06 07 07 11 11
GND GND GND GND
[18-12]
A09 A09 12 09 B06 B07 06 06 12 12
EEP-DI1 EEP-DI1 EEP-DI1 Vout
A10 A10 11 10 B05 B08 05 05 13 13
EEP-DO1 Relay EEP-DO1 EEP-DO1 5V 1 3 2 1 3 2
A11 A11 10 11 B04 B09 04 04 14 14
EEP-CLK1 EEP-CLK1 EEP-CLK1 24V-C
A12 A12 09 12 B03 B10 03 03 15 15
EEP-CS1 EEP-CS1 EEP-CS1 MTR-
A13 A13 08 13 B02 B11 02 02 16 16 03 01
5V 5V 5V
OE
A14 A14 07 14 B01 B12 01 01 MINI-CT16P 02 Relay 02
GND GND N.C
A15 A15 06 15 Mini-CT drawer 22P MINI-CT14P 01 03 023-17026
Vout Vout Ink cartridge set SW assembly
A16 A16 05 16 CT3P (blue)
5V 5V
A17 A17 04 17 03 03
GND GND
A18 A18 03 18 02 02
Vout Vout
A19 A19 02 19 01 01
5V 5V
A20 A20 01 20 CT3P First horizontal home 024-17172
B01 B01 MINI-CT20P position sensor Print drum internal wires
B02 B02 024-53030 03 03
B03 B03 Print drum drawer 03 03 02 02
B04 B04 wires H 02 02 01 01
B05 B05 01 01 CT3P First inking motor FG sensor
B06 B06 CT3P First drive lock release
B07 B07 sensor CW
B08 B08 RED
B09 B09 To print drum drawer 02
Relay 01 BLK
UR
B10 B10 wires H 01 02
B11 B11 (Second print drum CT2P
B12 B12 section wiring diagram) First inking motor
B13 B13
B14 B14
B15 B15
B16 B16 024-53041
B17 B17 024-53030 Print drum safety
B18 B18 Print drum drawer SW lead wire
B19 B19 wires H
B20 B20 24V-C COM
MINI-CT40P To front safety SW wires 01 04 01 01
N.C N.C N.C N.C
(Interlock section 02 02
Relay N.C N.C 03 Relay 02 N.C
03 02 03 03
wiring diagram) SW NO
04 01 04
CT4P (blue) CT4P (blue)
First print drum safety SW
CN7
N.C (DRM-HEL-SEL)
01
N.C (/DRM-HEL-STP2)
OP
02
N.C (/DRM-HEL-RST2)
03
N.C (/DRM-HEL-CON2) A (24V-B-IL)
04 01
B (24V-B-IL)
MINI-CT4P 02
ACOM
To front bottom motor wires 03
Relay BCOM
04
(Main unit wiring diagram) /A (24V-B-IL)
05
/B (24V-B-IL)
06
CT6P
First horizontal pulse motor
E
1811
MM-DRIVE-PCB
024-50503
RF PCB 3ch
CN6
444-59003 024-53030
02 02 wires H
03 03 CN2
HEL RF-SIG
04 04 01 01
HEL GND
05 05 02 02
06 06 To print drum drawer wires H 03 03
07 07 (First print drum section wiring TMP
08 08 diagram)
09 09
10 10 024-53026
12 12 relay wires H
13 13
Second horizontal sliding unit
GND
14 14 Vout
15 15 024-53030
5V Print drum drawer wires H
16 16
24V-C
17 17
SOL- GND
18 18 05 01 03 03
Vout
MINI-CT18P 04 02 02 02
5V
03 Relay 03 01 01
24V-C
CN8 02 04 CT3P Second print drum lock position
SOL-
A01 A01 01 05 sensor
A02 A02 MINI-CT5P
A03 A03
To print drum drawer 02 24V-C Second print drum unit
A04 A04 Relay 01 SOL-
A05 A05 wires H (First print drum 01 02
A06 A06 section wiring diagram) CT2P Second print drum locking
A07 A07 solenoid
A08 A08 DRUM-PCB 444-59002
A09 A09 024-53030 024-17172 Antenna
A10 A10 Print drum drawer 024-17178 Print drum internal wires
N.C Connection present/absent wires U
A11 A11 01 CN3
RIS
N.C RUN HEL RF-SIG
A12 A12 02 CN2 01 01 01 01
N.C RxD HEL GND HEL GND
A13 A13 03 A10 A01 02 02 02 02 02 02
N.C TxD HEL RF-SIG
A14 A14 04 A09 A02 01 01 03 03 03 03
N.C GND Connection present/absent N.C
A15 A15 05 A08 A03 06 MINI-CT2P TMP TMP
N.C Vcc RUN N.C
A16 A16 06 A07 A04 05
RxD N.C MINI-
A17 A17 MINI-CT6P A06 A05 04 CN4
TxD N.C CT6P N.C (GND)
A18 A18 A05 A06 03 01 01
GND N.C N.C
A19 A19 A04 A07 02 02 02
Vcc N.C N.C (5V)
A20 A20 A03 A08 01 CN1 03 03
12) Second print drum section wiring diagram
INK MTR2 INK MTR2 INK MTR2 GND

B01 B01 20 01 A02 A09 14 14 04 04 01 01
24V-C 24V-C 24V-C OVER2
B02 B02 19 02 A01 A10 13 13 05 05 02 02
INK FG2 INK FG2 INK FG2 INK2
B03 B03 18 03 12 12 06 06 03 03
/BOTTLE SW2 /BOTTLE SW2 B12 B01 /BOTTLE SW2 THRM2
B04 B04 17 04 B11 B02 11 11 07 07 04 04
THRM2 THRM2 THRM2 5V
[18-13]
B05 B05 16 05 B10 B03 10 10 08 08 05 05
INK2 INK2 INK2 GND Second ink sensor
B06 B06 15 06 B09 B04 09 09 09 09 CT5P
OVER2 OVER2 OVER2 /BOTTLE SW2 Second ink cartridge set SW
B07 B07 14 07 B08 B05 08 08 10 10
GND GND GND 5V
B08 B08 13 08 B07 B06 07 07 11 11
GND GND GND GND
B09 B09 12 09 B06 B07 06 06 12 12
OE
EEP-DI2 EEP-DI2 EEP-DI2 Vout
B10 B10 11 10 B05 B08 05 05 13 13
EEP-DO2 Relay EEP-DO2 EEP-DO2 5V 1 3 2 1 3 2
B11 B11 10 11 B04 B09 04 04 14 14
EEP-CLK2 EEP-CLK2 EEP-CLK2 24V-C
B12 B12 09 12 B03 B10 EEP-CS2 03 03 15 15
EEP-CS2 EEP-CS2 MTR-
B13 B13 08 13 B02 B11 02 02 16 16 03 01
5V 5V 5V
B14 B14 07 14 B01 B12 01 01 MINI-CT16P 02 Relay 02
GND GND N.C
B15 B15 06 15 Mini-CT drawer 22P MINI-CT14P 01 03 023-17026
Vout Vout Ink cartridge set SW assembly
B16 B16 05 16 CT3P (blue)
5V 5V
B17 B17 04 17 03 03
GND GND
B18 B18 03 18 02 02
Vout Vout
B19 B19 02 19 01 01
5V 5V
B20 B20 01 20 CT3P Second horizontal home 024-17172
MINI-CT40P MINI-CT20P position sensor Print drum internal wires
024-53026 024-53030 03 03
Print drum drawer Print drum drawer 03 03 02 02
UR
relay wires H wires H 02 02 01 01
01 01 CT3P Second inking motor FG sensor
CT3P Second drive lock release
sensor CW
024-53030 02 RED
024-53030 01
Print drum drawer Relay BLK
Print drum safety 01 02
wires H SW lead wire CT2P
24V-C COM Second inking motor
01 04 01 01
To front safety SW wires N.C N.C N.C N.C
02 03 02 02
Relay 03 N.C N.C Relay 03 N.C
(Interlock section wiring diagram) 02 03
SW NO
04 01 04
Second print drum safety SW
OP
A (24V-B-IL)
01
B (24V-B-IL)
02
To front bottom motor wires ACOM
03
Relay BCOM
(Main unit wiring diagram) 04
/A (24V-B-IL)
05
/B (24V-B-IL)
06
CT6P
Second horizontal pulse motor
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1812
24V
023-53026 024-53010 MECHA-CONTROL-PCB 024-53011

Main unit safety Rear upper 024-50500 Rear lower
SW lead wire assembly wires assembly wires
CN25 CN21
COM 04 24V-C 24V-C
Rear cover safety 01 01 01 01 01 01
N.C N.C N.C N.C (GND) N.C (GND)
SW1 02 02 03 02 02 02 02
N.C N.C SW SW
03 03 Relay 02 03 03 03 03
NO 24V-C N.C (GND)
Rear cover safety 04 01 04 04 04 04
N.C (GND) 24V-C
SW1 CT4P (blue) 05 05 05 05
023-53026 SW N.C (GND)
06 06 06 06
Main unit safety N.C (GND) SW
24V-C 07 07 07 07 N.C (GND)
SW lead wire 08 08 08 08
N.C (GND) 24V-B-IL
COM SW 09 09 09 09 24V-B-IL
01 01 04 10 10 10 10
Rear cover safety N.C N.C N.C 24V-C 24V-B-IL
02 02 03 11 11 11 11
Chapter 18 PCBs
SW2 N.C Relay 02 N.C N.C (GND)

03 03 12 12 XA11P
NO SW
Rear cover safety 04 01 13 13
SW2 CT4P (blue) XA13P
024-53016
First master disposal
relay wires
To master-making/disposal 04 24V-C 04
01
safety SW lead wire N.C N.C N.C
First master disposal 03 02 03
(Master-making section 02 N.C N.C Relay 02 N.C
box safety SW 03
SW
wiring diagram) 01 04 01
To master-making/disposal 04
Second master disposal safety SW lead wire N.C
03
box safety SW (Master-making section 02 N.C
wiring diagram) 01
CT4P (blue)
024-53040 MM-DRIVE-PCB
Master-making/disposal 024-53034 024-50503
13) Interlock section wiring diagram
RIS
safety SW lead wire Front safety SW wires
CN13 CN12
COM 04 24V-C
Master making unit 01 01 01 01 11 11
N.C N.C N.C N.C (GND)
safety SW 02 02 03 02 02 10 10
N.C Relay 02 N.C SW
03 03 03 03 09 09
NO N.C (GND) N.C (GND)
Master making unit 04 01 04 04 08 08
24V-C
safety SW CT4 (blue) 05 05 07 07
N.C (GND) N.C (GND)
06 06 06 06
023-53026 SW
N.C (GND) 07 07 05 05 N.C (GND)
Main unit safety 08 08 04 04
SW lead wire 24V-C
N.C (GND) 09 09 03 03 N.C (GND)
10 10 02 02
COM 04 SW
Front cover 01 01 11 11 01 01
N.C N.C N.C 24V-C
safety SW 02 02 03 12 12 XA11P
N.C Relay 02 N.C N.C (GND)
03 03 13 13
NO SW
[18-14]
Front cover safety SW 04 01 14 14
CT4P (blue) XA14P
OE
To print drum 04
drawer wires H N.C
03
First print drum safety SW 02 N.C
(First print drum
section wiring diagram) 01
CT4 (blue)
To print drum 04
drawer wires H N.C
03
Second print drum safety SW 02 N.C
(Second print drum
section wiring diagram) 01
CT4P (blue)
UR
Main motor IL relay
First print drum

safety SW
First master 24V-B-IL
Rear cover disposal box
safety SW2 safety SW
Second print drum
safety SW
OP
Rear cover Master making unit Second master
safety SW1 safety SW disposal box
safety SW Main motor IL relay
Front cover
safety SW
E
1813
NET-D SH4F-PCB AFIV;N MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
102-00013 Bord to Bord
024-00302 024-50500
024-50502
CN1 CN7
D0 N.C 030-51056
01 01 CN9 CN11 A07 A07
D2 GND GND N.C ASM-ADF 024-53010
02 02 01 01 A06 A06
D4 D03 D03 N.C (AF standard accessory) Rear upper
03 03 02 02 A05 A05
D6 D04 D04 N.C assembly wires
04 04 03 03 A04 A04
GND D05 D05
05 05 04 04 A03 A03 CN11
D8 D06 D06 GND GND
06 06 05 05 A02 A02 01 10 01 01
D10 D07 D07 GND GND
07 07 06 06 A01 A01 02 09 02 02
D12 /CE1 /CE1 N.C 5V 5V
08 08 07 07 B08 B08 03 08 03 03
D14 A10 A10 5V 5V
09 09 08 08 B07 B07 04 07 04 04
3.3V /OE /OE TxD TxD
10 10 09 09 B06 B06 05 06 05 05
3.3V A11 A09 RxD RxD
11 11 10 10 B05 B05 06 Relay 05 06 06
A0 A09 A08 /RTS /RTS
12 12 11 11 B04 B04 07 04 07 07
A2 A08 A07 /CTS /CTS
13 13 12 12 B03 B03 08 03 08 08
A4 A13 VCC /AF IRQ /AF IRQ
14 14 13 13 B02 B02 09 02 09 09
GND A14 A06 /ADF present /ADF present
15 15 14 14 B01 B01 10 01 10 10
A6 /WE A05 N.C (5V)
16 16 15 15 C04 C04 MINI-CT10P 11 11
A8 REDY/IREQ A04 N.C
17 17 16 16 C03 C03 024-53010 MINI-CT11P
A10 VCC A03
18 18 17 17 C02 C02 Rear upper assembly wires
A12 VPP1 A02
19 19 18 18 C01 C01 CN10
GND A16 A01 GND GND
20 20 19 19 54269 01 01 01 01
/BUSY A15 A00 N.C N.C N.C (GND)
21 21 20 20 (MOLEX) 02 02 02 02
/OE A12 /BUSY 24V-C N.C (GND)
22 22 21 21 03 03 03 03
/LB A07 D01 24V-C
23 23 22 22 DF1B3P 04 04
GND A06 D02 N.C (24V-C)
24 24 23 23 05 05
/INTRET A05 WP/IOSIS16 N.C (24V-C)
25 25 24 24 Ground 06 06
D1 A04 /CD2
26 26 25 25 DF1B6P
D3 A03 /CD1
27 27 26 26
D5 A02 D11 113-97000
28 28 27 27
D7 A01 D12 Job separator IV I/F external wire assembly
29 29 28 28
GND A00 D13 (Job separator standard accessory)
30 30 29 29
D9 D00 D14 Job separator IV: N
31 31 30 30
D11 D01 D15
32 32 31 31 113-00003
D13 D02 /CE2
33 33 32 32 CN17
D15 WP/IOSIS16 /VS1 GND
34 34 33 33 01 01 01 01
14) Option section wiring diagram
3.3V GND /IORD N.C

35 35 34 34 02 02 Signal A 02 02
3.3V GND /IOWR
36 36 35 35 03 03 03 03
A1 D10 /WE Signal B
RIS
37 37 36 36 04 04 04 04
A3 D11 REDY/IREQ GND
38 38 37 37 05 05 05 05
A5 D12 VCC 5V
39 39 38 38 06 06 06 06
GND D13 /CSEL PGND
40 40 39 39 07 07 07 07
A7 D14 /VS2 24V-C
41 41 40 40 08 08 08 08
A9 D15 RESET BUSY
42 42 41 41 09 09 Tape jam 09 09
A11 /CE2 /WAIT
43 43 42 42 10 10 10 10
/RESET /VS1 /INP ACK Tape present/absent
44 44 43 43 11 11 11 11
GND /IORD /REG /Sorter present
45 45 44 44 12 12 12 12
/CE /IOWR BVD2 N.C
46 46 45 45 13 13 XH12P
R/W A17 BVD1
47 47 46 46 S S
/UB A18 R/W
48 48 47 47 RP13P
/CONNECT A19 D09 Shielded wire
49 49 48 48
/INT A20 D10
50 50 49 49
A21 GND
5077-50P 5077-50P 50 50
VCC
[18-15]
(ELCO) (ELCO) 51 5077-50P
VPP2 Coin Vender
52 (ELCO)
A22 Coin Vender (Excel) I/F external wire assembly
53
A23 New (CV standard accessory)
54 CN12
A24 VBUS
55 01 CN22
PRINTER-PCB A25 USB D+ 5V
OE
56 02 01 01 Paper feed signal 01 01
024-50506 /VS2 USB D N.C (5V)
024-53054 57 03 02 02 Paper ejection signal 02 02
Printer wires RESET 24VA
58 04 03 03 Copy-in-process signal 03 03
/WAIT
CN8 CN13 59 UBB4P 04 04 Copy permit signal 04 04
GND /INP ACK
A19 A19 A01 A01 60 05 05 Size signal 05 05
GND /REG
A18 A18 A02 A02 61 06 06 Color signal 06 06
GND BVD2
A17 A17 A03 A03 62 07 07 Duplex print signal 07 07
GND BVD1
A16 A16 A04 A04 63 08 08 08 08
GND D08 EXIT1
A15 A15 A05 A05 64 09 09 09 09
GND D09 N.C GND
A14 A14 A06 A06 65 10 10 10 10
GND D10 N.C
A13 A13 A07 A07 66 11 11 11 11
GND /CD2 GND N.C
A12 A12 A08 A08 67 12 12 /Connection signal 12 12
GND GND GND
A11 A11 A09 A09 68 13 13 13 13
GND GND
A10 A10 A10 A10 FCN68P 14 14 14 14
GND
A09 A09 A11 A11 DF11-14P DF1B14P
GND
A08 A08 A12 A12
/INT 112-51001 Card counter IV: N
UR
A07 A07 A13 A13
/FAULT Key card counter wire III Ground
A06 A06 A14 A14 112-00004
5V (CC standard accessory)
A05 A05 A15 A15
5V
A04 A04 A16 A16 CN6
3.3V GND
A03 A03 A17 A17 01 01 01 01
/SLCTIN GND
A02 A02 A18 A18 02 02 02 02
3.3V CC-CLK
A01 A01 A19 A19 03 03 03 03
GND /CC-LST
B19 B19 B01 B01 04 04 04 04
GND /CC-DATA
B18 B18 B02 B02 05 05 05 05
DIR /CARD-REQ
B17 B17 B03 B03 06 06 06 06
/AUTOFD RxD
B16 B16 B04 B04 07 07 07 07
SELECT TxD
B15 B15 B05 B05 08 08 08 08
PERROR /CUNT-OP
B14 B14 B06 B06 09 09 09 09
BUSY /CUNT-SET
B13 B13 B07 B07 10 10 10 10
/ACK /M count
B12 B12 B08 B08 11 11 11 11
D7 /P count
B11 B11 B09 B09 12 12 12 12
D6 /CARD-ACT
B10 B10 B10 B10 13 13 13 13
D5 5V
B09 B09 B11 B11 14 14 14 14
D4 5V
OP
B08 B08 B12 B12 15 15 15 15
D3 /CARD EXIST
B07 B07 B13 B13 16 16 S S
D2 /EXIST GND
B06 B06 B14 B14 17 17 JAC15P
D1
B05 B05 D0 B15 B15 MINI-CT17P
B04 B04 B16 B16 Shielded Shielded
/STROBE wire wire
B03 B03 B17 B17
N.C
B02 B02 B18 B18
N.C
B01 B01 B19 B19
MINI-CT38P MINI-CT38P 112-51006
CC relay wires 50
(CC standard accessory)
E
Chapter 18 PCBs
1814
Chapter 18 PCBs
2. Power Supply Unit Fuse List
E
Fuse no. System Status after power reset Connecting part
F1 Primary power system Does not turn on. Main power supply
100V
200V common
OP
250V
10A
F3 24V-OP (option) Not used
250V
3.15A
F4 24V-A T98-947 Paper ejection wing pulse motor
250V 24V-A does not turn ON. Guide roller release motor
6.3A Central flap motor
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
Second separation fan A
Second separation fan B
Paper ejection motor
UR Suction fan
Elevator motor
Paper feed clutch
Scraper clutch
Scanner lamp
Cutter motor
Read pulse motor
Load pulse motor
Write pulse motor
Master stocker fan
F5 24V-B T98-948 Print-positioning pulse motor

OE
250V 24V-B does not turn ON. First pressure control pulse motor
6.3A Second pressure control pulse motor
First pressure solenoid
Second pressure solenoid
First separation fan A
First separation fan B
Central suction fan
First separation pump solenoid
Second separation pump solenoid
Print drum brake
First horizontal pulse motor
Second horizontal pulse motor
First master compression motor
Second master compression motor
First master disposal motor
RIS
Second master disposal motor

First clamp motor
Second clamp motor
Master making unit transport pulse motor
[18-16]
Chapter 18 PCBs
Fuse no. System Status after power reset Connecting part

F6 24V-C Error display not currently Job separator
E
250V available AF: N
3.15A Rear cover safety SW1 First print drum locking solenoid
indicated to be OFF Second print drum locking solenoid
Total counter
Master counter
First inking motor
OP
Second inking motor
Rear cover safety SW1
Rear cover safety SW2
First master disposal box safety SW
Second master disposal box safety SW
UR
OE
RIS
[18-17]
Chapter 18 PCBs
MEMO
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
[18-18]
[ Blank Page ]
E
OP
UR
OE
RIS
E
OP
UR
OE
MZ 770 / MZ790 / MV7690C Technical Manual

(Rev. 0.3)
Published April 2004
RIS
Reproduction and duplication prohibited

Edited and published by: Technical Training Center,
Riso Kagaku Corporation
The contents of this manual are subject to change

without notice to permit product improvements.

RISO MZ Servicemanual Engl

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RISO MZ Servicemanual Engl

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E

Copyright : 2005 Riso Kagaku Corporation

Dealers. Reproduction and/or transmittal of this material in any form

RISO INTERNATIONAL GROUP

• Be careful to avoid getting neckties, clothing, long hair, or similar articles

• Never work on the machine while it is operating.

• Be careful to avoid injuries caused by springs or sharp edges of sheet

Chapter 13 : AF Scanning Section

2. Description of Jigs .................................................................................................................. 1-8

Options Installation Procedures .......................................................................................... 1-11

5. Removing Exterior Covers ................................................................................................... 1-38

awareness and experience regarding repairs necessary to insure end-user satisfaction.

Assembly and Installation

Unless specified otherwise, perform the removal procedures in

(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts Half pierced

[Standard Tool list]

Type Tip size Shaft length, etc. Type Rem arks

No. 2 (100 mm–150 mm) Feeler gauge

5.0 mm 4.0 mm 3.0 mm

1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

[Replacement of the Lithium Battery]

1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service

Important Safety Precautions

II. Protection of the machine:

3. Always connect electrical connectors firmly.

I. To avoid electrical failure:

II. Protection of the electrical components:

Wire harness connector

Press the ends.

Press the center, firmly.

Electrical system work

Light receiving section section

Light receiving Light receiving Light-emitting

• In an N.O. type microswitch, pressing the switch

(3) Those that are too hot, cold, humid, or dry.

Temperature range: 15 degrees Celsius - 30 degrees Celsius

Humidity range: 40% - 70% No condensation allowed

(6) Dusty atmosphere.

(7) Any tilted location.

(Installation height difference: 10 mm max. front - rear, 10 mm max. left - right).

• Never connect the ground wire to any of the following:

Jig: 8 mm (Dia.) x 160 mm (Length) Jig: 4 mm (Dia.) x 120 mm (Length)

* These part numbers are accurate as of December 2004.

スキャナカバー;右を取り外す。 1. スキャナカバー;右 6. Replace the Master making unit as before.

お願い Shock absorbing sheets

Important: Slightly slide the securing plate upwards

8. Replace the Scanner Cover; R.

1. Print Cylinder (Drum) Preparation

NOTE : If the action is interrupted, restart the test mode “No.887”.

- Model name indication label A3

RISO Stand D Type (II) Installation Procedure

1. Secure two Guide Pins on the top of the stand.

3. Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet

RISO Stand N Type (II) Installation Procedure

2. Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet

Document Storage Card DM-128CF;Z

UR 1. Remove the cover plate on the Interface port

2. Insert the Document storage card into the slot until

3. Replace the cover plate.

ンカバーを取り外す。 5) Auto Document Feeder AF-VI: N

4. Dismount the Stage cover.

Remove the Gauge cover after putting a marking

6. Remove the Scanner rear cover.(four screws)

8. Remove the securing screws on the Original （２ケ所）

（CE宣言書；EU 向け）........................ 1枚共通手順

給排紙カバー設置手順書（2COLOR） SH PCB Securing Plate